Exposcop 7000 Service Manual PDF

PREFACE
The IMS2760 Service Manual provides all the information needed to operate and perform safe and
effective service on the IMS2760. W e recommend the first-time user read the entire manual before
servicing the IMS2760 Image System.
NOTE: Reading this manual doe's not necessarily ensure the reader the ability to
service this equipment.
The IMS2760 System Manual is divided into the following Sections:
1.0 Introduction: This section provides information to assemblers.
2.0 Safety: This Section provides safety information for the user / operator.
3.0 General Description: This section provides Basic overview of the IMS2760 image
system.
4.0 Description of Operation: This section provides the operator instructions for the
system.
5.0 DHHS Adjusting Instructions with Recording of Data: T h i s section describes

the procedures that must be performed to insure system compliance with the C D R H
requirements.
6.0 Table of Signals I Symbols: This section describes the signal and symbols used in
the IMS2760 system.
7.0 Identification of Major Image Processor Components for the IMS2760:

This Section consists of illustrations that locate, identify and label main components of
the IMS2760 image system.
8.0 IMS2760 Image System: This section contains diagrams, electrical interfaces,
schematics, illustrations,troubleshooting guides, location of major component parts of
Image System. A l s o includes, basic disk operating system commands, and definitions
of commands used to service the image system.
Appendix : This Section contains additional information on the system, i.e., Manual
revision record, unpacking and packing instructions.
Copyright 1995 by IMS Corporation. All rights reserved. Reproduction or issue to third
parties in any form is not permitted without express written authority of IMS Corporation.
Exposcop Plus IMS2760 Preface 08/23/95

International Medical Systems Rev. 1 - i
INTRODUCTION
INFORMATION T O ASSEMBLERS
How to Use This Manual
This manual is intended for the properly trained service engineer who w i l l perform the
installation, maintenance, and calibration on the Exposcop Plus IMS2760 C - A R M system.
The procedures in this manual should not be attempted by someone who is not properly
trained to work on X-ray systems of this type.
Reading this manual does not alone qualify the reader to maintain or service the system.
This manual is intended to compliment classroom training normally required of a service
technician or field engineer familiar with this type of equipment.
This manual does not contain procedures that can be performed by the system operator.
The contents of this manual are believed accurate at the time of publication. However,
changes in design and additional features may be incorporated in the hardware or software
that are not reflected in this version of the manual.
This manual contains the accepted procedures that must be performed to insure system
compliance with the C D R H requirements. The tests outlined must be performed by a
qualified service engineer during a system's installation and prior to customer acceptance.
These tests should be performed for C D R H certified systems prior to any known
upcoming C D R H inspections.
A list of approved test equipment has been incorporated into the manual. This equipment,
or equivalent, must be used to perform these tests successfully. A record of the equipment
used, containing model number, serial number, and calibration date, should be kept with
the results.
Testing conditions, precautions and prerequisites listed must be considered.
Each test must be followed to insure proper system compliance. Whenever more than one
procedure is applicable, other acceptable test methods are incorporated i n the manual.
Check sheets are provided when necessary. A s the test procedure is accomplished, the
measurements or calculations must be annotated on the appropriate check sheet. When
the final step of the test procedure is accomplished, the data gathered on the check sheet
must be used to verify compliance.
Exposcop 7000 Section 1 03/21/96

International Medical Systems Introduction Rev. 1 - 1
DO N O T DESTROY T H E C H E C K SHEETS.
They should be retained with the system's documents for future reference. Whenever
the system is tested by a C D R H inspector, the data contained on these check sheets w i l l be
valuable in the event of any system compliance questions.If any non-compliance cannot be
corrected, contact an authorized International Medical Systems, Inc. representative
immediately.
INFORMATION F O RUSER AND ASSEMBLERS
RESPONSIBILITY F O R M A I N T E N A N C E
This maintenance manual contains procedures by which a properly trained and qualified
service technician can keep the system operating properly and repair it should it
malfunction.
It is the responsibility of the owner of the system to ensure that installation, calibration,
modification, and repair of the system are performed only by qualified service technicians.
Circuits inside the equipment use voltages that can cause serious injury or death from
electrical shock. To avoid this hazard, operator should never be expected or allowed to
perform any type of service task except as specifically instructed in the Operator's Manual.
If a mechanical or electrical problem is encountered by the operator during the operational

check procedure or during use of the system, a qualified service technician must be notified
immediately and system should not be used until repairs have been completed.

RECORD KEEPING RESPONSIBILITIES
Detailed records must be kept when the system is installed, calibrated, and repaired. It is
the responsibility of the service technician who performs these procedures to complete the
forms listed below and send copies of the forms directly to the interested parties.
RECORD W H E N REQUIRED
Service L o g When any service is performed on the system.
When a calibration is performed on the system.
F D A F o r m 2579 Report of When a system is installed, or when any

Assembly of Diagnostic of the following certified components are
X-ray System ( Four copies replaced or added:
are provided).
X-ray Tube Housing and High-Voltage

Generator.
Beam Limiting Assembly.
Image Receptor.
X-ray Control Unit.
One copy to International Medical Systems, Inc.

One copy to F D A .
One copy to State.
One copy to Hospital.
F D A Equipment Locator Card When system installation is completed. This

(Page Rev. 1-4 ) form is the last page in this section.
Return copy of form to I . M . S .
In-Hospital Check-out When system is installed.

HM
International Medical Systems
SECTION # 1
INTRODUCTION
IMS2000
Service Manual
INTRODUCTION
INFORMATION TO ASSEMBLERS
H o w to Use T h i s M a n u a l
This manual is intended for the properly trained service engineer w h o w i l l perform the
installation, maintenance, and calibration on the Exposcop Plus IMS2760 C - A R M system.
The procedures i n this manual should not be attempted by someone w h o is not properly t r a i n e d
to w o r k on X-ray systems of this type.
Reading this manual does not alone qualify the reader to maintain or service the system.
This manual is intended to compliment classroom training normally required of a service
technician or field engineer familiar w i t h this type of equipment.
This manual does not contain procedures that can be performed by the system operator.
The contents of this manual are believed accurate at the time of publication. H o w e v e r , changes
i n design and additional features may be incorporated i n the hardware or software that are not
reflected i n this version of the manual.
This manual contains the accepted procedures that must be performed to insure system
compliance w i t h the C D R H requirements. The tests outlined must be performed by a
qualified service engineer during a system's installation and prior to customer acceptance.
These tests should be performed for C D R H certified systems prior to any k n o w n upcoming
C D R H inspections.
A list of approved test equipment has been incorporated into the manual. This equipment,
or equivalent, must be used to perform these tests successfully. A record of the equipment
used, containing model number, serial number, and calibration date, should be kept w i t h
the results.
Testing conditions, precautions and prerequisites listed must be considered.
Each test must be followed to insure proper system compliance. Whenever more than one
procedure is applicable, other acceptable test methods are incorporated i n the manual.
Check sheets are provided w h e n necessary. A s the test procedure is accomplished, the
measurements or calculations must be annotated on the appropriate check sheet. W h e n the
final step of the test procedure is accomplished, the data gathered on the check sheet must be
used to verify compliance.

International M e d i c a l Systems Introduction Rev. 1 - 1
D O N O T D E S T R O Y T H E C H E C K SHEETS.
They should be retained w i t h the system's documents for future reference. Whenever the
system is tested by a C D R H inspector, the data contained on these check sheets w i l l be
valuable i n the event of any system compliance questions.If any non-compliance cannot be
corrected, contact an authorized international M e d i c a l Systems, Inc. representative
immediately.
INFORMATION FOR USER A N D ASSEMBLERS
RESPONSIBILITY FOR M A I N T E N A N C E
This maintenance manual contains procedures by w h i c h a properly trained and qualified

service technician can keep the system operating properly and repair it should it
malfunction.
It is the responsibility of the owner of the system to ensure that installation, calibration,
modification, and repair of the system are performed only by qualified service technicians.
Circuits inside the equipment use voltages that can cause serious injury or death from
electrical shock. To avoid this hazard, operator should never be expected or allowed to
perform any type of service task except as specifically instructed i n the Operator's M a n u a l .
If a mechanical or electrical problem is encountered by the operator d u r i n g the operational

check procedure or during use of the system, a qualified service technician must be notified
immediately and system should not be used until repairs have been completed.

R E C O R D K E E P I N G RESPONSIBILITIES
Detailed records must be kept w h e n the system is installed, calibrated, and repaired. It is
the responsibility of the service technician w h o performs these procedures to complete the
forms listed below and send copies of the forms directly to the interested parties.
RECORD W H E N REQUIRED
Service L o g When any service is performed on the system.
W h e n a calibration is performed on the system.
F D A F o r m 2579 Report of W h e n a system is installed, or w h e n any

Assembly of Diagnostic of the following certified components are
X-ray System ( F o u r copies replaced or added:
are provided).
X-ray Tube H o u s i n g and High-Voltage

Generator.
Beam L i m i t i n g Assembly.
Image Receptor.
X-ray Control Unit.
One copy to International M e d i c a l Systems, Inc.

One copy to F D A .
One copy to State.
One copy to Hospital.
F D A Equipment Locator Card W h e n system installation is completed. This

( Page Rev. 1-4 ) form is the last page i n this section.
Return copy of form to I.M.S.
I n - H o s p i t a l Check-out W h e n system is installed.

SAFETY
TO T H E USER
THE SAFETY OF B O T H PATIENT A N D OPERATOR HAS B E E N A MAJOR CONSIDERATION

DURING T H E D E V E L O P M E N T OF THE INTERNATIONAL M E D I C A L SYSTES, INC.
M O B I L E S U R G I C A L C - A R M SYSTEM. PROPER C A R E , USE, A N D O B S E R V A N C E OF A L L
PRECAUTIONS W I L L INSURE SAFE A N D R E L I A B L E OPERATION OF THE EXPOSCOP
PLUS. MISUSE, H O W E V E R , C A N RESULT IN D A M A G E TO T H E EQUIPMENT A N D / O R
SERIOUS PATIENT O R OPERATOR INJURY.
RADIATION WARNING
X - R A Y S A N D G A M M A - R A Y S A R E DANGEROUS TO B O T H OPERATOR A N D OTHERS IN

T H E PROXIMITY UNLESS ESTABLISHED SAFETY E X P O S U R E GUIDE LINES A R E
STRICTLY COMPLIED WITH.
U S E F U L A N D S C A T T E R E D B E A M S C A N C A U S E SERIOUS O R F A T A L INJURIES T O A N Y
P E R S O N S I N T H E S U R R O U N D I N G A R E A IF U S E D B Y U N S K I L L E D O P E R A T O R S .
APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS MUST B E T A K E N TO AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE
RADIATION B E A M A N D L E A K A G E F R O M THE SOURCE HOUSING.
O N L Y AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL SHOULD OPERATE OR DIRECT THE OPERATION OF

THE EQUIPMENT. THEY ALSO SHOULD B E C O M P L E T E L Y FAMILIAR A N D C O M P L Y
WITH A L L ESTABLISHED SAFETY EXPOSURE FACTORS A N D PROCEDURES OUTLINED
I N S U B C H A P T E R J O F T I T L E 21 O F T H E C O D E O F F E D E R A L R E G U L A T I O N S ,
(DIAGNOSTIC X - R A Y A N D THEIR M A J O R COMPONENTS). A L S O T H E N A T I O N A L
C O U N C I L O N R A D I A T I O N P R O T E C T I O N (NCRP) N O . 33 " M E D I C A L X - R A Y A N D G A M M A -
R A Y P R O T E C T I O N F O R E N E R G I E S U P T O 10 M E V - E Q U I P M E N T D E S I G N A N D U S E " .
I N D I V I D U A L S I N V O L V E D W I T H P L A N N I N G O F X - R A Y E Q U I P M E N T A N D ITS
INSTALLATION MUST B E COMPLETELY FAMILIAR A N D C O M P L Y WITH THE NCRP
NO. 49 ( S T R U C T U R A L S H I E L D I N G D E S I G N A N D E V A L U A T I O N F O R M E D I C A L U S E O F
X - R A Y S A N D G A M M A - R A Y S O F E N E R G I E S U P T O 10 M E V ) .
STATE A N D L O C A L REGULATIONS A L S O M A Y A P P L Y T H A T M A Y DIFFER SLIGHTLY

F R O M FEDERAL REGULATIONS.
F A I L U R E TO O B S E R V E THESE W A R N I N G S C A N R E S U L T IN SERIOUS O R F A T A L
B O D I L Y INJURIES T O T H E O P E R A T O R OR PERSONS IN T H E A R E A .
E X P O S C O P 7000 Section 2.0 03/21/96

International Medical System Safety Rev.l - 1
MECHANICAL-ELECTRICAL WARNING
DIAGNOSTIC SURGICAL C - A R M SYSTEMS.
A L L T H E M O V A B L E A S S E M B L I E S A N D P A R T S O F THIS E X P O S C O P 7000 S H O U L D B E
OPERATED WITH CAUTION A N D INSPECTED R E G U L A R L Y IN A C C O R D A N C E WITH THE
R E C O M M E N D A T I O N S STATED IN THE USERS A N D SERVICE M A N U A L S .
O N L Y PROPERLY TRAINED A N D QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL SHOULD B E

A L L O W E D ACCESS TO A N Y INTERNAL PARTS. LIVE ELECTRICAL TERMINALS A R E
D E A D L Y . B E S U R E T H A T L I N E D I S C O N N E C T S W I T C H E S A R E O P E N (OFF) A N D T H A T
PRECAUTIONS A R E T A K E N BEFORE OPENING ACCESS DOORS, R E M O V I N G
ENCLOSURES A N D PANELS, OR A T T A C H I N G ACCESSORIES.
DO NOT R E M O V E ACCESS COVERS F R O M THE GENERATOR, CONTROL UNIT, OR M A I N

POWER A S S E M B L Y UNTIL T H E M A I N A N D A U X I L I A R Y POWER SUPPLIES H A V E B E E N
DISCONNECTED.
F A I L U R E T O O B S E R V E T H E A F O R E M E N T I O N E D M A Y R E S U L T IN SERIOUS O R
POSSIBLY F A T A L INJURY T O THE OPERATOR OR PERSONS IN THE A R E A .

TO T H E INSTALLER
The information in this section is intended to help the service engineer establish safe practices for
installation and maintenance of the E X P O S C O P 7000 C - A R M .
Potential hazards exist in the operation and the service of medical electronic devices and x-ray
systems. A l l users and operators must understand the safety and emergency procedures, and know
how to take adequate precautions to protect themselves and others from possible injury. A l l operators
and service engineers must be familiar with and understand the safety and emergency procedures,
operating instructions, and preventive maintenance schedules and procedures given in the operator's
manual.
Operators must know how to recognize hazardous and potentially hazardous conditions, and know
how to protect adequately themselves and others from possible injury.
The E X P O S C O P 7000 C - A R M X - R a y system presents no hazards unusual for mobile C - A r m

equipment and meets all safety requirements applicable to medical electronic equipment of this type.
RESPONSIBILITY
It is the responsibility of the owner to ensure that only trained and qualified personnel operate
the system. The operators must have obtained credentials from local, state and federal authorities
where required.
If the system fails to operate properly or fails to respond to system controls as outlined i n the
operators manual, the local authorized International Medical Systems, Inc. Dealer
representative should be called to evaluate and repair the system.
The user (Hospital Administration) is responsible for verifying continued compliance of: calibration
of m A , k V , Time/mAs, and alignment of the useful beam. This must be accomplished according to
the maintenance schedule. The owner must make sure that only trained and qualified service
personnel perform installation, maintenance, calibration, and repair of the system.
Compliance with applicable local and federal statutory and regulatory requirements is the
responsibility of the user hospital administration. The user must consult with local, state, and federal
agencies regarding requirements and regulations applicable to the use.
International Medical Systems, Inc. assumes no responsibility or liability for after

sale operating and safety practices: nor can it be responsible for personal injury or
damage resulting from misuse of its systems.
Address questions and comments regarding safety to the appropriate International Medical
Systems, Inc. Dealer representative.

Hazards
Possible hazards associated with unsafe operation of this type equipment are described below with
the safety precaution that should be taken.
1. X-ray Tube / Housing Hazards
A l l persons working with or who are exposed to X-ray tubes must take precautions to protect
themselves against serious injury. ( Be alert as carelessness can cause serious or even
fatal injuries).
The operation of X-ray tubes may involve the following hazards:
a. High voltage: Normal operating voltages can be deadly.
b. Hot oil: Tube housings contain dielectric oil which can reach high temperatures. If the tube
housing ruptures due to overload the hot oil can cause serious burns.
c. X-ray radiation: X-ray tubes produce X-radiation that is dangerous, possibly fatal.
2 . Mechanical Movement Hazards
The operator should always be alert observing the motorized movement of the vertical tube arm
assembly, or rotation of the C - A r m portion to avoid collision with any person or object.
3. Flammable Gas Hazard
The system must never be used in the presence of flammable anesthetics, or other flammable gasses,
liquids, or vapors. Gasses and vapors can be ignited by electrical arcs that can occur during normal
operation of power contactors, switches, circuit breakers, and other circuit components.
If flammable liquids, gasses, or vapors are present before the system is turned on, do not unplug
it and do not turn it on.
If flammable substances are detected after the system has been turned on, Do not turn the system
off; do not touch any of the controls, switches, or knobs; do not unplug it.
Remove all personnel immediately. Then ventilate the room to clear room of
flammable vapor or gas. Remove any flammable liquids that are producing
flammable vapors to a safe storage area.

GENERAL SAFETY
Under no circumstances should any of the safety interlocks in the system be

removed, bypassed, jumpered or otherwise disabled.
Before cleaning the equipment always unplug the A C power cable from the wall.
Water, liquid soap, or other liquids, if allowed to drip into the equipment will cause
electrical short circuits possibly leading to electrical shock or fire hazards. For this
reason food or beverages containers should never be allowed on any parts of the equipment. They can
tip over and introduce conductive substances into the electrical circuitry.
The E X P O S C O P 7000 should never be operated in a location where conductive fluids such as water,
saline solution etc. may spill on any part of the equipment unless the equipment is covered by a
protective waterproof draping.
ELECTRICAL SAFETY
High voltage is present in the equipment always. Disconnect the power supply from the source
of power before removing any of the covers. Serious or fatal injuries can result from accidental
contact with high voltage circuits. To avoid this hazard, operators should never under any
circumstances remove any of the unit's covers.
Hazardous voltage areas:
1. High voltage transformer and X-ray tube assemblies —upwards of 110,000 volts.
2. Power transformers — 220Vac and 120Vac.
3. Image power supply control assemblies — 220Vac— 120Vac.
4. Generator invertor control up to 300Vdc at 20Khz
If equipment must be serviced with the covers removed, then observe the following precautions:
Observe the two-person rule when working around or near lethal voltages. A person who is familiar
with the emergency power removal procedure must be present. This person must remain clear
of the machine and be prepared to turn of the machine in an emergency.
D o not perform maintenance in any area without fully understanding the circuits and voltages present.
Maintenance and repair of the E X P O S C O P 7000 should only be done by a trained and qualified
service person. Never assume a capacitor is discharged. Use a grounded shorting device when
working on circuits with capacitors, even when power is disconnected. B e sure the connections to
the system are proper as described in the installation section of this manual.

Electrical Safety Continued:
Do not remove the Ground wire from the Generator and High Voltage Tank. Failure to ground the
Generator and High Voltage Tank properly can create a shock hazard that could cause serious bodily
injury or death. It is essential that a proper earth ground be provided as specified in the installation
section. These protective grounds should be inspected periodically.
Radiation Safety
The X-ray tube assembly produces X-radiation when energized. Never operate this device without
proper X-ray shielding in place.
The owner must designate areas suitable for safe operation and service of the system. The owner
must ensure that it is used only in these designated areas.
Radiation protection surveys and X-ray system calibration checks must be completed by trained
and qualified experts. The radiation survey reports must show that the installed equipment meets
requirements of the U . S . Department of Health and Human Services and all local, state, and federal
regulations before the system may be routinely used.
The system must be operated only by trained qualified personnel who understand the use of X-ray
tubes, collimation devices, patient positioning, and radiation safety procedures.
With the installation of X-ray systems consideration of room shielding (lead), ability of floor, ceiling,
and walls to attenuate scatter radiation. The use of lead draping and other necessary precautions to
provide necessary protection for personnel should be observed.
Physician in charge of a radiological procedure must ensure that all personnel in the room are
provided with protective clothing that must be worn with radiation monitoring devices.
X-RAY T U B E S A F E T Y
The X-ray tube can generate extremely high temperatures in its anode portion during operation.
The heat generated in the anode is radiated to the dielectric oil inside the tube housing. This heat is
conducted through the housing and radiates to the air. Misuse of the tube can result in a rupture of the
tube housing causing hot o i l to escape, potentially resulting i n serious burns. (Operators of the
system should take all necessary precautions to avoid a rupture and hot oil
leakage).

MAIN POWER FAILURE
M a i n A C power can be interrupted by loss of service outlet, overloads that blow fuses or trip circuit
breakers. The owner should have a dedicated, properly rated power line installed for this system
helping to avoid these problems. Should power failure occur, do not use emergency lighting circuit i f
the system is operated with a line plug. The system should remain off until power is restored.
SYSTEM PROBLEM
Repeated circuit breaker tripping or blown fuse after resetting or replacment, may suggest an
equipment malfunction. D o not attempt to operate the system until a qualified service technician can
evaluate the system and repair if needed.
If any of the system controls fail to respond as described in the Operators Manual, the operator
should if the circumstances allow:
1. Turn system off
2. Disconnect the system from outlet power or turn off wall breaker.
3. Contact a qualified trained service engineer immediately.
EQUIPMENT OR ELECTRICAL FIRE
The owner should develop emergency policies and procedure for the operator in the area the system
is installed. This w i l l included the following safety measures:
1. Turn off equipment and disconnect the system from the main A C power.
2. Evacuate everyone from the area.
3. C a l l for help
4. Use only a fire extinguisher approved for electrical fires.

EQUIPMENT MODIFICATIONS
The owner is responsible for maintaining the system and must not allow any unauthorized
modifications to the system.
Modifications or additions to the equipment must be made according to statutory requirements

and generally accepted engineering regulations.
A s manufacturers, assemblers, installers or importers, we cannot regard ourselves responsible in

particular for safety, reliability and performance of equipment if:
-Installation, extensions, readjustments, modifications or repairs are not performed by persons

authorized by International Medical Systems Inc.
-Components affecting the safety of the equipment are not replaced on failure by original spare
parts.
-The electrical installation of the room concerned does not comply with requirements specified in
the DHHS-Supplement and Adjusting Instructions.
-The equipment is not used in conformity with the instructions for installation, or for use.
UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATIONS
Unauthorized changes or modifications to any part of the system may have hazardous results.
Changes or modifications of the system must not be made unless specifically authorized by
International Medical Systems, Inc. and performed by qualified trained dealer service representatives
of International Medical Systems, Inc..
When properly assembled and installed this diagnostic source assembly w i l l fully meet the Federal
Performance Standards of Diagnostic X - R a y Systems and their components (21CFR 1020.30 - 32),
provided no unauthorized modifications, components or parts are removed from this unit and no
unauthorized adjustments are made in the beam limit device.
No adjustments or any parts may be removed from the beam-limiting device unless under the
direction of International Medical Systems, Inc. or their authorized dealers.

3.0 G E N E R A L DESCRIPTION IMS2760
The IMS2760 is a digital image processing system designed to extend the advantages of Digital Image
Technology to C - A r m Fluoroscopy. IMS2760 has image enhancement processing capabilities that answer
specific needs for a variety of clinical C - A r m applications performed during fluoroscopy.
The IMS2760 Image System is an integral part of the C - A r m system, designed to work hand-in-hand with
the C - A r m control.The Image Processor is activated by the C - A r m footswitch or handswitch and
controlled by the C - A r m control panel and the monitor cart control keyboard. The IMS2760 acquires video
from the video camera of the C - A r m .
The unique software of the IMS2760 improves the image by reducing noise, acquiring images at a true 10
bit gray scale, 1365H x 525V line time digital acquisition, real-time edge enhancement and displaying high
line 1287H x 1049V processed video images on two high resolution black anti-glare monitors. The user
can manipulate the image, i.e., freeze, store or make a hardcopy printout of the image displayed on the
monitor. The user may retrieve any stored image from a digital disk, manipulate the image, i.e., zoom,
minify, edge-enhance, electronic shuttering (Image Crop) etc. on the retrieved image . With version > 01
ISM2760 software the system will do D S A / M S A / R S A and 4F/Sec cine runs to include remask, variable
mask landmarking, and with direct store of images to the dynamic disk drive. Start date of delivery
04/01/96
The IMS2760 includes I M A G E P A G E D I S P L A Y function. The 16 images are displayed on the right
or " B " monitor for image reference during fluoroscopy work and transfer images during minification,
hard copy selection and other image post processing features.
Live images are displayed during 2 - 4 Frame cine loop acquisition on the left monitor and the acquired
images a 2- 4 F/Sec are displayed on the right monitor .
The IMS2760 C - A r m Image Processing System was developed with a modular design and simple
C - A r m interface allowing for quick and efficient repairs. High-reliability parts were used in its design
and affords a long service life with upgrade-ability in system design.
Block diagrams that illustrate the main components and interconnection of the IMS2760 Image
Processing System and C - A r m 7000 refer to Figure 3-1 page 2 of this section.
Copyright 1995 by I M S C o r p o r a t i o n . A l l rights reserved. Reproduction or issue to third parties

in any f o r m is not permitted without express written authority of I M S C o r p o r a t i o n .
Exposcop 7000 Section 3.0 03/22/96

International Medical Systems General Description Rev. 3 -1
M <
uo NI 03QIA OdY.
l !
§4
0 t3
1
Q (J x 5
H ic u a
I !
CC Q HQ
otn
y
OS
ID W
3
y
w
J
! c 03 y
Ic
— s1
Is
L
0/1 p u ^ BD-ejJSQiit uuiv-3
ejtaureo DOG
U3

International Medical Systems General DescripVion Rev. 3 -2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Video Input:
Compatibility: -RS170
Sampling rate of A / D converter - 1365Hx 525V 2 1 . 5 M H z
A / D Converters: - 10 B I T
Acquisition frames per second - 30f/sec
Video Outputs:
Compatibility: - R S I 7 0 and 1049 High L i n e Rate
N o . of Output Images: - Two, simultaneous 1287H x 1049V

- Special output
1. Documentation Camera -
4 X 525V line rate at 1365H
2. Video R S I 7 0 output
Video Bypass: - Automatic at power off

of image system
Image Store Format: - 1024 X 512 X 10 Bit

D / A Converters: -Three (3) 10-Bit D / A
Image Noise Reduction: - 1 to 16 frames real time

- 2 to 16 last image hold
- Independently programmable
Memory: - Std 12 M B . V I M Option 16MB
CPU: - Std486DX4-100 (Optional Pentium)
Disk Storage:
Type - >850 M B I D E / A T A Digital Disk
Capacity: - 16 Frames ( Standard)

U p to 500 frames (Optional ESP)
Image L o o p (CINE) - Optional 2F/Sec Dynamic

acquisition 250 standard images,
special option of 500 images.
Stored to digital disk drive.
DSA/CINE - Optional 4F/Sec with D S A , M S A ,

- R S A functions with dynamic digital
disk drive. 500 Standard Image
Line Conditions:
Line Voltage: - ( 2 1 0 - 2 3 0 V A C ) Standard
Frequency: - 48 - 63Hz
Ambient Temperature: - 5 0 C t o 300C
Relative Humidity: - 0% - 80% (NC)
Operator Interface: - Simple multi-function user operation

Integrated C-Arm Interface: -IMS EXPOSCOP7000
l . M . S . reserves the right to improve change specifications without notice.

International Medical Systems General Description Rev. 3 -3
SECTION # 4.0 - 4.14

DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION
EXPOSCOP PLUS C-ARM
IMS2000
Service Manual
ZIEHM
EXPOSCOP 7000
IMS
USERS M A N U A L
DIGITAL H I G H
FREQUENCY MOBIL
C-ARM
1996 Z I E H M / INTERNATIONAL MEDICAL SYSTEMS A L L RIGHTS RESERVED
Exposcop 7000 — Section 4.00

International Medical Systems Preliminary Description of Operation
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Table of Contents 2
4.1.0 Introduction
1.1 General 6
1.2 Special Features 6
4.2.0 Safety Precautions 6
4.2.1 General 6
4.2.2 Radiation W a r n i n g 7
4.2.3 Electro-Mechanical W a r n i n g 8
4.2.4 Electrical G r o u n d i n g Instructions 8
4.2.5 Gettering 8
4.2.6 Installation a n d Environment 8
4.2.7 Transportation Position and Transport 9
4.2.8 Reserved 10
4.2.9 Getter 10
4.2.10 Laser 10
4.2.11 Laser Labels 10
4.3.0 Installation 11
4.3.1 S h i p p i n g Container 11
4.3.2 Unpacking 11
4.3.3 Mounting 11
4.3.4 System Interconnection 12
4.4.0 System Checkout 13
4.4.1 A C Power Check 13

4.4.2 Leakage Current Check 13
4.4.3 Mechanical Movement 13
4.4.4 Operation 14
4.5.5 Exposcop Plus 7000 Option 15
4.5.0 Maintenance 16
4.5.1 User Maintenance 16

4.5.2 D H H S Maintenance 17
4.5.3 Preventive Maintenance 17
4.5.4 V e r i f y Automatic Dose Regulation 17
4.5.5 Check Beam Center 18
4.6.0 Mechanical Operation 19
4.6.1 Orbital 21
4.6.2 Rotation 21
4.6.3 Swivel 21
7.6.4 Horizontal 21
4.6.5 Vertical 21
4.6.6 Brake/Steering 21
Exposcop 7000 -~ Section 4.00 04/04 / 96

International Medical Systems Preliminary Description of Operation Rev. 2 - 2
*»* F L U O R O S C O P Y ***
4.7.0 Introduction 23
4.7.1 Basic 23
4.7.2 Control Panel C - M o b i l e Stand 24
4.7.3 Monitor Control Panel 25
4.8.0 Operating Modes 26
4.8.1 Fluoroscopy 26
4.8.2 Pulse Fluoroscopy 26
4.4.8.3 Snapshot 26
4.8.4 Fluoroscopic Programs 26
4.8.5 M S A ( M a x i m u m Opacification) 27
4.8.6 R S A ( R O A D M A P ) Subtracted Vascular Pathway 28
4.8.7 D S A ( Digital Subtracted Dynamic Image Acquisition) 29
4.8.8 Metal 30
4.8.9 Soft 30
4.8.10 1/2 Dose 30
4.8.11 Contrast / Image recall 30
4.9.0 C o n t r o l - M o b i l Stand 31
4.9.1 k V Adjustment 31
4.9.2 Magnification - Z o o m 31
4.9.3 Monitor Selection 31
4.9.4 Image Rotation 31
4.9.5 Image Reversal, H o r i z o n t a l a n d Vertical 32
4.9.6 Iris Collimator 32
4.9.7 Slot C o l l i m a t o r 32
4.9.8 Image Transfer 32
4.9.9 Image Store 32
4.10.0 C o n t r o l Panel - M o b i l Stand 33
4.10.1 k V Display 33
4.10.2 m A Display 33
4.10.3 Exposure Time 33
4.10.4 Dose Area Product Display 33
4.10.5 Fluoroscopy Time Display 34
4.10.6 Audio Alarm 34
4.10.7 Error, Overheating 34
4.10.8 Exposure Indicator 34
4.10.9 Error Codes 34
RESERVED

Rev.2-3
*** RADIOGRAPHY »** IMAGE DOCUMENT
4.11.0 Radiography General Information 35
4.11.1 Exposure Technique 35

4.11.2 Exposure Time 35
4.11.3 F i l m Cassette H o l d e r 35
4.11.4 Cassette Size 35
4.12.0 Laser L i g h t O n / O f f (Optional) 37
4.12.1 V i d e o Paper Printer / C R T H a r d C o p y Camera 37
4.13 Error Codes Information 37
13.1 Error C o d e Message list 38
4.14 Cleaning -Disinfection- Sterilization 40
4.14.1 Cleaning 40
4.14.2 Disinfection 40
4.14.3 Sterilization 40
•*» APPENDIX A ***
Technical Data 41
Thermal C u r v e Table 42
C o o l i n g C u r v e Table 43
Statement of Compliance 43
Focal Spot Position and Reference '. 44
C - A r m Dimensions 45
k V / m A Curve 1 46
kV/mACurve2 46
kV/mACurve3 47
kV/mACurve4 47
kV/mACurve5 48
**» APPENDIX B»»*
Registration N u m b e r 49
M e a s u r i n g Data for Radiation Protection 49
Certificate for Standard Measuring Data 49
X-ray Tube Performance 51
Protective Tube H o u s i n g Test 52

THIS P A G E LEFT
B L A N K FOR
FUTURE USE
Exposcop 7000 Section 4.00 04 /04/96

4.1.0 INTRODUCTION
4.1.1 General
The E X P O S C O P 7000 is a mobile X-ray system developed for surgical and

diagnostic applications. This C - A r m may be used to perform fluoroscopy or
spot-film radiography. It is not for use i n the presence of flammable anesthetics or
other explosive gases.
This manual should be thoroughly read and understood before any attempt is made
to install, operate or service this equipment. Close attention should be p a i d to the
safety precautions contained i n Section 3.
.2 SPECIAL FEATURES
The E X P O S C O P 7000 has been engineered to provide superior quality and

performance. Some of the outstanding features include:
* H i g h frequency generator w h i c h produces a precise spectrum of radiation

capable of superior penetration. The E X P O S C O P 7000 can produce a
quality image at lower k V levels while dramatically reducing the s k i n
dose.
* Efficient design of the generator allows the E X P O S C O P 7000 to perform

fluoroscopy at m a x i m u m k V and continuously for up to 20 minutes. After 20
minutes, the system continues to function at a reduced dose (0.5 m A ) .
* The function 1/2 dose reduces the dose rate b y one-half w h i c h is very
effective d u r i n g extended procedures. Pulsed fluoroscopy may be selected
to half the dose once more; i.e., to one quarter of the standard dose rate.
This is advisable especially for children.
* The E X P O S C O P 7000 is controlled by a m u l t i processor system w h i c h

enables a n o p t i m u m adjustment to the diagnostic requirements.
* Pulsed fluoroscopy may be selected to reduce the dose b y one-half d u r i n g
extended procedures.
* Integral digital memory features last image h o l d .
* Frame Integration may be selected as an effective noise filtration

technique.
* M a g n i f i c a t i o n achieved w i t h electronic focus w i t h i n the Image Intensifier

for greater resolution.
* Compact design of the Image Intensifier makes the E X P O S C O P 7000 easier

to position and maneuver.
* U n i q u e cable arrangement contributes to the clean design and attractive

appearance of the E X P O S C O P 7000. It m a y also be kept sterile more
easily.
* Fluoroscopy may commence approximately 30 seconds after power is

turned on.

4.2.0 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
4.2.1 General
The user of this manual is directed to carefully read and review the instructions,
warnings and cautions contained herein prior to the installation, operation or
service of this equipment.
The installation and service of the E X P O S C O P 7000 is to be performed by

authorized, qualified personnel w i t h the support of I M S Technical Service
Representatives.
Those authorized to operate, participate i n or supervise the operation of the

equipment must be thoroughly familiar and comply completely w i t h the currently
established safe exposure factors and procedures described i n publications, such as:
Subchapter J of Title 21 of The Code of Federal Regulations, "Diagnostic X - r a y
Systems and Their Major Components", as revised or replaced i n the future. Before
opening or taking off the safety cover, the equipment has to be disconnected f r o m
the main A C power.
Important Instruction
The manufacturer is considered responsible for the effects on the security,
reliability and capacity of the equipment if:
a) installation, alterations or repairs are executed f r o m persons w h o are
authorized;
b) the electrical installation of the room i n w h i c h the E X P O S C O P 7000
is used corresponds to the regulations of the V D E 0107;
c) the equipment is used i n correspondence w i t h the user manual.
Repair works through non-authorized personnel w i l l lead to a loss of guarantee.

Moreover, consequential damages cannot be accepted.
4.2.2 Radiation W a r n i n g
This equipment produces X-rays which are dangerous to both operator and others
i n the vicinity unless established safe exposure procedures are strictly observed.
The useful and scattered beams can produce serious or fatal bodily injuries to any
persons i n the surrounding area if used improperly. Adequate precautions must
always be taken to avoid exposure to the useful beam, as w e l l as to leakage f r o m
w i t h i n the source housing or to scattered radiation resulting from the passage of
radiation through matter.
Those responsible for the planning of X-ray equipment installations must be

thoroughly familiar and comply completely w i t h N C R P N o . 49, "Structural
Shielding Design and Evaluation or M e d i c a l Use of X-rays" as revised or replaced
i n the future.
X-ray control area

Image Intensifier 9" (23cm ) 11 feet (3.5 m)
Image Intensifier 7" (17cm) 8feet (2.5m)
(X-ray generator i n normal position,
C - A r m i n vertical position)

International Medical Systems Preliminary Description of Operation Rev. 2-7
X-ray tube Stationary A n o d e w i t h dual focus
Focal spot size F l u o r o : 0.6 m m 2
Radiography: 1.5 m m 2
Inherent filtration equivalent > 4 mm A l

Image Intensifier Electronic magnification factor of 1.5
23/15 cm, Cesium - lodid
17/10 cm, Cesium - l o d i d Ambient temperature > 60° C may cause
irreversible damage.
4.2.3 Electro-mechanical W a r n i n g
A l l of the moveable assemblies and parts of this equipment should be operated w i t h

care and routinely inspected i n accordance w i t h the manufacturer's recommendations
contained i n this m a n u a l .
O n l y properly trained a n d authorized personnel should be permitted access to any

internal parts. Be sure line disconnect switches are opened and other appropriate
precautions are taken before opening access doors, removing enclosure panel, or
attaching accessories.
D o not remove the covers from the generator until the power has been turned off.
Failure to comply w i t h the foregoing may result i n serious injuries to the operator or
those i n the v i c i n i t y .
4.2.4 Electrical G r o u n d i n g Instructions
The equipment must be grounded to an earth ground by a separate conductor. The

neutral side of the line is not to be considered the earth ground. O n equipment
provided w i t h a line cord, the equipment must be connected to a properly grounded,
three-prong receptacle. D o not use a three-prong to two-prong adapter.
4.2.5 Gettering
It is advisable to use the equipment for one hour at least after an uninterrupted
storage of six months. T u r n only the power of the E X P O S C O P 7000 on and leave it
i n this mode. D O N O T X-RAY! By performing this procedure, the life expectancy
of the Image Intensifier w i l l essentially be increased. Therefore we recommend a
l o g book where a l l operating hours, getter times and service hours are documented.
4.2.6 Installation a n d Environment
Except for installations requiring certification b y the manufacturer per Federal

Standards, see that a radiation protection survey is made by a qualified expert i n
accordance w i t h N C R P N o . 33, Section 6 as revised or replaced i n the future.
Perform a survey after every change i n equipment, w o r k l o a d , or operating condition
w h i c h might significantly increase the probability of persons receiving more than
the m a x i m u m permissible dose equivalent.
NOTE: This equipment is not for use in the presence offlammable anesthetics or
other explosive gases. Failure to heed this warning may result in a fire
or an explosion.
Exposcop 7000 Section 4.00 04 / 04 / 96

4.2.7 Transport Position and Transport
Transport Position of C - A r m
1 . C - A r m has to be brought into illustrated position.

2.Bring rotation arm into vertical position and lock it
3.Slowly move cross arm into center position (wigwag) and lock it.
4.Slowly move cross arm back and lock it.
5.Drive vertical a l l the w a y d o w n .
Transport Position of Monitor Cart
Wrap power cable and interconnection cable of C - A r m at the backside of the

monitor cart.

International Medical Systems Preliminary Description of Operation Rev.2-9
4.2.8 Reserved
4.2.9 Getter
It is recommended that if the system is out of service consecutively for six months,
to turn on the unit for a m i n i m u m of one hour. The system needs to be only turned o n
d u r i n g that time. DON'T RADIATE. W h i l e d o i n g this, the life time of the image
intensifier is dramatically increased.
A t this time it is suggested to keep a n operation l o g and note all operating times,
getter times and service dates.
4.2.10 Laser Beam
ATTENTION
LASER B E A M
DON'T L O O K INTO THE B E A M
ALSO N O T WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
L A S E R C L A S S 3 A , I E C 825
W h e n operating the laser light beam, the "Guidelines for the User I E C 825, M a i n
Chapter 3" have to be f o l l o w e d .
The m a x i m u m output power of the laser beam is <2 m W . The wavelength of the
emitted power is 670 n m . The laser guidance system is service free. H o w e v e r ,
should an adjustment or a repair be required, this has to be performed by the
manufacturer or authorized person only.
4.2.11 Position of Laser Beam W i n d o w and Location of Labels.
PICTURE 3
Exposcop 7000 04/04/96

International Medical Systems Rev. 2 -10
4.3.0 INSTALLATION
The installation of this equipment should be performed by authorized, qualified

personnel w h o have carefully read and reviewed this manual.
4.3.1 S h i p p i n g Container
The E X P O S C O P 7000 is shipped on a single pallet and contains the mobile stand,
monitor cart, an unmounted case assembly, and a box containing manuals, cassettes
and a cassette holder. The equipment should be carefully inspected and any
shipping damage must be reported immediately to the shipping carrier i n the form
of a damage claim.
4.3.2 U n p a c k i n g - E X P O S C O P 7000
Remove the outside of the shipping container and inspect for any shipping
damage. Remove the monitors and the box containing the manuals and cassettes.
N O T E : T h e three short wooden blocks below one end of the pallet may be unbolted
and removed to tip the pallet. This w i l l facilitate the removal of the
monitor cart and mobile stand.
Remove monitor from container strapped to the pallet. Release the brakes o n the
front wheels and carefully place the monitor cart on the floor. Remove the metal
brackets h o l d i n g the mobile stand, release the hand brake (lift the lever located
in the center of the control panel) and carefully place the stand on the floor.
NOTE: Care must be exercised when removing brackets to prevent paint form
being scratched or chipped.
NOTE: To avoid damage to the x-ray system with large temperature deviation,
allow all parts of the system to obtain room temperature before use.
4.3.3 M o u n t i n g - E X P O S C O P 7000
The monitor set is the only item which requires mounting. The monitors are clearly
identified as either left or right (as viewed f r o m the front).
Remove the rear panel of the monitors and place the monitor case assembly o n the
cart's mounting surface. Route the wiring into the monitors from the hole i n the
bottom and secure with four A l l e n screws from below.
The power cord and video cable are connected at the rear of the monitor. T w o
additional wires are then connected; one on the monitor board and one on the yoke
rotation board. The wires, and the location they connect to, are individually
marked. A two-wire cable is provided for the left monitor and is connected to the
cable w h i c h services the amber light on top. Attach the ground wires to the rear
panel and cart and secure the rear panel and access plate.

International Medical Systems Preliminary Description of Operation Rev. 2 -11
M o u n t i n g - E X P O S C O P 7000 Single M o n i t o r Option (Compact System)
The monitor is the only item w h i c h requires mounting. H o l d the monitor upright
and attach to horizontal travel a r m w i t h the provided four bolts securing tightly
Attach cable connector end from monitor assembly to connector o n mobile stand
w i t h p r o v i d e d hardware. M a k e sure cable is draped as not to interfere w i t h the
mobile stand movements.
4.3.4 System Interconnection
E X P O S C O P 7000
The monitor cart and mobile stand are connected w i t h a single heavy-duty cable
w h i c h attaches at the rear of the monitor cart. It should be connected before the
system is powered on. The line cord o n the monitor cart should be plugged into a
properly grounded and rated outlet.
E X P O S C O P 7000 w i t h Single M o n i t o r O p t i o n ( Compact System)
The mobile stand is connected w i t h a single heavy-duty line cord to a properly

grounded and rated outlet.

4.4.0 SYSTEM CHECK-OUT
Service personnel are cautioned to observe a l l C A U T I O N S and W A R N I N G S as

they appear i n the text of this section, and observe the general safety precautions
outlined i n the Service M a n u a l Safety Section.
The instructions for system check-out require that the operator has read this entire
manual and is familiar w i t h the operation of this equipment.
4.4.1 A C Power Check
Inspect the A C power cord o n the system to ensure that it is compatible with the
A C power receptacle. Verify that the A C line voltage is proper for the operation
of the equipment
WARNING: The unit must be grounded through the U-Shaped grounding prong
of the line plug. D o not use a 3-prong to 2-prong adapter unless
properly installed by a licensed electrician. Failure to comply
w i t h the foregoing may cause serious or fatal injuries to the
operator and other persons i n the surrounding area.
NOTE: Line voltage must be set to match service. For voltages above a n d
below 110 V A C , the line voltage must be adjusted at the
appropriate terminal block i n the lower rear of the monitor cart or
i n the mobile stand w i t h the 7000 option.
4.4.2 Leakage Current check
The installation of this x-ray equipment m a y include a check of the leakage current.
This should be performed w i t h a properly calibrated leakage meter, i n accordance
w i t h the leakage meter instructions.
Inspect the ground leads for solid ground connections. Insert a properly calibrated
leakage meter (with 100 o h m input impedance) i n series w i t h the E X P O S C O P 7000
line cord according to the leakage meter instructions. T u r n o n power and verify that
the leakage current does not exceed 100 u A i n either normal or reversed line
polarity. Disconnect the leakage meter and insert the E X P O S C O P 7000 line cord
into the A C receptacle. Connect the black lead of the leakage meter to an exposed
metal surface of the E X P O S C O P 7000 according to the leakage meter instructions.
T u r n o n power and verify that the leakage current is less than 100 m A .
4.4.3 Mechanical Movement
The C - A r m is capable of m o v i n g i n an arc (115 deg.), 90° from horizontal to vertical

and 25° beyond vertical plane, rotating i n the vertical plane around the horizontal
cross a r m (± 225 deg.) or swiveling side to side ( ± 12 deg.). One at a time, release
each brake and verify full and unrestricted movement. Secure each brake w h e n
finished. Release the horizontal brake and verify the 22 c m of horizontal travel.
Release the hand brake o n the mobile cart b y p u l l i n g the handle u p and check that
the cart moves freely and m a y be steered by turning the brake handle.
T u r n o n system power at the monitor cart control panel, a n d verify that the vertical
position motor can raise and lower the C - A r m w h e n operated from the mobile cart
control pane key

International Medical Systems Preliminary Description of Operation Rev.2 -13
NOTE: Power O n is located o n the mobile stand w i t h the 7000 single monitor
option. The E X P O S C O P 7000 w i t h 7000 O p t i o n and the monitor cart
•
installed allows power to be turned o n from the monitor cart.
' -1 " " ^
o
r
OFF ON
NOTE: When power is switched off, there is a starting circuit always powered.
For complete disconnection from Mains Power the power cord plug must be
removed from the wall power outlet socket.
4.4.4 Operation
X-Ray equipment operators should protect themselves and others i n the area w i t h
such devices as lead aprons or shields. A l l standard safety precautions must be
observed and exposure to the X-ray beam must be strictly avoided. The collimator
may be used to restrict the radiation beam d u r i n g checkout.
W i t h the system properly connected and power is turned on, the keyboard display
w i l l indicate a l l zeros d u r i n g w a r m u p . A t the same time, the shutters w i l l open to
m a x i m u m and the monitor yokes rotate to normal position. The f o l l o w i n g default
operating mode w i l l be selected:
* Fluoroscopy w i t h automatic dose rate control

* Fluoroscopy m o d e "extremities and c h i l d r e n "
* Function 1/2 dose
* L i v e image o n left monitor w i t h last image h o l d
* N o r m a l picture size (no magnification)
* 75 k V tube voltage
* l . s exposure time
Fluoroscopy may begin after approximate 30 seconds of filament preheating b y

pressing the hand or foot switch. In the automatic dose control mode, the k V / m A
w i l l be adjusted automatically a n d displayed o n the control panel. After Fluoro,
the display w i l l s h o w the last k V a n d m A setting.
Check that the slot a n d iris collimators m a y be opened a n d closed a n d the slot
collimator can rotate. Check that the image reversal and magnification (zoom)
functions operate properly a n d that the " k V manual" mode m a y be selected a n d
the k V setting may be adjusted manually. See information o n " k V M a n u a l " .
NOTE: Do not perform Fluoroscopy or Radiography in the kV manual mode at a

kV level higher than the object requires. This will prevent the camera
from being overdrive by high light levels.

Verify that the Radiography mode may be initiated w i t h the hand switch only
and that the time setting for radiography is adjustable from 0.1 sec. to 4.0 sec. O n
the monitor cart, verify that the live fluoroscopy image appears on the left
monitor and the last image is held after a Fluoro is completed. W h e n exposure
occurs (active radiation from the generator) d u r i n g either fluoroscopy or
radiography, the amber light on top of the left monitor should be illuminated, a n d
at the C - A r m keyboard the radiation on symbol 41 should be illuminated o n the
C - A r m control panel.
Verify that the monitor image may be rotated from the controls on the mobile
stand. E X P O S C O P 7000 w i t h M o n i t o r Cart
Check that the cassette light o n the monitor cart keyboard is muminated w h e n
the f i l m cassette is fully inserted i n the documentation camera.
4.4.5 E X P O S C O P 7000 O P T I O N
The C - A r m provides all the standard features of the E X P O S C O P but without the
need for the monitor cart.
The single monitor option provides last image h o l d .
The monitor can be positioned on either side of the C - A r m for view b y the
physician. The technologist can v i e w and position the C - A r m mobile stand u s i n g
the small video monitor attached to the rear of the 17 monitor.

Preliminary Description of Operation Rev. 2 -15
4.5.0 MAINTENANCE
4.5.1 User Maintenance
The inspection procedure listed i n Table 1 should be performed b y the user of the
equipment.
TABLE 1
A
INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS INTERVAL INSTRUCTIONS
1) R a d i a t i o n Leakage 1 month Inspect for physical damage w h i c h c o u l d

affect radiation shielding. M a i n l y H V
generators and shutters.
2) R a d i a t i o n Switches 1 month Radiation release permitted only w i t h

permanent pressure at exposure switch.
Release switch, radiation has to stop
immediately.
3) Exposure Indicator 1 month The warning light o n top of monitor is o n

only if radiation is emitted.
4) A u d i b l e Exposure Indicator 1 month M u s t give audible w a r n i n g alarm d u r i n g

radiographic exposure a n d after five
minutes of Fluoro time.
5) W a r n i n g and Caution Labels 1 month Inspect and confirm that all W A R N I N G

and C A U T I O N labels have not been
defaced or w o r n so as to be illegible.
6) Line C o r d 1 month L o o k for physical damage to the x-ray

tube assembly w h i c h could affect
radiation shielding proper limitation of
the x-ray b e a m -
Inspect and confirm that the mechanical
7) Mechanical Cone 1 month
cone is properly installed and secured for a
SSD of 30 cm. Verify that the w a r n i n g
label is not defaced.
8) Wheels at C - M o b i l e 1 month Wheel surface needs to be cleaned to

guarantee static discharge condition.

4.5.2 Department of Health and H u m a n Services ( D H H S ) Maintenance
Maintenance procedures, necessary to insure (continued) compliance w i t h D H H S

requirements are contained i n the recommended Schedule of Maintenance s u p p l i e d
w i t h your equipment. This maintenance should be performed by authorized a n d
qualified service personnel at the prescribed interval, according to the instructions
given i n the appropriate manual.
A s noted i n Federal Drug Administration (FDA) 75-8005, Practitioners G u i d e to

the Diagnostic X - ray Equipment Standard. "It is up to the practitioner to have
the x-ray maintained according to the schedule furnished b y the manufacturer to
insure compliance with the standard for the life of the equipment. Failure to
follow the manufacturer's maintenance instructions could relieve the manufacturer
of responsibility for continued compliance."
4.5.3 Preventive Maintenance
The following preventive maintenance should be performed at six-month

intervals, or whenever the equipment has been subjected to any use or conditions
w h i c h may compromise the safe operation of the system. This maintenance is to
be arranged by the user and must be performed by qualified personnel.
4.5.3.1 k V Adjustment
4.5.3.2 m A Adjustment
4.5.3.3 Electrical Functions
* Automatic dose rate control

* Display of m A during default low m A and normal m A Fluoro
* Radiography time control functions properly
* Fluoroscopy terminates after release of button
* Collimator controls functional
* Displays function properly
* Line cord in good condition and properly grounded
* Cables i n good condition
* M e c h a n i c a l limits
4.5.4 V e r i f y Automatic Dose Regulation
Quantitative M e t h o d
The unit is i n default "power u p " condition (see Page 12).

It must display the following values:
Fluoro Program #1:

w i t h prefilter (Wellhofer) patient-equivalent-filter 25mm A L + 1 m m C u
These values are general and should not be take as absolute values
1/2 D o s e : 6 9 ± 2 k V / 2 . 1 ± 0 . 4 m A
1/1 D o s e : 7 2 ± 2 k V / 2 . 7 ± 0 , 4 m A

Rev. 2 -17
Qualitative M e t h o d
Generator to be covered u p w i t h lead apron. F o l d apron until 110 k V is reached i n

Fluoro mode.
4.5.5 Checking Beam Centering
The beam centering a n d size has to be checked periodically, also if the unit is o u t
of operation for a longer time period.
Centering:
(Deviation of beam center to center image receptor)
Cone-in position of p r i m a r y beam shutters. The drift from center position is to be

checked at the Fluoro image screen.
Position at the image intensifier center an object (e.g., measuring plate, center cross
hair).
Focus-Object-Distance F O D - 90 C M
m a x i m u m deviation from center < 2% F O D
Field size shutters: The primary shutters must be visible at monitor screen.
4.6.0 Symbols Used and Description:

A C (Alternating Current)
Power O N
IEC 417-5032 Symbol.
IEC 417-5007
Protective Earth T e r m i n a l
IEC 417-5019 Symbol. OFF

IEC 417-5265
Earth
O " W h e n power is switched off, there is a
starting circuit always powered. For
complete disconnection from M a i n s the
power cord plug must be removed from
IEC 417-5017 Symbol.
the w a l l power outlet socket
Type " B " Equipment

Potential E q u a l i z a t i o n
I E C 417-5021 Symbol. £ ^ IEC 878-02-02
Attention! » Dangerous Voltage

y\ See i n Accompanying Documents ^jjj^
IEC 878-03-01
' f
^ IEC 348 Symbol. I ^

4.6.0 Mechanical Operation
The mechanical brakes for the C - A r m should always be secured i n the locked position. This is
especially important when the equipment is i n transport.
The locked position of the handles may be adjusted b y lifting the spring-loaded handle,
rotating it to a new position and dropping it back d o w n .
TV Camera
Image Intensifier
Cassette Holder
Orbital Brake
Horizontal Brake
Rotational Brake
Side to Side Brake

Brake Lever/Steering
Handel for Wheels
Hand Switch
PO Cable Attachement —
to monitor Cart
Footswitch ( mounted on other side)
High Frequency X-Ray Generator
Cable Guards
PICTURE 4
A
N O T E : P O Cable is for interconnecting the C - A r m and Monitor Cart. The C - A r m
P O cable attachment point is s h o w n above i n picture 4. The attachment connector
for the monitor cart is shown i n picture 5.

International Medical Systems Freliminary Description of Operation Rev. 2 -19
X - R A Y Indicator
IDDIflODD DDDDDDDfl
Dual Monitor
1 0 1 00 00 0 D00DDDDD
Control Keyboard Panel iBiimiiiiiiini
Video Paper
Printer
,,'Power Cord & PO
' Cable Holder
Âdd Ground Hook-Up
, PO Cable Attachement
to monitor Cart
Power Cord
S , Video Out
.-Safety Ground Hook-Up
0D
Potential Balance Ground
nn
Picture 5
Video Out Connector o n Monitor Cart:
A t the rear of the monitor cart is a BNC-connector for V i d e o Out. There is a RS-170 video signal w i t h
the image f r o m the left monitor for use w i t h external video recording machines or external monitors
or printers and so on.
NOTE: The use of A C C E S S O R Y equipment not complying w i t h the equivalent safety requirements of
this equipment m a y lead to a reduced level of safety of the resulting system. Consideration relating to
the choice shall include:
Use of the accessory i n the P A T I E N T V I C I N I T Y

Evidence that the safety certification of the accessory has been performed i n accordance
to the appropriate I E C 601-1 a n d / o r I E C 601-1-1 harmonized national standard.

Picture 5
© Contrast Control with Pull Switch Optional Paper Printer Operators Viewing
Main Position = Normal Contrast Monitor
Pulled = Manual Adjustment
Brightness Control with Pull Switch Optional 7000 Single
Main Position = Normal Contrast C - Mounted M o n i t o r
Pulled = Manual Adjustment
4.6.1 Orbital Movement
The C - A r m is capable of 115 degrees of orbital movement. Ninety (90) degrees f r o m

horizontal to vertical, and 25 degrees beyond vertical. In each position of this
movement, the brake can be released.
4.6.2 Rotation
the C - A r m can be rotated ± 225 degrees around if horizontal arm and position locked
w i t h the aid of the brake.
4.6.3 Swivel
The C - A r m can be rotated side-to-side by ± 12 degrees and locked i n any position.
4.6.4 H o r i z o n t a l Movement
The C - A r m is capable of approximately 22 c m of horizontal travel and locked i n any

position.
4.6.5 Vertical M o v e m e n t
The 43 c m of vertical travel is accomplished under motor control and may be operated
from the mobile stand control panel (up-down arrows) from either side.
4.6.6 Brake/Steering
The brake lever is used for both steering and braking. W h e n it is pushed d o w n , the
brakes are engaged. W h e n it is lifted, the brakes are released. The mobile stand m a y
easily be maneuvered into the desired position by pushing the handles on either side as
illustrated i n Picture 7a. The two wheels located beneath the lever may also be steered
as illustrated i n Pictures 7b and 7c.
Exposcop 7000 Section 4.00 04 /04 / 96

W i t h the aid of the side handles, the C - A r m can be moved into the desired position.
The steering of the two rear wheels is done w i t h the brake/steering lever (see Picture
a,b,c).
F L U O R O S C O P Y ***
4.7.0 INTRODUCTION
The use of the E X P O S C O P 7000 i n Fluoroscopy can be as simple as powering o n f t e

system, w a i t i n g approximately 30 seconds for the cathode filament to preheat,
and activating the hand or foot switch to v i e w the first image. It also a l l o w s fas
the f o l l o w i n g options:
*Start Fluoroscopy
Various Fluoroscopy Programs
Snapshot Technique
Pulsed Fluoroscopy
M a n u a l Control of k V
Z o o m (Magnification)
Image Integration for Noise Reduction
M u l t i - F o r m a t Storage
Image Reversal
Image Rotation
Iris C o l l i m a t i o n
Slot collimation w i t h Rotation
These options are described in subsequent sections of this manual.
4.7.1 Basic Operation
T u r n o n unit, as described i n , Chapter 4.1, "Mechanical Movement", and Chapter

4.2, "Electronic Functions".
The Fluoro operation can be released via hand or foot switch. Contrast and
brightness for the T V monitors can be individually adjusted if the corresponding
knob is pulled out. If the corresponding contrast button is i n the push-in position,
the preset values are obtained, w h i c h generally provides optimal results. In that
position, both contrast and brightness of the corresponding monitor cannot be
changed.
W i t h release of the Fluoro switch, the radiation is interrupted and the last i m a g e
is held at the left monitor.
P I C T U R E 8 illustrates the
differences among continuous,
pulsed, and snapshot fluoroscopy. Continues Flouroscopy
W h e n radiation is present, the
live image is displayed. W h e n Al IA I IA l 1 A
radiation is not present, the last Pulsed Mode
live image w i l l be held and w i l l
continue to be displayed on the
left monitor until a new Fluoro Snapshot Technique
image is displayed.
Picture 8

International Medical Systems Prelirrunary Description of Operation Rev. 2 - 2 3
4.7.2 CONTROL PANEL C - MOBILE STAND
Ok! 3 51
LASER
in
DOSE
© ® © ©
i i I_I I_I o o o o i i i i i i i i II I_I U u '— 1
fl @
i
L_I i _ l l _ l
KV
I—I' u LJ.LJ
s
i_i I _ J O 1
o M1N
IS
o
• MSA
&—
o
A A
KV i s EL.
METAL
p> )
SOFT
|<xa> lf
DSA
M l
PICTURE 9
Page Page
1. Vertical position motorized 16 22. Radiography Time Select 28
2. Laser O n / O f f 29 23. Image Reversal Vertical 22
3. OFF 12 24. Image Reversal H o r i z o n t a l 22
4. O N 12 25. Image Rotation - Left Monitor Select 22
5. Reset O n radiation time and audio alarm25 26. Image Rotation - Right M o n i t o r Select 22
6. H a r d c o p y Paper Printer 27 27. Image Rotation 22
7. Z o o m I + II 22 28. Subtraction Type M o d e s 22
8. 1/2 Dose 21 29. Organ Button 22
9. Fluoroscopy 20 30. Image Store (Disk) 20
10. k V - Manual 22 31. L i v e Image Transfer - L e f t / R i g h t M o n i t o r . . . 20
11. Pulsed Fluoroscopy 20 32. M e t a l Filter Function 20
12. Snapshot 20 33. Soft Filter Function 20
13. M a n u a l k V Adjustment 22 34. Remote Contrast C o n t r o l 21
14. Slot C o l l i m a t o r Close 23 35. k V Display 24
15. Slot C o l l i m a t o r O p e n 23 36. m A Display 24
16. Slot Collimator Left T u r n 23 37. Exposure Time D i s p l a y 20
17. Slot C o l l i m a t o r Right T u r n 23 38. Dose Rate D i s p l a y / Error Messages 24
18. Iris Collimator Close 23 39. Fluoroscopy T i m e D i s p l a y 20
19. Iris C o l l i m a t o r O p e n 23 40. T e m p . S y m b o l (Failure Overheating Indicator)20
20. Radiography M o d e 28 41. Radiation Indicator 25
21. Radiography F i e l d Size 28

4.7.3 MONITOR CART CONTROL PANEL
P I C T U R E 10
Section Section
1. Power O N / O f f 17 22. Image Forward Reverse Recall 20
2. New Patient File 18 23. Image Page 20
3. Alpha Keys 18 24. Patient File 20
4. Enter 18 25. Hardcopy 20
5. Delete/Backspace Key 18 26. Left to Right Image Transfer 20
6. Numerical Keys 18 27. Cine Edit 20
7. Text Insert Key 18 28. Right to Left Image Transfer 20
8. Shift Key 18 29. Cine Recall 20
9. mAs 19 30. Inv Video 20
10. RSA 19 31. Auto Store 21
11. DSA 19 32. Cine Store 21
12. Edge 19 33. Image Store 21
13. Noise 19 34. Image Crop 22
14. U H Noise 19 35. Arrow Keys 22
15. WNDW 19 36. 40n 1 22
16. VCR 19 37. WNDW/Level 22
17. Text O N / O F F 19 38. M A G WNDW 22
18. Frame Rate 19 39. Escape 22
19. Mask 19 40. Shift Mask 22
20. CineReset 19 41. Sharp 22
21. Cine 19
SEE ALSO SECTION 4.15 TO 4.20 FOR FURTHER IMAGE
PROCESSOR KEY FUNCTIONS.

International Medical Systems Rev. 2 - 25
Preliminary Description of Operation
4.8.0 OPERATING MODES
The tube current is automatically controlled at any given kV value

with selection of the following Fluoro modes. For appropriate tube
curves, see Appendix.
The selected operating mode is indicated by the corresponding led.

The electronically selected tube current is displayed at the mA
display (see Picture 8).
4.8.1 Function Key Fluoroscopy
This is the standard operating mode which is selected when turning

on the EXPOSCOP 7000.
4.8.2 Function Key Pulse Fluoroscopy
By pushing the hand or foot switch, the radiation is turned on and

off in intervals of approximately one second. This procedure
reduces the dose rate essentially. Pushing the button again brings
back the equipment to the standard operating mode.
4.8.3 Function Key Snapshot
The snapshot is released only with the hand switch. The

fluoroscopy voltage of 8 mA and the maximum image integration
results in an excellent image quality.
N O T E : With small objects (hands, for example), it can result in an

overexposure.
4.8.4 Fluoroscopy Programs
When selecting one of the fluoroscopy program keys, a characteristic

is selected which produces an optimal result of the marked areas.
The following programs are available:
* Extremities and children
* Head, spinal column and pelvis
* Thorax

4.8.5 M S A (Maximum Opacified Vascular Subtraction)
M S A preserves during the contrast injection regions with greatest

contrast i n the image. This results i n maximum visualized
opacification of the vascular injection.
Performing M S A (Maximum Opacification) procedures:
Press the M S A key on the C - A r m control or the monitor control

keyboard to enable maximum opacification.
Perform scout fluoroscopy using the standard fluoroscopy mode and

position the patient. N o w press the M S A key.
Press the hand or footswitch to start fluoro. The right monitor displays the
Live fluoroscopy image while the left monitor displays the subtracted peak-
opacified image after the mask has automatically been acquired.
When the subtracted image is displayed on the left monitor w i t h INJECT

message and optional audible alert is heard start the contrast injection.
Release foot or handswitch when a fully opacified vascular anatomy is

obtained.
The process monitor w i l l display the procedure w i t h preservation of

regions with greatest contrast occurring i n the image during the injection.
To exit the M S A procedure press the M S A key again.
Turn on A U T O STORE to store the image when footswitch is released.

4.8.6 R S A (Subtracted Vascular Pathway )
i
RSA is a subtracted vascular pathway which is displayed while a balloon,
catheter or guide wire under livefluoroscopyis guided to its desired
position.
Performing RSA (ROADMAP) procedures:
Perform scout fluoroscopy using the standard fluoroscopy mode and

position the patient.
Press the RSA key on the C-Arm control or the monitor control keyboard
to enable the ROADMAP FUNCTION. Peak opacification will
automatically be enabled for the first part of the procedure.
Press the hand or footswitch to start fluoro. The right monitor displays the
Live fluoroscopy image while the left monitor displays the subtracted
peak-opacified image after the mask has automatically been acquired.
When the subtracted image is displayed on the left monitor with INJECT
message and optional audible alert is heard start the contrast injection.
Release foot or handswitch when a fully opacified vascular anatomy is

obtained.
The process monitor will display the procedure with preservation of

regions with greatest contrast occurring in the image during the contrast
injection. i
To continue the ROADMAP part 2 press the foot or handswitch.

The subtracted ROADMAP image will be displayed live on the process
monitor while the right monitor displays an un-subtracted live fluoro
image.
To exit the RSA procedure press the RSA key again.
Auto store may be turned on with MSA to store the image at the time the
foot or handswitch is released.

4.8.7 D S A / C I N E (Subtracted Dynamic Image Acquisition)
Performing D S A with Dynamic Image Acquisition :
Select body region key and perform fluoroscopy for correct patient
position and orientation.
Press D S A key on the C - A r m control panel. This w i l l activate the 4 f/sec

dynamic image acquisition and the digital image subtraction operation.
Press the hand or footswitch when the subtracted image is displayed on the
left monitor with INJECT message and optional audible alert is heard start
the contrast injection.
Release the footswitch or hand switch when the desired vascular anatomy
has been visualized. The acquired images w i l l automatically be replayed in a
continuous loop. U n t i l the user exits D S A or starts a new acquisition.
The Acquired images are temporally stored on the dynamic disk until the
operator presses the C I N E STORE key w h i c h protects the image run
form being over written. Five cine runs can be stored for the active patient.
A s long as the C I N E / D S A function is still selected the operator may start

another run by pressing the foot or handswitch at any time.
NOTE: The activation of the footswitch over rides all other activities. Therefore the
operator should press the store key on the C-Arm or the cine store key on the
monitor keyboard to protect image acquisition before starting a new procedure.
To Exit the D S A mode press the C I N E key or EXIT key on the

monitor cart or the D S A key on the C - A r m control panel again.
Please review the C I N E operation section for further details of the C I N E

dynamic image acquisition functions.
Cine operation key's are listed below w i t h brief description of function:
Cine Recall A l l o w s post processing of image acquisitions
Cine Edit A l l o w s operator to select image acquisitions to delete
Image F W D / R E V Steps image one at a time for review
MASK Subtraction mask can be selected from run.
Variable landmarking changes mask intensity.
Shift Mask Registration of mask if patient moves.
Frame Rate Dynamic image frames stored .1-4 F/Sec

Cine Store When Acquired image loop is ninning press store to
protect image run on dynamic disk.
Exposcop 7000 Section 4.00 04 / 04 / 96

Preliminary Description of Operation Rev. 2-29
4.8.8 Function Key - M E T A L
If there are parts of metal on the ray path, the image on the monitor
is displayed too bright. This key causes the image to be displayed
richer in contrast at a tube voltage of > 50 kV. It can be added to
every fluoroscopy program.
4.8.9 Function Key - SOFT
By pushing this key, the selected fluoroscopy program is turned off.

The SOFT function should be turned on if, for example, an injection
needle and skin shapes are to be displayed. Pushing this button
again turns off the Soft function and the fluoroscopy program
which was selected before is turned on again.
4.8.10 Function Key - 1/2 Dose
This function is automatically selected when turning on the

equipment. The dose rate is split in half and thus reduces the
radiation strain on the patient and on the personnel to a minimum. If
required, this function can be turned off when pushing the button.
4.8.11 Contrast K e y s
The Contrast keys have more than one use depending o n options purchased
and mode of operations selected.
Contrast k e y operations:
1) N o r m a l Fluoroscopy: ( Standard System )

By pressing contrast keys, the contrast of the image can be changed o n
the left monitor. W h e n p u s h i n g both keys at the same time, the
image returns to standard image contrast setting. The range is + 3 to
- 3 steps.
2) C I N E / D S A : ( O p t i o n Module)
D u r i n g normal fluoroscopy portion of the D S A procedure the

Contrast Key's adjust image contrast.
D u r i n g C I N E / D S A replay mode press Contrast Key's to stop

image replay and step one image per press forward or reverse.
Press Booth Contrast Key's at the same time to return to full

frame rate or press booth again to change the replay frame rate.
3) Fluoroscopy w i t h Extended Surgical M o d u l e : (Option Module)
Contrast Key's are set to recall images only. Press Contrast key's to
step one image per press forward or reverse or hold key d o w n to

enter fast step image recall forward or reverse.
W H E N I N THIS S E L E C T I O N OF O P E R A T I O N T H E C O N T R A S T
A D J U S T M E N T IS D I S A B L E D C O M P L E T E L Y
Note operation number 2 and 3 require optional software and or

hardware modules to operate.
4.9.0 CONTROL - MOBILE STAND
4.9.1 k V Adjustment - M a n u a l M o d e
The k V level is normally controlled by the automatic dose rate

control. The operator may elect to set the level manually by pressing
A button 10 on the mobile stand (so it is muminated) and adjusting the

k V setting with button 13. Pressing once w i l l increase or decrease the
k V setting by one k V . H o l d i n g the button for more than 2 seconds
KV w i l l quickly advance or decrease the setting. Pressing button 10 again
w i l l return the system to automatic control of k V .
Once a k V level has been established by the automatic dose rate

control circuit the setting may be locked i n by switching to manual
k V . (kV stop).
4.9.2 Magnification (Zoom)
The Image Intensifier i n the E X P O S C O P 7000 is capable of electronic

magnification. It is selected by pressing button 23 on the mobile stand
and w i l l magnify the image by a factor of 1.5 and 2.0. Z o o m 2 w i t h
optional triple mode I.I.
1. N o r m a l zoom L E D off
2. Z o o m 1 L E D on
3. Zoom 2 L E D blinking
4.9.3 Monitor Selection
To select left or right monitor for image rotation, press the

appropriate button.
NOTE: The select button for the right monitor is not used with compact
unit.
4.9.4 Image Rotation
The image on the selected monitor can be rotated by pushing these

buttons. If both buttons are shortly pushed at the same time, the
image automatically rotates into the standard position. This
function is immediately interrupted if one of the two buttons is
pushed again.
Exposcop 7000 Section 4.00 04 /04/96

4.9.5 Image Reversal, Horizontal and Vertical
Activation of these buttons reverse the image vertical, head to toe or

horizontal, side to side.
4.9.6 Iris Collimator
To close iris, press button 18.

To open iris, press button 19.
Hold any button down for a longer duration. The iris motor speed will
gradually increase.
Hold both buttons down at the same time. Iris will open to maximum size.
4.9.7 Slot Collimator
To close, press button 14.
To open, press button 15.
Press both buttons for maximum opening.
Press button 18, iris rotates to the left.

Press button 19, iris rotates to the left.
4.9.8 Live Image Transfer
Cannot be activated during live Fluoro. Activate when no radiation is

present. The left image with text moves to the right monitor, and the right
monitor image, without text, moves to the left monitor (image swap).
Using the left monitor for A P and right monitor for lateral allows
individual monitor yoke rotation. To change AP/Lat procedure, just
move C-Arm and active live image transfer button 31.
NOTE: With Compact unit, this function can only be used in conjunction
with the monitor cart connected.
4.9.9 Image Store to Digital Disk (C-Arm Control)
1. Momentarily press button 30 to "store" live or last image hold to

disk.
Text message "Store" will blink at lower half of monitor and a
image store sequence number is shown in upper right corner of
monitor.
2. When Cine Acquire and dynamic image replay is running press

button 30 to store the Dynamic image run to the patients cine file.

Preliminary Description of Operation Rev. 2 - 32
3. When in Cine step mode press button 30 to store single image on
left monitor to the patient image file.
NOTE: This button is not used with compact system.
4.10.0 CONTROL P A N E L - MOBILE STAND
4.10.1 k V Display
The k V level is displayed at location 35 on the mobile stand. After

power on, it w i l l be set at 75 k V . During fluoroscopy, the system
l _ J ! _ J l _ l w i l l normally adjust the k V level with the automatic dose rate
I I I II I control circuitry. After Fluoro, the last k V setting w i l l be stored and
displayed. The k V setting may also be controlled manually as
KV described i n Section 9.1.
4.10.2 m A Display
The m A level is displayed at location 36 on the mobile stand, The

level is always adjusted by the system i n response to the k V
setting so that optimum performance may be achieved with the
I I I I I I x-ray tube. The m A is displayed during active fluoroscopy. In
I II I ©| | Fluoro off mode, its last value remains stored until new Fluoro
values or different modes are selected. Snapshot is fixed at 8 m A
and radiographic is 20 m A .
4.10.3 Exposure Time
In radiographic mode, a fixed current of 20 m A is adjusted. A

l I I I
selected exposure time from 0.1 to 4.0 seconds is stored a n d
I I I I displayed.
4.10.4 Indication of Dose Area Product (Optional)
Indication of the dose area product i n c G y c m . Adjustment of the

2
l_l l_l l_l l_l l_l measuring equipment of the dose area product can taken from the
I I I I I I I I I I enclosed.
cGy cm 2
W i t h (optional) dose meter, the "zero time" key and " 1 / 2 dose"
key have the following double function:
This key takes over the function of the " R E S E T " key. That means
dose area product and fluoroscopy time display are reset.
By pushing both buttons (more than 2 seconds), the " T E S T "

function is effected i n checking the operation of the dose display.

4.10.5 Fluoroscopy Time Display
The display indicates fluoroscopy and radiography time in

minutes and seconds.
M L N ®
4.10.6 Audio Alarm
After tennination of 5 minutes of total radiation time, a sound

signal starts and the red LED is flashing. When pushing this
button shortly, the sound signal is turned off while the LED
continues to flash. When pushing the button longer than 2
seconds, flashing of the red LED is terminated. At the same time
the indication of the radiography time and, if available, of the
dose area product is reset to zero.
4.10.7 Error, Overheating
®
If generator is overheated, the overheating indicator is flashing If
the single pulse or exposure mode is turned on, it is switched
back to the fluoroscopy mode and the tube voltage is limited to
0.5 mA. If this indicator is continuously flashing, the equipment
must be turned off. Before turning on again, the generator must
be cooled down.
Instruction: When turning on the equipment, the overheating

indicator will flash for a few seconds.
4.10.8 Exposure Indicator
There are three methods to indicate that radiation is being

generated. Location 41 on the mobile stand will be uluminated,
the amber light on top of the left monitor will be on, and the
" Ready Fluoro" indication in the lower part of the left monitor
will change to indicate "Fluoro" (fluoroscopy radiation on).
When equipment is first turned on, the over temperature and

TJX radiation symbols are illuminated for a few seconds.
4.10.9 Error Codes
At equipment start-up, some messages are displayed in the dose

—\ rate window if faults are present. It will display faults also
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
during use. Error messages have an " E " prefix in front of the
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 code. Press hand or footswitch to clear fault. If the fault codes
m
V remain in display window, they become significant. Please
cGycm 2
inform your Service Representative about the code number and
serial number of system.

*** RADIOGRAPHY ***
4.11.0 GENERAL INFORMATION
Spot film radiography is selected by pressing button 20 on the

mobile stand so it is Uluminated. It may be activated only w i t h
the hand switch. During the entire exposure, the acoustic alarm
is activated. The exposure is interrupted if hand switch is not
pressed down. A second radiography or fluoroscopy can be
initiated after a 10-second delay.
4.11.1 Exposure Technique
Radiography operates at a fixed tube current of 20 m A .

Normally, radiography is preceded by fluoroscopy of the object
of interest. This w i l l establish the optimum k V setting and this
setting w i l l automatically be used during radiography. However,
l _ l l _ l l _ l
manual values can be adjusted with button 13 .
K V :
4.11.2 Exposure Time
Since the rube current remains fixed and the k V setting is set for
optimum penetration, the dose may be controlled further only by
varying the duration of radiography. The time may be set from
0.1 sec. to 4.0 sec. The time is set w i t h button 22 and displayed
at location 4 on the mobile stand, if exposure chart is deleted.
4.11.3 F i l m Cassette Holder
The film cassette holder for spot film radiography is attached by

the operator to the image intensifier. To attach the cassette holder,
p u l l back the spring knob, position the holder on the image
intensifier, and release the knob as illustrated i n Picture 10.
PICTURE 10
Handle

4.11.4 Cassette Size
The collimator size is set during radiography for the size film
used. Either 24,30 or 40 centimeters may be selected (in the
USA the 30 and/or 40 cm modes are disabled).

4.12.0 LASER LIGHT O N / O F F (OPTIONAL)
The laser airning device is installed i n the x-ray generator.

A light cross is produced, the transposition point of w h i c h m a r k s
the position of the x-ray rube radiation. Laser button 2 w i l l turn
the laser beam on and off.
WARNING:
LASER RADIATION
A V O I D DIRECT EYE EXPOSURE
A L S O N O T WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
LASER CLASS 3A, IEC 825
- For safety reasons, the laser automatically turns off after one minute.
- Peak power is <2 m w wavelength 670 n m .
- Observe the guidelines for the user, according to I E C 825, Chapter 3.
4.12.1 Paper Printer
1) If the system is equipped w i t h only a paper printer,

p u s h button #6 is pressed to transfer image from
PRINT reference monitor to the paper printer a n d print the
image.
2) If system is equipped w i t h a hard copy camera and a

printer, y o u must use the monitor cart to print image from
paper printer. Press SHIFT key #8 and then press H A R D
C O P Y key #25 to transfer and print image from reference
monitor to the paper printer.
NOTE: Pressing PRINT key on paper printer will not necessarily

provide the proper image to be printed on the paper printer.
Therefore, always use the HARD COPY key or the combination of
SHIFT key and HARD COPY key to properly print image to
paper printer.
This function can only be utilized i n the Compact version, is

oo 2
0
W
HARD
COPY
additional monitor cart w i t h hard copy is connected.
Paper printer is an optional feature.

These Keys are Located
on the monitor Cart

4.13.0 ERROR C O D E
In case of fault error message condition, please provide Customer
Service with the code number and unit serial number.
There are three types of error messages to be aware of:
1. Caution message at start-up condition:
Any caution message is displayed at the dose rate window in blinking

fashion. Multitude messages are displayed in sequence. In caution
condition, the acoustical alert is activated. By briefly activating the
hand switch or foot switch, any warning codes are erased. Now the
EXPOSCOP 7000 becomes ready for operation.
2. Error code message at start-up condition:
Any error code message is displayed at the dose rate window in

blinking fashion and in sequence, if more messages are displayed. The
acoustical alert can be disabled by briefly activating the hand or foot
switch.
"If EXPOSCOP 7000 does not permit operation".

"The error code condition must be corrected by Customer Service."
3. Error code message at normal use:
Should this condition occur during operation, the radiation signal is

immediately interrupted. Any attempt to reactivate radiation is not
possible.
The error code is constantly displayed in blinking fashion in the dose

rate display window. The acoustical alert remains activated.
"The EXPOSCOP 7000 is not operational."

"The error code condition requires immediate correction by Customer
Service."
4.13.1 ERROR CODE Messages/Listings:
DESCRIPTION MESSAGE CODE
Hand switch 1 activated during start up Caution E16

Foot switch 1 activated during start up Caution E17
Hand switch 2 activated during start up Caution E18
Foot switch 2 activated during start up Caution E19
Cable defect hand or foot switch Error/Fault E20
With compact unit, yellow light of monitor defect Caution E21
Call Customer Service Warning 22

4.13.1 E R R O R C O D E Messages /Listings Continued:
C a l l Customer Service Error/Fault E2

Call Customer Service Error/Fault E27
Generator Fault, Overheating (allow cool off) Warning E29
C a l l Customer Service Error /Fault E56
C a l l Customer Sendee Warning E64

Rev.2-39
14.0 CLEANING, DISINFECTION, STERILIZATION
Disconnect from power source before attempting to clean or disinfect the unit.
4.14.1 Cleaning
To clean the unit, use a towel that is moisturized with water and common
cleaning solution. Do not use abrasive cleansers or solvents that contain alcohol
or gasoline traces, or concentrated spot remover solutions.
Never spray onto equipment — cleaning solution must not enter equipment.
In the monitor screen, use pure alcohol or diluted alcohol with 2/3 distilled
water mix.
Immediately after cleaning the screens, wipe with dry cotton cloth all
surrounding painted surfaces until they are dry.
4.14.2 Disinfection
For surface disinfection, please use the following:
a) Incidin (3% in water)

b) Ultrasol F (5:1 in water)
c) Formaldehyde solution (35%)
Do not use pure alcohol or sagrotan. It can destroy the equipment paint job
permanently. For any other disinfecting substances, no guarantee can be given.
Disinfection sprays cannot be used since the spray mist could get inside the
equipment that could jeopardize its safety. Electronic components could get
damaged and solution vapor gases could ignite.
4.14.3 Sterilization
The removable film cassette holder can be sterilized.

APPENDIX A TECHNICAL D A T A
L i n e Voltage 230VAC ± 10% 50 H z

110VAC ± 10% 60 H z
M a i n Fuse of Power Supply L 1 6 A / 220V
20A/110V
Leak Current Detection Switch I N 16A , I A N = 30mA
3
N o m i n a l Power D r a w 12A @ 120V, Peak 30A / 6 A @ 220V, Peak 15A
Safety Classification Safety Class I, Type B Equipment, Ordinary Equipment, Equipment not
suitable for use w i t h flammable atmosphere, Continuous Operation Equipment.
Internal Power Fuse 15A @ 220V 2x / 20A 110V 2x

Line Resistance <_0.6Q
Generator Output Fluoroscopy 40 k V @ 110 k V / 0.2 to 6 m A
Radiography 40kV@110kV/20mA
Operating Frequency 20 k H z
Operating Values Fluoro 110 k V / 0.2 @ 6 m A
Radiography 110 k V / 2 0 m A
Exposure Time 0.1 to 4 sec. Radiographic
Output Values Fluoro 550 W
Single Pulse 880 W
Exposure 2200 W
N o m i n a l Electrical Output (max.) 2200W @ 100 k V / 20 m A
Current-Time Reference 20 m A @ 0.1 s
Radiation Safety A r e a 2.5 m / 7" LI. 3.5 m / 9" LI.
M o r e Specifications of the X-Ray Tube can be found i n the Data Sheet.

X-Ray Tube Double Focus Stationary A n o d e
N o m i n a l Focal Spot Fluoro 0.6
Radiographic 1.5
Inherent Filtration >_4 m m A L
Image Intensifier 9" = 23/15cm 7" = 17/10cm
Cesium Iodide
Magnification = 1.5X
Fluoro G r i d Pb8/140
Monitors Picture Tube 44 cm (17")
Bandwidth 20 M H Z
Resolution 32 kHz/60-120 H z
Storage Temperature -10° C to + 70° C 95% rel. h u m i d i t y storage
W o r k i n g Temperature +10° C to + 35° C 85% rel. h u m i d i t y w o r k i n g
Mechanism Focal Spot to I.I, Input Screen 97 cm

C - A r m Width=I.I. to X-ray Tube 75 cm
C - A r m Depth 68 cm
Orbital Movement 115
Rotation ± 225°
Side-to-Side ( W i g Wag) ±12°
Horizontal 22 cm
Vertical 13 cm
Weight C-Arm 260 kg
Monitor Cart 125 k g
N O T E : Discoloration of thermal paper could occur at temperatures >40° C and a relative

h u m i d i t y of >60%. A t temperatures above 60° C , irreversible contrast loss can occur.

Rev.2 - 41
APPENDIX A TECHNICAL DATA C O N T I N U E D :
Thermal Capacity 400,000 J

Continuous thermal emission 50W
THERMAL CURVE
Min Temp. [ 0 C ] Min Temp. [ 0 C ] Min Temp. [ 0 C ]
0 22,1 21 58,2 42 58,1
1 22,3 22 58,2 43 58,1
2 23,2 23 58,2 44 58,2
3 25,1 24 58,2 45 58,2
4 26,9 25 58,1 46 58,3
5 29,9 26 58,0 47 58,3
6 31,9 27 57,9 48 58,4
7 33,8 28 57,8 49 58,4
8 35,9 29 57,8 50 58,5
9 38,2 30 57,8 51 58,6
10 40,1 31 57,8 52 58,7
11 41,2 32 57,8 53 58,7
12 43,9 33 57,9 54 58,8
13 45,6 34 57,9 55 58,8
14 47,4 35 57,8 56 58,9
15 49,2 36 57,8 57 58,9
16 50,9 37 57,9 58 59.0
17 52,2 38 57,9 59 59,1
18 54,3 39 57,9 X60 59,2
X19 55,9 40 58,0
20 57,4 41 58,0
EXPOSCOP 7000 SECTION 4.00 04/04/96

INTERNATIONAL MEDICAL SYSTEMS PRELIMINARY DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION REV. 2 - 4 2
COOLING CURVE
MTN' Temp. [OC MTN Temp. I OC MIN' Temp. [oC MTN Temp. [OC i
1
60 59,2 90 52,2 120 45,5 150 40,2
61 91 1212 151
62 92 122 152
63 93 123 153
64 94 124 154
65 58,2 95 50,8 125 44,5 155 39,4
66 96 126 156
67 97 127 157
68 98 128 158
69 99 129 159
70 56,8 100 49,4 130 43,6 160 38,7
71 101 131 161
72 102 132 162
73 103 133 163
74 104 134 165 38,1
75 55,9 105 48,7 135 42,7 166
76 106 136 167
77 107 137 168
78 108 138 169
79 109 139 170 37,5
80 54,6 110 47,5 140 41,9 171
81 111 141 172
82 112 142 173
83 113 143 174
84 114 144 175 36,8
85 53,4 115 46,5 145 41,1 176
86 116 146 177
87 117 147 178
88 118 148 179
89 119 149 180 36,2
Statement of Compliance:
C - A r m E X P O S C O P C B 7000 w i t h X-Ray Source Assembly M a x i p u l s 3-110 IEC 601-1 :1990

IEC 601-2-7 : 1987
IEC 601-2-28 : 1993
IEC 601-2-32 : 1994
Z I E H M . G M B H A N D INTERNATIONAL MEDICAL SYSTEMS, INC. RESERVE T H E RIGHT T O M A K E C H A N G E S IN

SPECIFICATIONS A T A N Y T I M E WITHOUT NOTIFICATION.
© 1996 Z I E H M / INTERNATIONAL M E D I C A L SYSTEMS A L L RIGHTS RESERVED

International Medical Systems freliminary Description of Operation Rev. 2 - 44
International Medical Systems Rev. 2-45
Section 4.00 04/04/96
Exposcop 7000 Rev. 2 - 46
*** A P P E N D I X B ***
1. Registration N u m b e r
2. Measuring Data for Radiation Protection
3. Certificate for Standard Measuring Data
4. X-ray Tube Performance Chart
5. Protective Tube H o u s i n g Test
Registration N u m b e r
REGISTRATION NO.: BY 287/84/RO
OC8510253-02
C O M P L I E S W I T H D E P A R T M E N T OF H E A L T H A N D H U M A N SERVICES (DHHS)
R A D I A T I O N P E R F O R M A N C E S T A N D A R D S , 21 C F R S U B C H A P T E R J.
2. Measuring Data for Radiation Protection
Test certificate for mobile X-ray image intensifier

EXPOSCOP PLUS
Type: E X P O S C O P P L U S Serial N o .
2.1 Technical documents:
Operating Instructions and Customer Service Instructions
2.2 Dose rate measuring
Filter 25 m m A l u m i n u m
92 c m focus-U-distance w i t h grid
cm mR/s .kV. .mA
cm mR/s kV mA
3. Certificate for Standard Measuring Data
For image intensifier television system E X P O S C O P P L U S , mobile C - A r m for surgery

and traumatology w i t h automatic dose rate control.
Exposcop 7000 Section 4.00 04/04 / 96

Iyj2£: EXPOSCOP PLUS
Technical data:
X-ray Tube: Z i e h m stationary anode double focus tube
Focal spot 0.6 for fluoroscopy

n o m i n a l value: 1.5 for exposure
Generator: Z i e h m h i g h frequency single tank X-ray generator
Fluoroscopy output: 36 k v , 0.2 m A u p to 110 k V , 6 m A (8 m A i n snapshot mode)
Radiography output: 36-110 k V , at 20 m A
Exposure time
(Radiography): 0.1 sec - 4 sec
C o l l i m a t i o n system: Iris collimator and semitransparent slot collimator
Cassette holder: 18 x 24,24 x 30 cm
Fluoroscopy grid: Round focused grid
Image intensifier: Cesium Iodide tube 17 c m / 10 cm

Optional Input field 22/16
Television: 50 h z , 625 lines

60 h z , 525 lines
20 M H z band w i d t h , electronic
image reversal
Power supply: 120 V

50 (60) hz, 2 x 20 A slow fuses
220 V , 240 V
50 (60) hz, 2 x 16 A slow fuses

Monitor:
17"
32 k H z / 6 0 - 1 2 0 h Z video display rate

4. X-ray Tube Performance Chart
For x-ray tube, insert
Manufacturer: Ziehm G m b H
Type: EP-F 181-0.6/ 1.5-125-60
Production N o . : 912/
Effective focal spot: 0.6 m m x 0.6 m m / 1 5 m m x 1.5 m m
Installed into protective tube housing:
Manufacturer: Ziehm G m b H
Type: Maxipuls 3 -110
Production N o . :
M a x i m u m admissible high voltage: 110 k V
Date:

5. Protective Tube H o u s i n g Test
X-ray U n i t
Protective tube housing type: Maxipuls 3 -110

Production N o .
X-ray tube: Ziehm G m b H

EP-F 181-0.6/1.5-125-60
Production N o .
912/
Registration N o . BY 2 8 7 / 8 4 / R O
Inherent filtering: > 3 mm A L
Dose Rate Control:
k V - m A are constant pairs and are directly indicated at the control desk - mobile stand
( D I N 6811 of January 1972, Point 33.1.2).
M a x i m u m operating values for fluoroscopy: 6 m A at m a x i m u m of 110 k V p .
Test of Automatic Dose Rate Control:

A c c o r d i n g to X-ray regulations, the automatic dose rate control has to be checked once per
m o n t h as follows:
Insert lead apron, e.g. 0.5 m m P b , into the radiation i n a w a y that the complete input field
of image intensifier is covered. The digital k V indication must increase from
approximately 40 k V to approximately 70 k V .

4.15 G E N E R A L I N F O R M A T I O N IMS2760 K E Y B O A R D C O N T R O L
The LMS2760 Digital image system software has been written to be direct i n its approach for user operation. (In
other words, it is more user friendly.)
W h e n power is turned on, the image system w i l l do a few self-tests. Several beeps m a y be heard a n d are normal
for boot-up routines. After approximately 30-40 seconds, the system w i l l display R E A D Y F O R F L U O R O on the
left Process display monitor. A t this time, the image system is ready to acquire images from the C - A r m T . V .
chain.
The Exposcop Plus w i l l start operation i n the non-specified patient record. The non-specified patient record
allows the unfamiliar technologist to operate the Exposcop Plus w i t h ease. They are not required to enter
patient name or I.D. number. The system w i l l allow the images to be stored i n a loop of 16 or 32 images
depending o n system options. This means if y o u start at #ONE (1) for a new procedure and y o u have stored 32
images, the next image to be stored w o u l d be at # one (1). This w i l l overwrite the previously stored image at #
one (1) on the image disk.
NOTE: We recommend the use of non-specified patient record for emergency procedures when long term storag
(more that just a few minutes) is not needed.
For archiving images to HARDCOPY film or paper printer. It is necessary to have all patient information on
the screen. We recommend using the patient file for this purpose.
T E R M I N O L O G Y U S E D I N O P E R A T I O N S E C T I O N S 14.15 -14.20.8
PROCESS MONITOR:
This generally refers to the left monitor display. H o w e v e r , i n certain circumstances the left monitor
w i l l be used as the reference display monitor. This w i l l occur w h e n the L I V E I M A G E T R A N S F E R
selection is made from the C - A R M control keyboard.
LIVE I M A G E TRANSFER KEY
The P R O C E S S M O N I T O R is used to display all live images for fluoroscopic procedures and to
display process image functions, i.e., four (4) o n one (1), S H A R P , W I N D O W L E V E L , a n d M A G
W I N D O W , etc . . .
REFERENCE MONITOR:
This generally refers to the right monitor display. H o w e v e r , i n certain circumstances the right monitor
w i l l be used as the process display monitor. This w i l l occur w h e n the L I V E I M A G E T R A N S F E R
selection is made from the C - A R M control keyboard.
N O T E : Optional S I M P L E I M A G E T R A N S F E R from left to right monitor can be selected b y service

engineer.
C - A R M CONTROL KEYBOARD:
This refers to the C - A r m mobile keyboard controlling all c-arm functions, i.e.selection of
fluoroscopy, pulse fluoro, snapshot, collimator controls, k V / m A displays, etc.
MONITOR CART CONTROL KEYBOARD:
Exposcop 7000 IMS2760 Digital Section 4.0 (4.15 - 4.20) 04/05/96

International Medical System Preliminary Description of Operation Rev. 1 -1
This refers to the IMS2760 image processor control keyboard. The monitor cart control keyboard
provides the operation interface for the user to select functions of the image processing system, i.e.
store images, recall images, film documentation, make cine runs, store cine runs, create patient data base
for image records, etc
The monitor cart control keyboard has several different overlays for key functions. The overlays are
designed to w o r k w i t h software version and options purchased.
IMS2760:
This refers to the image processors system located i n the monitor cart of the Exposcop 7000 C - A r m
starting M a r c h 28,19 96. This image processor provides highspeed image A n a l o g to digital conversion
at 10 bits of gray scale. The real time image processors allows the storage a n d recall of images at f u l l
10 bit gray scale. This makes the EMS2760 is one of the most advanced image systems for C - A r m
use today.
CINE:
This refers to the capture a n d replay of images i n a continues loop.
MAG WNDW:
This refers to the use of the image processor to display a selected image magnified by a factor 2 or 4
times.
4onl:
Feature allowing the display of four image on one monitor for documentation.
WNDW/LEVEL:
Processing feature a l l o w i n g the image gray scale to be manipulated.
TEXT A N N O T A T I O N :
Refers to the use of text i n p u t for patient information for displays o n monitors and image identification
for documentation.
TEXT INSERT:
Refers to the entry and display of information typed from the keyboard to place labels, or graphic
pointers for anatomical notation i n the image.
NON-SPECIFIED PATIENT:
Refers to the operation of the image system w h e n no patient record has been recalled or entered for
operation. This w i l l be the default operation of the system and is used most commonly for emergency
situation were a patient file record is deemed not necessary for documentation of images o n hardcopy
f i l m or paper printer.
N E W PATIENT:
Refers to the n e w patient information screen where a l l n e w patient information is entered to create a
new patient f i l e / r e c o r d .
IMAGE P A G E DISPLAY:
Refers to h e system operation that creates a 16 image display o n the reference monitor. This may also
be called I M A G E C O L L A G E .
IMAGE CROP:
Refers the image processing function of electronic collimation using black overlay shutters to crop

International Medical System Preliminary Description of Operation Rev. 1-2
unwanted sides, top and bottom areas an image for storing to digital disk or film documentation.
SHARP:
Refers to the processing function for post image enhancement of image details.
EDGE:
Refers to the real time use of image processing hardware for image detail enhancement i n live
fluoroscopic procedures.
NOISE:
Refers to the real time application of weighted frame averaging to reduce noise i n the image for
i m p r o v e d image quality.
LIH NOISE:
Refers to the function used a the end of a fluoroscopy w h e n the radiation h a n d / f o o t s w i t c h is released
and the processing system averages images to reduce noise i n the image to provide better image quality.
I N V V I D E O : (INVERT VIDEO)
Refers to the inverting of the image b l k / w h t levels to produce an image were the blks are n o w white
and the whites are now blk.
ESCAPE:
refers to the system function that allows the operator to leave most other functions a n d return to the
previous function or just exit the function to select another function or mode of operation.
D I G I T A L D I S K / D Y N A M I C D I G I T A L DISK:
D I G I T A L D I S K refers to a device w h i c h can store vast amounts of information i n digital form stored
one image at a time..
D Y N A M I C D I G I T A L DISK refers to a device w h i c h can store vast amounts of d i g i t a l image

information i n a sequential order i n a particular area of the storage media. M o s t often used w i t h 2 - 4
F/Sec image acquisition and playback.
HARDCOPY:
Refers to the ability of the system to provide a video image output that can be used to make film and
paper images for archiving patient images from the image processing system.
I M A G E STORE:
Refers to the operation of taking an image i n the processor displayed o n process monitor and archiving
it i n to the digital disk for long term storage i n the patient f i l e / r e c o r d .
KEYBOARD LAYOUT:
The keyboard o n the next page demonstrates the full system options. Please use reference guide to
determine the page and section of each key function description.

International Medical System Rev. 1 - 3
Exposcop 7000 IMS2760 Digital Section 4.0 (4.15 - 4.20) 04 / 05 / 96
IMS2760 D I G I T A L C O N T R O L K E Y B O A R D R E F E R E N C E G U I D E
Section Description Page #

General Information 4
C o n t r o l Keyboard 5
Table of Contents 7
14.15 Power O N / O F F 7
14.16 Text Annotation and N e w Patient Information Keys

14.16.1 A l p h a Keys 7
14.16.2 N u m e r i c a l Keys 7
14.16.3 Shift key 8
14.16.4 Delete / Space 8
14.16.5 Enter 9
14.16.6 N e w Patient 9
14.16.7 Text Insert 11
14.17 A c q u i s i t i o n / Fluoroscopy
14.17.1 Fluoroscopy 12
14.17.2 Pulsed Fluoroscopy 12
14.17.3 Snapshot 12
14.17.4 M S A Max-Op 12
14.17.5 R S A RoadMap 13
14.17.6 D S A D i g i t a l Subtraction 13
14.17.7 Edge (Real Time Edge Enhancement) 15
14.17.8 Noise Reduction 15
14.17.9 L L H (Last Image H o l d ) 15
14.17.10 W N D W ( W i n d o w Adjustment) 16
14.17.11 Text O n / O f f 16
14.17.12 Frame Rate 17
14.17.13 Mask 17
14.17.14 Cine Reset 17
14.17.15 Cine 17
14.17.16 Reserved
14.18 Review
14.18.1 Image F W D / R E V 22
14.18.2 Image Page Display 22
14.18.3 Pat File ( Patient Data Base File ) 24
14.18.4 MonLtoR 28
14.18.5 MonRtoL 28
14.18.6 C i n e Edit 28
14.18.7 C i n e Recall 28
14.18.8 Inv V i d e o (Invert V i d e o V a l u e s ) 28
14.18.9 H a r d c o p y (Film documentation camera / V i d e o Paper Printer) 28
14.19 Store
14.19.1 Autostore 29
14.19.2 Cine Store 31
14.19.3 Image Store 31

14.20 Process
14.20.1 Image C r o p (Post Electronic Image Collimation) 31
14.20.2 4onl 32
14.20.3 W N D W ( Window / Level) 34
14.20.4 M a g W N D W (Image Magnification) 34
14.20.5 Shift M a s k 35
14.20.6 A r r o w Keys 35
14.20.7 Sharp 36
14.20.8 Escape 36
Exposcop 7000 IMS2760 Digital

International Medical System
Section 4.0 (4.15 - 4.20)
Preliminary Descnpuon of Operation
SKev.,l -?b
470 57 6
4.1 Power O n / O f f
The O N key is green and located i n the lower middle right side of the monitor control keyboard.
The O N key must be pressed to r u m on power, at w h i c h time the image system w i l l d o a few self-
tests. Several beeps may be heard and are normal or boot-up routines. After approximately 40-50
seconds, the system w i l l display R E A D Y F O R F L U O R O on the left Process display monitor.
A t this time, the image system is ready to acquire images from the C - A r m T.V. chain. The small
L E D i n the upper left comer of the key w i l l light when power is on
Example of O N key
The O F F key is red i n color and located just above the O N key. W h e n the OFF key is pressed the
system w i l l r u m off power for both the C - A R M and the monitor cart assembly.
Example of O F F key
14.16 TEXT A N N O T A T I O N A N D N E W PATIENT I N F O R M A T I O N
14.16.1 Alpha Keys
The A l p h a keys are arranged i n a standard Q W E R T Y key arrangement for easy entry of text for
both patient information and text annotation of images.
Most of the alpha keys have secondary functions for punctuation of text input such as, period, colon,
less than, greater than, back slash, question mark, etc...
To use secondary functions of alpha keys press the SHIFT K E Y and h o l d it d o w n w h i l e typing the
key w i t h the punctuation needed.
Example of the Punctuation keys
s
•
SHIFT ?
D ~
KEY
Press ( SHIFT K E Y + A ) = !
14.16.2 N U M E R I C A L
The numerical keys are used to enter patient I.D. #, Date, Time, and service enter of default values
for system operation. The keys are located i n the upper right comer of the monitor cart control
keyboard.
Exposcop 7000 IMS2760 Digital Section 4.0 (4.15 - 4.20) 04 / 0 5 / 96

14.16.3 S H I F T K E Y
The Shift Key is used to p r o v i d e the operator w i t h additional features for the control keyboard
keys. The Shift key must be pushed and h e l d before the function keys are pressed. The following
SHIFT
list of key functions describe the use of the Shift key
KEY
IMAGE CROP: Select Image C r o p then press the S H I F T K E Y h o l d i n g it
d o w n w h i l e pressing the U p / D o w n or R i g h t / L e f t arrow
keys. The Image C r o p function provides times 2
movement for closing or opening the electronic image
shutters.
W N D W / LEVEL: Select W n d w / L e v e l f r o m the control keyboard then

press the shift key h o l d i n g it d o w n w h i l e pressing the
U p / D o w n or R i g h t / L e f t arrow keys. The W n d w / L e v e l
values w i l l be changed to a rate of 2 times the normal
change.
M A G WNDW: Select M a g W n d w From the control keyboard then

U p / D o w n or R i g h t / L e f t arrow keys. The M a g W n d w
Movement w i l l be changed to a rate of 2 times the
normal scroll and pan rate.
TEXT INSERT: Select Text Insert F r o m the control keyboard then

U p / D o w n or R i g h t / L e f t arrow keys. The Text Insert
Movement of the A r r o w or Text String w i l l be changed
to a rate greater than 2 times the normal scroll and pan
rate.
A L P H A KEYS: Some of the A l p h a Keys have secondary functions for

punctuation of text input such as, period, colon, less
than, greater than, back slash, question mark, etc...
To use secondary functions of alpha keys press the

SHIFT K E Y and h o l d it d o w n w h i l e t y p i n g the key w i t h
the punctuation needed.
Example: Press ( SHIFT K E Y + A ) = !
14.16.4 DELETE/SPACE
Delete/Space key
Press the shift key and the Delete/Space key to delete one character each time the key is
pressed. If the operator needs to place a space i n the entry of informatin, the operator must push
the Delete/Space key without the h o l d i n g the shift key.

International Medical System Preliminary Description of Operation Rev. 1 - 8
14.16.5 ENTER
Press to enter information that is needed to perform operations, i.e. after each l i n e of patient
information, to start a function such as accepting a new patient record for image processing, or to
ENTER accept a highlighted operation, etc...
14.16.6 NEW PAT (NEW PATIENT)
The N e w Pat key located i n the upper right comer of the control
keyboard.
Press the N E W P A T key to enter patient information menu.
The m e n u shown below i n Fig 1. allows the operator to enter the

patient information line b y line. The operator w i l l type i n the
information needed then press the Enter key as each line is completed or
to skip to the next entry field. After the last line has been completed the
operator w i l l be presented a verification notice i n the lower third of the
screen to confirm the data is correct or to return to the information for
correction.
SPECIAL INPUT FIELDS
Facility N a m e :
To enter a n e w facility name press the D o w n A r r o w key located i n the
lower right comer of the control keyboard to move the cursor to the
correct line. Once the N e w Facility entry line is highlighted, the operator
types i n the new information then presses E N T E R or moves the cursor up
to the patient information b y using the U p A r r o w key.
Date/Time:
To enter a new Date or Time press the D o w n A r r o w key to move the
cursor to the D A T E or T I M E field line. Once the operator has highlighted
the Date or Time entry, the operator w i l l type i n the n e w information then
press E N T E R to store the new information. To move the cursor to the
patient information again,, use the U p A r r o w key.
Example of date entry: 08/16/95

Example of time entry: 08:15:00
W h e n entering time and date please make sure the format for entry is the
same as the example.
N O T E : Both D a t e / T i m e and Facility name are default information lines

and are stored and do not require the operator to change unless the
information is incorrect due to reinstallation i n a n e w facility or date, time
change has occurred.
To exit the N e w Patient information screen without saving information

press the E S C key.
W h e n the operator completes the entry of information and presses the " Y "

key the system w i l l close the file and update the process monitor on the left
w i t h the new patient information. See Fig. 2
RIGHT MONITOR DISPLAY "NEW PATIENT ENTRY"
I'll I w I SI HI'I III 1 >:i I
Figure 1
Exposcop 7000 IMS2760 Digital Section 4.0 (4.15 - 4.20)

International Medical System Preliminary Description of Operation
14.16.7 TEXT INSERT
The T E X T INSERT function provides the operator w i t h the ability to insert

TEXT annotation and or arrows marking anatomical landmarks for special notations.
INSERT
The text used i n the LMS2760 digital system is made to be seen no matter
what the background image brightness is. This means that the text can be
overlaid on any area w i t h i n the image circle w i t h out being lost i n the
background.
Press the T E X T INSERT key and all the text from the left monitor w i l l be
removed and T X T INSERT display message w i l l be seen i n lower
left corner of the screen and an arrow is displayed i n the middle of
the image circle. To move the arrow or text on the monitor use the
U P / r j O W N R I G H T / L E F T arrow keys. To make more arrows i n the image
press enter then use the arrow keys on the control keyboard to move the
arrow marker to a new position.
To enter text press any alphanumerical key to start entering a text string.
The text can have 3 lines of 15 characters each. To move the text use arrow
keys on the control keyboard. To save the image press store or transfer the
image to the right monitor. The operator can make hard copies of the
image.
Exposcop 7000 IMS2760 Digital Section 4.0 (4.15 - 4.20) 04 / 05 / 96

14.17 ACQUISITION / FLUOROSCOPY
14.17.1 FLUOROSCOPY
The Fluoroscopy key is located o n the C - A r m control keyboard on the left side
middle.
This is the first available function f o l l o w i n g application of power. W h e n the C - A r m

is turned on, the system w i l l perform a self-test of the image system and display a
text message box i n the lower left comer of the monitor screen. W h e n the
[RDY F L U O R O ] message is seen and the C - A r m w a r m - u p time (approximately one
minute) has elapsed, the foot pedal or hand switch m a y be depressed to start
radiation. W h e n the footswitch or hand switch is released, the image w i l l be h e l d
for display o n the left or process monitor. Radiation alert may be set for
approximately once per second.
Note: Radiation alert beep can be enabled or disabled by the

service engineer.
14.17.2 PULSED FLUORO
This function w i l l pulse the radiation o n and off at intervals from 1 to 2 pulses per
(CSX? second while the monitor displays the frozen image of the previous exposure.
vJHLTL, The pulsed fluoro mode is used to reduce patient dose. This function is selected from
the Exposcop Plus C-Arm control keyboard. If the radiation alert is turned on y o u w i l l
hear an audible tone at each pulse of radiation.
14.17.3 SNAPSHOT
W h e n the handswitch is pressed, the C - A r m makes one quick h i g h 8 m A exposure

fQV)S| w i t h default of 16 image noise reduction and displays the image o n the monitor until
the handswitch is pressed again. The next snapshot w i l l update the monitor screen
w i t h the new image. This function is selected from the Exposcop Plus C - A r m control
keyboard. If the radiation alert is turned on y o u w i l l hear an audible tone at each
pulse of radiation.
Note: Snapshot can only be made w i t h the handswitch.
14.17.4 MSA (MAXIMUM OPACIFICATION)
M S A preserves d u r i n g the contrast injection regions w i t h greatest contrast i n the

image. This results i n m a x i m u m visualized opacification of the vascular injection.
To perform M S A ( M A X I M U M O P A C I F I C A T I O N )
Press the M S A key o n the C - A r m control or the monitor control keyboard to enable
m a x i m u m opacification.
Perform scout fluoroscopy using the standard fluoroscopy mode and position the
patient.

Press the hand or footswitch and w h e n the audible alert is heard start the contrast
injection. The hand or footswitch is release w h e n a fully opacified image is obtained.
The process monitor w i l l display the procedure w i t h preservation of regions w i t h
greatest contrast occurring i n the image during the contrast injection.
T u r n on A U T O STORE to store the image w h e n footswitch is released.
14.17.5 RSA (ROADMAP)
R S A is a subtracted vascular pathway w h i c h is displayed w h i l e a balloon, catheter

or guide wire under live fluoroscopy is guided to its desired position.
To perform R S A ( R O A D M A P ) procedures
Perform scout fluoroscopy using the standard fluoroscopy mode and position the
patient.
Press the R S A key on the C - A r m control or the monitor control keyboard to enable the
R O A D M A P F J N C T I O N . Peak opacification w i l l automatically be enabled for the
first part of the procedure.
injection. The hand or footswitch is release w h e n a fully opacified image is obtained.
The process monitor w i l l display the procedure w i t h preservation of regions w i t h
greatest contrast occurring i n the image d u r i n g the contrast injection.
To continue the R O A D M A P procedure press the foot or handswitch the subtracted

R O A D M A P w i l l continue to be displayed live on the process monitor while the right
monitor w i l l display an un-subtracted live image.
To exit the R S A procedure press the R S A key again or press EXIT on the monitor
control keyboard.
A u t o store may be turned on with M S A to store the image at the

time the foot or handswitch is released.
14.17.6 D S A (DIGITAL SUBTRACTION)
D S A provides simple fluoroscopic subtracted imaging w i t h last image h o l d or

dynamic image acquisition u p to 4 f/sec.
To perform a simple D S A ( D I G I T A L S U B T R A C T I O N )
Perform scout fluoroscopy using the standard fluoroscopy mode w i t h pelvic key
selected and position the patient.
Press the D S A key on the monitor control keyboard to enable the simple D S A
operation w i t h last image h o l d .
injection. Release the footswitch or hand switch w h e n a fully opacified vascular
image is obtained. The image processor w i l l freeze the image on the left monitor.
T u r n o n A U T O STORE to store the image w h e n footswitch is released.

DSA with CINE (DYNAMIC IMAGE ACQUISITION)
Perform fluoroscopy using the standard fluoroscopy mode w i t h pelvic key

selected for position and orientation.
Press C I N E key then press the D S A key o n the monitor control keyboard.
This w i l l activate b o m the 4 f/sec image acquisition and the subtracted image
operation.
Press the h a n d or footswitch and w h e n the audible alert is heard start the contrast
injection. Release the footswitch or hand switch w h e n the desired vascular anatomy
has been visualized. The acquired images w i l l then be replayed automatically i n a
continuous loop.
Please review the C I N E operation section i n this m a n u a l for further details of the
d y n a m i c C I N E image replay functions.
The A c q u i r e d images temporally stored o n the dynamic disk until the operator
presses the C I N E S T O R E key w h i c h then protects the image r u n form being over
written.
A s long as the C T N E / D S A function is still selected the operator may start another r u n
just b y pressing the foot or handswitch.
T o Exit the C L N E / D S A mode press the cine key again or press the exit key.
THIS A R E A W A S P U R P O S E L Y L E F T O P E N

14.17.7 E D G E (REAL T I M E E D G E E N H A N C E M E N T ) O P T I O N A L
The Edge Enhancement function sharpens the edges of imaged anatomical

structures. Selection of four discrete levels is permitted.
Selection of this function is made on the left lower side of the monitor cart.
The settings are as follows
1 = 20%, 2= 35%, 3=50%,and 4=65% enhancement to the image.
The Edge Enhancement key can only be pressed when fluoroscopy is not
active. The monitor w i l l display a message i n the lower right corner of the
left or process monitor w h e n E D G E is on. The display message is s h o w n i n
Fig. 2.
Best results w i t h Edge Enhancement i n fluoro live video is obtained w h e n

at least a Noise Reduction level of N R L O W is used.
See section 14.17.5 for Noise Reduction.
Edge enhancement is not a post-processing function and cannot be used to
change a previously-stored image.
14.17.8 NOISE REDUCTION
To reduce "noise" i n a fluoroscopic image by three discrete steps press the

N O I S E key during or before fluoroscopy is started.
NOISE
The message N R L O W , N R M E D , and N R H I G H is displayed i n the lower
right corner of the left monitor to indicate the level of noise reduction
currently e m p l o y e d . Noise Reduction is not a post-processing function and
can not be used to change a previously-stored image.
NOTE: Noise reduction is accomplished by using weighted frame averaging of the

current and previous images; this may cause an increase in image
lag-time in the video display.
14.17.9 L I H N O I S E (LAST I M A G E H O L D NOISE REDUCTION)
The L I H noise reduction function reduces the "noise" i n the image only at
the time the radiation switch is released. The advantage of L I H noise
LIH reduction is that during a normal fluoroscopic image, the D r . m a y be
MOUSE m o v i n g the patient and, or the C - A r m causing the image to smear w i t h
normal noise reduction, but w h e n the D r . stops the movement and releases
the radiation footswitch the image system w i l l then average the images at
the end and provide an image w i t h reduced noise displayed on the monitor.
LIH Noise Reduction is not a post-processing function and
cannot be used to change a previously-stored image.
The operator m a y also choose to have a N R L O W setting for live noise

reduction a n d set a higher value w i t h the L I H H I G H to be applied w h e n the
footswitch is released.
Four settings are available: L I H L o w , L I H M e d , L I H H i g h , and L I H off.

International Medical System Rev. 1 -15
LIH OFF:
There m a y be times w h e n the operator does not w i s h to have the image
displayed on the monitor after release of the footswitch.
Press the L I H Noise key several times until the message L I H O F F is seen
o n the left monitor i n the lower right comer of the monitor display.
14.17.10 WNDW (WINDOW)
The W i n d o w function changes both the contrast and the brightness of the
v i d e o image b y changing the w i n d o w of grey scale and the level of
WNDW brightness w i t h i n the w i n d o w of grey scale w i t h 3 to 6 levels. The W N D W
key is located i n the acquisition section lower right comer of the control
keyboard.
WNDW is not a post-processing function and cannot be used to

14.17.11 TEXT ON/OFF
The function turns o n or off the display o n the left or process monitor.
TEXT The f o l l o w i n g patient information and display messages w i l l be removed
ON/OFF f r o m the display w h e n the text is turned off. Patient name and I.D., D r .
name, facility name, procedure title, date, time, a n d the I M S logo.
See F i g 3 for location and monitor display without text. W h e n text is turned
off the system stores the information for each image i n the patient record.
Patient information is removed when Text Oft is sleeted.
Figure 3

14.17.12 FRAME RATE
The F R A M E R A T E key sets the frame acquisition rate for cine runs and
the play back frame rates. The frame rate can be set at 1 / 2 f/sec, 1 f/sec,
FRAME 2 f/sec and 4 f/sec w i t h Optional packages . The system can acquire at one
RATE frame rate and replay at another frame rate if desired.
The operator sets the frame rate before acquiring images by pressing the
key until the monitor displays the correct frame rate required.
FRAME RATE can be used with previously stored image Loops retrieved
from memory.
14.17.13 MASK
M A S K key performs two specific operations.
SET I M A G E M A S K :
1) Pressing the M A S K key w i l l stop the image loop replay and allow
the operator to use the F W D or R E V image keys to move the M A S K
number of the r u n to the desired image number to be used as the new
mask. The operator then presses the F R A M E R A T E key to start the
loop replay again.
VARIABLE LANDMARKING:
2) In some situation it may be difficult to determine the position of
vascular anatomy. In these situation landmark is used to fade bony
anatomy into the image.
To use L A N D M A R K press the M A S K key d u r i n g the replay of the

subtraction procedure. Press the U P arrow key to fade more of the
mask away and the D O W N arrow key to fade the mask back i n .
Once y o u have brought the mask fully back into the image y o u may
continue the procedure as if uninterrupted.
14.17.14 CINE RESET
N o t used at this time reserved for future use.
14.17.15 CINE (DYNAMIC IMAGE ACQUISITION)
C I N E key selects the dynamic image Acquisition mode for acquiring

images i n a sustained sequence for replay at a m a x i m u m of 4 f/sec
depending on optional packages. The images acquired are stored directly to
a dynamic digital disk and require no transfer from volatile memory for
storage before another r u n can be made.
SETUP
Start procedure by positioning C - A r m i n the correct location for image

acquisition, checking position w i t h fluoroscopy.
W h e n the operator is ready to start the acquisition press the Cine key
located i n the left m i d d l e of the monitor control keyboard.

The left monitor w i l l display C I N E i n the lower left comer. The activity
light w i l l be on i n corner of the C I N E key and the frame rate selected is
displayed i n the right upper comer of the monitor.
The system is n o w ready for the cine acquisition. Press and h o l d h a n d or

foot switch to start fluoroscopy and wait for the audible alert to start the
injection.
H o l d the exposure switch u n t i l the desired vascular anatomy has been

visualized. The acquired images w i l l start to playback i n continuous loop
f r o m the dynamic digital disk.
The acquired images are located o n the dynamic disk drive and are
unprotected from overwriting unless the C I N E STORE key is pressed.
Therefore if the operator presses the foot or hand switch again the dynamic
image r u n w i l l be over written by a new dynamic image acquisition.
To protect the acquired image loop press the C I N E S T O R E key.
T o start another dynamic image acquisition w i t h out storing the previously

acquired image loop press the foot s w i t c h and w h e n the audible tone is herd
start the new injection.
If scout fluoroscopy is necessary between runs just press the C I N E key,or

the EXIT key to leave the C I N E mode and return to normal fluoroscopy.
N O T E : a l l images are stored i n the un-subtracted image format and can be

reviewed i n the un-subtracted image format or by pressing the D S A key
w h e n the dynamic image loop is replayed to subtract the image for display
on the left monitor.
DISPLAY MESSAGES FOR CINE OPERATION
LOOP
UNSTORED:
This message i n the left lower comer of the monitor display reminds the
operator that present image loop being replayed has not been stored.
The display message L O O P U N S T O R E D w i l l change to the protected r u n

number o n the dynamic digital disk w h e n the C I N E S T O R E key is pressed.
See F i g . 4
F/R4:
message informs the operator what frame rate has been selected for
acquisition and play back.
T o change the frame rate, press the frame rate key before y o u start an
acquisition or w h e n a captured image loop is replaying. The message is
located i n the upper right comer of the monitor display. See F i g . 4

AVAILABLE:
This display message informs the operator the number of images remaining
that can be stored. The available number of images that can be stored w i l l
decrease as the number of stored images increases and w h e n there is less
than 50 images left the system w i l l w a r n the operator that he cannot start
another dynamic image acquisition until space is available. This can
be accomplished by deleting image runs from another patient file or from
the same patient.
To exit the cine function y o u must press the C I N E key again or press the
ESC key.
CINE FEATURES
I M A G E STEP
D u r i n g Cine replay the image play back can be stopped and reviewed one
image at a time and stored to the patient file for documentation later.
FWD
Presses the Image F W D or R E V key to stop the dynamic image playback.
The F / R message i n the upper right corner of the monitor w i l l now display
IMAGE
the message F / R O F F . This means the image loop has stopped and the
operator can press the F W D (forward) key or the R E V (reverse) key to
step image by image through the dynamic image loop. If the operator holds
either key d o w n , the system w i l l step the images at a rate near the selected
REV frame rate speed.
While i n the step function the operator can store any image from the run
into the patients file by pressing the I M A G E S T O R E key located i n the
lower m i d d l e of the control keyboard. The system w i l l display on the
monitor i n the lower center of the image area the following message,
S T O R E T O #000. This is displayed w h e n the images from dynamic cine
image loop are stored from the C I N E step mode to the patient file.
See F I G . 4
CINE STORE
C I N E S T O R E key protects the cine r u n acquired to the dynamic digital

disk.
CINE
STORE Pressing the C I N E S T O R E key protects the last cine r u n acquired on the
dynamic digital disk to one (1) of the 5 runs allowed for the present active
patient.
Each r u n protected may contain the m a x i m u m available images at the

time the cine r u n was acquired.
CINE RECALL
C I N E R E C A L L selects cine runs to review. C I N E R E C A L L key is located

i n the lower middle portion of the monitor control keyboard.
CINE
RECALL
Press C I N E R E C A L L key to display a list of the image loops w i t h
numbers from 1 to 5.

International Medical System preliminary Description of Operation
Press the corresponding number of the ran to view the present patient
cine r u n . The r u n w i l l start immediately when the selected.
Images are stored i n a raw image format w i t h out subtraction.

Therefore the cine r u n can be v i e w e d w i t h or without subtracted mask.
T o v i e w the cine r u n selected i n a subtracted mode press the D S A key

w h i l e the cine loop is running. This w i l l automatically select the second
image i n the r u n as the mask and then continue to playback the cine r u n i n
the subtracted mode.
T o display the cine r u n playback without subtraction press the D S A key

and the cine r u n w i l l continue without the subtraction of the mask i n
the image.
CINE EDIT
C I N E EDIT selects cine runs to delete from the present patient file.
Pressing C I N E E D I T key displays a list of the image loops w i t h numbers

from 1 to 5.
Press the corresponding number of the r u n to be remove from the patient

cine image directory.
NOTE: Once the operator selects and confirms the image loop to
delete, the image loop cannot be retrieved.

International Medical System Rev. 1 - 20
Figure 4
SHIFT M A S K " M A S K R E G I S T R A T I O N '
In the case of patient movement d u r i n g a subtracted procedure the SHIFT

M A S K can be used to realign the mask.
SHIFT
MASK
Press the SHIFT M A S K key. Manipulate the arrow keys to realign the
mask. Then press the F R A M E R A T E to continue the dynamic replay of the
procedure as if uninterrupted.
Pressing one of the arrow keys once w i l l move the mask 1/4 pixel i n the
direction of the arrow key pressed.
Pressing and h o l d i n g the shift key a n d the arrow key w i l l result i n a 1 pixel
movement.
Pressing and h o l d i n g the arrow keys w i l l repeat the movement each after
mask image is moved i n relation to the image loop.

14.17.16 R E S E R V E D F O R F U T U R E U S E
14.18 "REVIEW" AREA OF THE CONTROL KEYBOARD
14.18.1 IMAGE FWD/REV
The I M A G E F W D / R E V keys provide the operator w i t h several o p t i o n

for use. The f o l l o w i n g describe the operation of these keys i n relation to all
potential uses.
FWD
1) . Cine operation for reviewing forward or reverse by one single image

out of a dynamic image loop. See Section 14.17.11 for more details.
IMAGE
2) W h e n the operator has not selected image page, patient file, or cine the
F W D or R E V key allows operator to v i e w images from the current
patient record one at a time. The image number increments one higher
REV for each press of the F W D or R E V key.
The images are displayed o n the right reference monitor. B y h o l d i n g the

F W D or R E V key d o w n the system w i l l recall images from the digital disk
at a rate of approximately 1.5 frames per second or faster depending on
system options.
3) Image recall w i t h I M A G E P A G E D I S P L A Y o n . In this function the

F W D or R E V key is used to move the selection box w i t h i n the 16 image
page displayed o n the right reference monitor for selection of a particular
image.
5) Image recall w i t h P A T I E N T F I L E displayed on the right monitor. In

this mode the F W D or / R E V key recalls images f r o m the digital disk i n a
1/16 image file size display area. By h o l d i n g the F W D or R E V key d o w n
images can be recalled at 1 to 7 frames per second depending on system
options
6) W h e n the 4 on 1 mode is selected and the patient file closed and no

other mode is active the F W D / R E V keys are used to move the selection box
around i n the 16 image page display to select the images for inclusion i n
the 4 o n 1 image display o n the left monitor.
14.18.2 IMAGE PAGE
The key is located i n the m i d d l e of the keyboard and w h e n selected the

s m a l l light i n the comer w i l l be lit to identify that the I M A G E P A G E
IMAGE
d i s p l a y is active.
PAGE
The I M A G E P A G E display provides the user w i t h a quick and easy way to
find images from the digital disk for hard copying and processing.

The right monitor w i l l display 16 images w i t h the corresponding image
number i n the left upper comer for easy identification.
U s i n g the U p / D o w n and R i g h t / L e f t arrow keys a n d / o r the F W D / R E V

image keys the operator can scan through the images and w h e n the
selection box goes off the page toward a higher or lower image number,
the next set of images displayed w i l l be the next higher or lower number
w i t h 16 new images on the screen, i.e. if the operator moves d o w n the
screen and the last highest number was 16 the next image page w i l l start at
17 and go to 32. See Fig 5 for example of image page display.
The image page display w i l l be automatically selected if the operator is

not i n the patient file function w h e n 4 on 1 is selected to allow quick and
easy access to images for inclusion i n the 4 on 1 image display on the left
monitor.
Exit Image Page Display:
To exit or leave image page display press the I M A G E P A G E key once

again or press the ESC key. If y o u are i n the 4 on 1 function and y o u press
the I M A G E P A G E key to escape the system w i l l display a single image on
the right monitor and the operator then uses the F W D / R E V keys to recall
images for the 4 on 1.

IMAGE P A G E DISPLAY
16 I M A G E C O L L A G E P A G E
FIGURE 5
14.18.3 P A T F I L E ( P A T I E N T FILES)
The P A T F I L E key function provides the operator w i t h many choices i n

h a n d l i n g patient images. W h e n the operator selects the P A T F I L E the
system w i l l open the patient records for v i e w i n g and turn on the small
light i n the comer of the key to identifying the patient file as active.
Once the selected the operator can select another patient file to be active
process images, make hardcopy images, copy images to floppy disk if
system o p t i o n is available, a n d delete patient files.
The f o l l o w i n g features are p r o v i d e d i n the P A T F I L E activity m e n u at the

top of the right monitor w h e n the P A T FILE is selected
P A T I E N T S FILE
W h e n the operator first selects the P A T F I L E and a patient file was

being used other than the n o n specified patient, the system w i l l open
the patient file to the current active patient a n d place an activity box
around that patient information , i.e. patients name, I.D # date and time file
was created.

The Activity menu at the top of the screen is highlighted for
whatever function is active. See F i g 6.
To v i e w other patient files not on the screen press the U P or D O W N

A R R O W key browse the patient files forward or backward. The patient
files are organized according to date and time they were created not i n
alphabetical order. Therefore to v i e w the newest patient files press the
d o w n key to move forward i n the patient files.
IMAGES
The operator may view any images i n the patient file by pressing the image
F W D / R E V keys without selecting the patient file to the active. Just move
the activity box up or d o w n until the correct patient file y o u want to view
is i n the box and press the F W D / R E V keys to v i e w the images for that
patient.
ACCEPT
To accept a patient file for use the operator must use the R I G H T or L E F T
A R R O W key to highlight the Accept activity function at the top of the
monitor screen or make sure the activity box is around the patient y o u
w i s h to select then press the E N T E R key. The system w i l l accept that
patient as the current patient file for use.
N O T E : If y o u had selected I M A G E C R O P or W N D W / L E V E L then y o u

have to escape those functions to free the arrow keys to select another
patient file
DELETE
W h e n y o u need free image space on the digital disk use the U P / D O W N
A R R O W keys to place the activity box around the patient information y o u
w i s h to delete. Then use the R I G H T / L E F T arrow keys to highlight the
delete box on the activity menu and then press the E N T E R key. This
w i l l delete the complete patient file. The alert message w i l l ask for
confirmation if y o u really want to delete this patient file. If y o u press " Y , "
then the system w i l l delete the patients information.
WARNING: IF YOU DELETE A PATIENT FILE IT

CAN NOT BE RETRIEVED
COPY
The C O P Y function provides the operator w i t h the ability to make image

copies from the patient files to a floppy disk.
The image file format is a " B M P " D O S / W i n d o w s bit-mapped graphic file.

A n y program that w i l l display and allow manipulation of image files w i t h
the . B M P file extension w i l l be able to display and print the image files.
Example of some programs that support the . B M P file extension,

Photoshop, Corel draw, Wordperfect for W i n d o w s , Microsoft W o r d , etc..
A Laser printer w i t h at least 600 x 600 resolution and supports 256 gray
scale should be capable of printing the image file to h i g h quality paper.

To copy images to the floppy select the patient file and the image to copy
to the floppy then use the right/left arrow keys to select the copy box
from the activity menu o n the right monitor.
Next place an I B M pre-formatted 3.5" f l o p p y disk i n the floppy disk slot

directly under the front of the monitors and press the E N T E R key.
The system w i l l recall the image f r o m the d i g i t a l disk then reformat the
image to be compatible w i t h the . B M P file format a n d reduce the image
f r o m a 10 bit gray scale to an 8 bit gray scale. W h e n the system has
completed this it w i l l start to copy the image to the disk. The copy transfer
w i l l take approximately 30 sec to complete.
WARNING:
Do not remove the floppy while the image transfer is in
progress or the system will stop working and you must turn off
all power wait 20 sec then turn back on the power making sure
you remove the floppy disk from the system.
Never Insert a usedfloppyas this may cause damage to the

floppy drive and effect the reliability of the system.
Never install a floppy with any software as the system will

destroy the software on the floppy when it copies the image
files and may cause harm to the image system.
A n e w I B M pre-formatted floppy disk w i l l h o l d four images. The images

size is approximate 306 Kbytes.
Figure 6

International Medical System Preliininary Description of Operation Rev. 1-26
Exposcop 7000 IMS2760 Digital Section 4.0 (4.15 - 4.20) 04 /05 / 96
14.18.4 MONITOR L TO R (TRANSFER IMAGE LEFT TO RIGHT MONITOR)
The M O N L to R transfers the image f r o m the left monitor to the right or

reference monitor.
14.18.5 MONITOR R TO L (TRANSFER IMAGE RIGHT TO LEFT MONITOR)
The M O N R to L transfers the image from the left monitor to the right or
reference monitor.
14.18.6 CINE EDIT
This key function allows the operator to select and delete cine runs from
the present patient file. The operator presses the C I N E EDIT key a n d the
monitor displays a list of the image loops stored and a number next to
them. The operator then presses the corresponding number of the r u n
to be deleted from the dynamic disk drive.
NOTE: Once the operator selects and confirms the image loop to
delete the image loop can not be retrieved.
14.18.7 CINE RECALL
C I N E R E C A L L allows the operator to recall any of the five runs stored to

the present patient b y pressing the C I N E R E C A L L key then selecting the
CINE
image r u n number from the menu. The C I N E R E C A L L key is located i n
RECALL
the lower m i d d l e portion of the control keyboard.
14.18.8 INV VIDEO
Pressing the I N V V I D E O key w i l l interchange the dark a n d light areas i n

the video image, changing a " p o s i t i v e " video image to a "negative" one.
INV
VIDEO Inv Video is a post-processing function and can be used with
previously stored image retrieved from memory or it can be used with
"real time " fluoroscopy.
14.18.9 HARDCOPY
The H A R D C O P Y key is used to transfer images from the left process

O O n HARD monitor to film or paper printer.
1 2 ^ COPY
F i l m Documentation Camera
W h e n the f i l m cassette is present i n the f i l m documentation camera number

1 light w i l l be lit and w h e n the H A R D C O P Y key is pressed the center light
w i l l flash at a rate of about 1-2 times per second. W h e n the exposure is
completed the light w i l l go out. If y o u have ordered a two frame film
camera, the 2 second light w i l l stay on until the operator presses the
H A R D C O P Y key a second time to exposes the second f i l m . After the
number 2 light goes out all lights w i l l be off and y o u may remove the film
cassette after closing the shutter.
Large Paper Printer

W h e n y o u have a paper printer integrated into the monitor cart the
operator must press the SHIFT key and H A R D C O P Y key at the same
time to make sure the proper image is transferred to the paper printer.
The system w i l l trigger the paper printer and transfer the image to the
proper video output for the paper printer.
14.19 STORE
14.19.1 AUTOSTORE
A U T O S T O R E allows the operator to select four different modes of

operation.
1). A u t o Store
Automatically stores the images held on the screen of the left monitor to the
digital disk drive w h e n fluoroscopy footswitch or hand switch is released.
2) A u t o Transfer
Automatically transfers the image from the left monitor to the right monitor.
The last image on the left or process monitor w i l l be transferred to the reference
monitor or right monitor at the next initiation of fluoroscopy.
3) A u t o Both
In this mode, the system w i l l perform both the previous functions
simultaneously, storing and transferring the images automatically.
4) A u t o Store Off
This selection turns off the auto store functions.
Press the A U T O S T O R E key once for auto store, press again for the next function.
Pressing the key several times to toggle through the different function selections.
To exit or turn off the auto store functions just press the key until the
display is removed from the lower left side of the left monitor.
Warning: The Auto Store function will continuously store images every time the
operator releases the foot or handswitch . This may cause undo storage of
images. The system will only store up to the maximum limit of the image
space on the digital disk at the time the AUTO STORE was turned on,
therefore, the operator must make sure enough room is available to store
the expected images for exams. When limit is reached, a warning screen
message will be displayed at which time you must delete another patient
record to free image space to continue. SEE FIG. 7

The warning screen w i l l be displayed every time the user selects A U T O S T O R E or
attempts to S T O R E any image to the digital disk. Y o u must press the Enter key to
escape the warning screen
The operator must delete another patient record to store more images. Therefore
the following is a guide to deleting another patient record.
DELETING A PATIENT RECORD
1) Press the " P A T F I L E " key i n the lower m i d d l e of the monitor cart
control keyboard. This w i l l open the patient files.
2) Select a patient file to delete using the arrow keys. N o w select the
delete function f r o m the activity menu at the top of the right monitor.
WARNING: BE SURE YOU ARE DELETING THE CORRECT

PATIENT RECORD FILE, YOU CAN NOT RECOVER
DELETED PATIENT RECORDS OR IMAGES !!!!
3) N o w press E N T E R on the control keyboard and at the prompt, press

" Y " for yes. The system w i l l delete all images and patient information
for the selected patient file.
4) M a k e sure y o u have freed enough room on the digital disk to complete

the present exam. This m a y mean deleting more than one patient record
file.
5) Once y o u have deleted the necessary patient images, select the patient
file y o u were w o r k i n g w i t h a n d press the " E S C " key to continue the
fluoroscopy procedure.

14.19.2 CINE STORE
The operator can protect dynamic image acquisition on the dynamic digital
disk b y pressing the C I N E STORE key located i n the middle of the
keyboard next to the image store key w h e n i n the C I N E A C Q U I R E mode.
The system can store up to 5 runs per patient and each r u n can have u p to
the m a x i m u m images still available i n the system at the time the dynamic
image acquisition is started.
I M A G E STORE
The operator may store the images on the left or process monitor screen by
pressing the I M A G E STORE key located i n the lower m i d d l e right of the
control keyboard. Once the image is stored, it may be retrieved later for
image processing , i.e. Sharp, M a g W N D W , 4 on 1 etc.if the system is
equipped w i t h described features.
There are two image store keys for storing images: one is located as
previously mentioned on the monitor cart; the other is located on
the C - A r m mobile keyboard i n the lower right comer. Both
keys provide the same function.
Press the I M A G E STORE key d u r i n g live fluoroscopy to store images to

the digital disk drive without interrupting the fluoroscopic exam.
By h o l d i n g the I M A G E STORE key d o w n an image w i l l be stored at the

rate of 1 frame every 1.5 seconds, y o u can store two images i n three
seconds. The live fluoroscopy w i l l not be effected by the storing of images.
N O T E : this function is not operational w h e n C I N E acquisition is selected.
The left monitor screen w i l l display a small message " S T O R E " at the
bottom of the image area to alert the operator that the image is being
stored. This w i l l happen every time y o u store an image to the digital image
disk.
14.20 PROCESS
14.20.1 I M A G E C R O P (POST E L E C T R O N I C I M A G E C O L L I M A T I O N )
I M A G E C R O P is used to collimate the right/left and top/bottom sides of

the image to block out unwanted image areas for storing or transfer to the
f i l m documentation camera, or paper printer.
W h e n the I M A G E C R O P is selected the left monitor w i l l display small

message " I M A G E C R O P " and all other text is removed from the screen.
See F i g . 9 The electronic shutters w i l l be located just outside of the
image circle. To position the electronic shutters the operator w i l l use the
right/left arrow keys and the u p / d o w n arrow key.
Positioning Electronic Shutters

To close the electronic shutters vertically press the D O W N arrow key.

To open the electronic shutters vertically press the U P arrow key.
To close the electronic shutters horizontal press the R I G H T key.
To open the electronic shutters horizontal press the L E F T key.
Store Image Crop
Press the I M A G E S T O R E key to store the image cropped w i t h electronic shutters.
Transfer Image C r o p
Press transfer M O N L to R key to transfer the image to the right monitor
once the electronic shutters are positioned correctly b y i n the image.
Electronic Shutters
Once the Operator has m o v e d electronic shutters the next time the operator
selects I M A G E C R O P the electronic shutters w i l l default to the position
i n the previous i m a g e . If the operator turns off the system I M A G E C R O P
w i l l default to a position just outside of the image circle.

14.20.2 4 on 1 ( I M A G E MINIFICATION)
The 4 on 1 or rninify mode is vised to organize u p to four images onto

one monitor display. The minify mode helps to eliminate the need for a
4 ON 1 m u l t i - format camera to present four images o n the film.
W h e n pressed the left monitor screen is cleared. The 4 O N 1 message is

displayed i n the lower right comer of monitor display. The numbers
1,2,3/4 are positioned to correspond to the image locations.
Once the left monitor screen is updated the right monitor w i l l display i n
approximately 1 second, the 16 image page display w i t h the selection box
o n the first image.
Select the image from the image collage o n the right monitor using the
I M A G E F W D or R E V key or the U P / D O W N , R I G H T / L E F T arrow keys.
W h e n the correct image is selected by the activity box press the

M O N R I G H T to L E F T key to place the image i n the 1st field i n the upper
left comer and the 2nd is placed i n the upper right comer; the 3rd is
placed i n the lower left comer and the 4th is placed i n the lower right
comer.
The operator may recall any image from the present patient record. If
more than four images are transferred, the fifth image w i l l override
position 1 on the monitor, the sixth position 2, etc. See F i g . 10
III D O
O ODD
4 "O D D
mD D
Next Image To Transfer
And Minify Will Be Placed
At Position # 2 Etc
Exposcop 7000 LMS2760 Digital Section 4.0 (4.15 - 4.20) 04/05/96

14.20.3 WNDW/LEVEL (WINDOW/LEVEL)
Pressing the W N D W / L E V E L key changes the contrast of the video image

by changing the w i n d o w of gray scale. The Level function modifies the
WNDW brightness of the v i d e o b y changing the level of brightness w i t h i n the
w i n d o w of gray scale.
Press the W N D W / L E V E L key a n d the left monitor w i l l display a text

message " W " values a n d the " L " values i n relative numbers to the level set.
ADJUSTMENT OF " W N D W "

Pressing the R I G H T A R R O W key w i l l increase the numbers and decrease
the relative contrast scale i n the image ( M O R E B L A C K a n d W H I T E ) .
By pressing the L E F T A R R O W key the operator w i l l l o w e r the number
thereby increasing the relative contrast scale i n the image ( M O R E
S H A D E S of G R A Y ) .
ADJUSTMENT OF "LEVEL"
Pressing the U P A R R O W key w i l l increase the numbers and increase
the relative brightness o f the image ( B R I G H T E R I M A G E ) .
By pressing the D O W N A R R O W key w i l l lower the number thereby
decreasing the relative brightness of the image ( D A R K E R I M A G E ) .
WNDW and LEVEL are post-processing functions and can be used to

USING THE W I N D O W / L E V E L FUNCTION

Select a n image to be w i n d o w e d and leveled, transfer it to the left monitor
then press the W N D W / L E V E L key. The W N D W / L E V E L function w i l l
automatically adjust the image to a normalized image contrast a n d
brightness level for y o u , however if this value is not to the operators liking
the operator need only use the arrow keys to adjust the image to the
desired levels.
A t this point the operator m a y store the image to the digital d i s k or

transfer the image to the right monitor or make a hardcopy of the
image b y pressing the hardcopy key if f i l m camera is available or the shift
h a r d c o p y key for paper printer if available.
The operator b y pressing the W N D W / L E V E L key again w i l l return the

image back to it's original image contrast and brightness levels.
Press the " E S C " key or just press the W N D W / L E V E L key second time.
14.20.4 MAG WNDW (IMAGE MAGNIFICATION)
The M A G W N D W key w i l l magnify the image b y a factor of 2 or 4 times.

The system w i l l display the original image o n the process or left monitor
MAG and the magnified image o n the right monitor.
WNDW
USING THE M A G W N D W MODE
Select a n image from the P A T FILE, I M A G E P A G E , or use the I M A G E
F W D / R E V keys to recall a n image to the right monitor. Transfer the
Exposcop 7000 LMS2760 Digital Section 4.0 (4.15 - 4.20) 04 /05 / 96

image to the left monitor using the M O N R to L key. N o w press the M A G
W N D W key the system w i l l remove the text display from the left monitor
and display a w i n d o w the size of the magnified image area on the right
monitor. The right monitor then displays the image magnified by 2 times.
The w i n d o w displayed on the left monitor is moved by pressing the

U P / D O W N or the R I G H T L E F T keys. W h e n the w i n d o w is m o v e d the
image on the right monitor w i l l pan and scroll.
To increase the magnification to 4 times press the M A G W N D W key again

the w i n d o w on the left monitor w i l l be smaller representing the area on
the right monitor. Pressing the M A G W N D W key a third time w i l l turn off
the mag W N D W function and return the image on the right monitor back
to normal size w i t h text display. The right monitor w i l l continue to display
the previous magnified image at the time y o u exit the M A G W N D W mode.
ENTERING M A G W N D W FORM ANOTHER FUNCTION

W h e n using the M A G W N D W function from I M A G E P A G E , or P A T
FILE the system w i l l enter the mag mode and leave the other modes.
STORE M A G W N D W
Magnified images can be stored to the digital disk or hard copied to the
paper printer or the f i l m documentation camera.
14.20.5 SHIFT M A S K " M A S K R E G I S T R A T I O N "
In the case of patient movement during a subtracted procedure the

SHIFT M A S K can be used to realign the mask. Press the SHIFT M A S K key.
SHIFT
Manipulate the arrow keys to realign the mask. Then press the F R A M E
MASK
R A T E to continue the dynamic replay of the procedure as if uninterrupted.
Pressing one of the arrow keys once w i l l move the mask 1/4 pixel i n the
direction of the arrow key pressed. Pressing and h o l d i n g the shift key and
the arrow key w i l l result i n a 1 pixel movement.
14.20.6 ARROW KEYS
The A R R O W K E Y S are located at the lower right comer of the monitor

control keyboard. They have many functions depending on the mode or
function that is active at the time. The f o l l o w i n g description outlines
some of functions they perform.
IMAGE P A G E DISPLAY
M o v e s the image selection box up,down,right and left
P A T FILE
Selects the function box at the top of the right monitor screen for function
operations. M o v e s the selection box up and d o w n i n the patient file for
v i e w i n g of patient images.
MAG WNDW
Pans and scrolls the magnification w i n d o w on the left monitor.
Exposcop 7000 LMS2760 Digital Section 4.0 (4.15 - 4.20)

International Medical System Fteliminary Description of Operation
IMAGE CROP
Closes and opens the electronic collimation shutters
WNDW/LEVEL
Increases and decreases the w i n d o w and level values.
TEXT INSERT
Placement of text and arrow i n the image circle.
4onl
W i t h image page display o n the arrow keys move the image selection box
on the right monitor
W i t h patient file the right a n d left arrow keys select the function box at the
top of the monitor screen.
14.20.7 SHARP
S H A R P key increases the edge sharpens of anatomical structures.

Selection of two discrete levels is permitted.
SHARP
Selection of this function i s made on the lower left side of the monitor cart
keyboard and has t w o settings 1 = 20%, 2= 35% enhancement to the
image. (The values can be changed by the service engineer if needed)
Press the sharp key a n d w a i t approximately 2 seconds for the results. If

more edge detail is required press the S H A R P key again and wait a few
moments for the results. If y o u w i s h to return to the original image just
press the S H A R P key again and the sharp enhancement w i l l be removed
f r o m the image or press the E S C key to exit this function.
The operator can store, transfer, or hardcopy the image at any time
after the image has been enhanced.
The S H A R P enhancement key can only be used if fluoroscopy is not

active. The monitor w i l l d i s p l a y a message i n the lower right comer of the
left or process monitor w h e n S H A R P is on.
SHARP enhancement is a post-processing function and can not

be used to enhance a live fluoroscopic image.
14.20.8 ESCAPE
The E S C A P E key allows the operator to exit most functions of the system.
Exposcop 7000 LMS2760 Digital Section 4.0 (4.15 - 4.20) 04/05/96

M a S o d Smem
SECTION # 5
DHHS
ADJUSTING INSTRUCTIONS
RECORDING OF DATA
IMS2000
Service Manual
ntrr
EMS
l uirinnal j j a j j j j t Systems. Inc.
SECTION # 5
DHHS
ADJUSTING INSTRUCTIONS
RECORDING OF DATA
EXPOSCOP PLUS
DHHS Adjustment Instruction with Recording of Data
Important note
The tests and adjustments described in these instructions are to be performed upon completion
of the tasks outlined in the installation instruction.
Only trained, qualified personnel are to perform the following test and adjustments.
Necessary means ofmeasuring.
Schroff Card Test Adapter 20-800-179

Digital multimeter ( D V M ) e.g. Fluke 8040 A or Fluke 87
Dosimeter Kit
Light/Beam Alignment Device 40-402-T10
Alignment Stand 40-401-T10
Beam Center Target 40-400-T10
Storage oscilloscope
Fluorescent-Cross 44-14-538 RH090
Vinyl Lead Sheets- 3mm Lead Blocker
Customer: Address: Location/Room N o .
Technician: Date: Serial #
After completing the adjustment
I hereby confirm that all the work listed in these adjusting instructions has been properly
carried out and the tolerances quoted have been maintained. Return copy o f this page to
I.M.S. to start warranty support.
Date: Signature:
ElpOBOpPlut
DHHS Immxxkxu 1077*3
IaumfttiooBl Mrdicwl Syacnu Rev. 3-1

Table of Contents
L Safety information
2. Notes on the adjustment instruction
3. Necessary documents for the customer
4. Radiation protection
5. Checking the D H H S and identification labels
6. Checking the blocks and displays
7. Checking the kV values
8. Checking the tube current display readings
9. Reproducibility
10. Beam quality test procedure
11. Checking the exposure times
12. Checking the maximum dose rate during fluoroscopy
13. Checking the central ray
14. Checking collimation
15. Checking the smallest field size
16. Mechanical test
17. Installation certification
Exposcop Plus DHHS Instructions

lattmaiiaoal Medial Systems
1.0 Safety information
1.1. Ground safety
Before setting to work, all the earth lead connections provided by the
manufacturer must be properly made. F o r example, all metal panelling which,
in case of fault, may expose the user to dangerous voltages, must be provided a
ground path. T o accomplish this, connection of these panels to an ground lead
must either be by means of screws with flat washers or by means of the ground
lead connections provided.
After the work is completed, the ground lead connections are to be checked with
the digital multimeter test instrument. Measure from earth ground point to
each outside cover to confirm positive grounding.
1.2 Personal safety precautions
A l l applicable regulations pertaining to safety and accident prevention must be

complied with during the following procedure. These include principally the
occupational safety laws and state codes in effect at installation site. The
following notes are simply to be regarded as additional information.
Working on energized equipment- It is not permitted to carry out work on pan

connected to voltage (>30 V). In these activities, special care is necessary. Only
those tools and measuring means may be used which are suitable for this work.
Bodyprotectionfromradiation • The use of body protection is imperative (see

the appropriate safety work protection regulations).
Radiation protection • If during the set up and adjustment work of the

radiographic unit it is necessary to work with the radiation switched on, then the
safety information on radiation protection must be observed without fail.
1.3 Mandatory reporting
The engineering supervisor in charge must be notified at once if there has been
an accident or if there are any hazards which may cause an accident.
Exposes? Plus
DHHS Instructions 1077/93
Iateraauonsl Medical Systems Rev. 3-3

2.0 Notes on the adjustment instruction
Compliance with the applicable sections of the Federal Performance Standards is

assured when all procedures described herein are properly completed.
The sequence of procedures stated must be adhered to.
- Important -
The movements of the unit required for these procedures must be carried out with care
to prevent the unit from being damaged in case of a malfunction.
Ensure that the C - A r m is raised to an adequate elevation to allow free rotation of the
" C " without interference from " C " arm base or floor; verify motion and controls lock
set positions.
The measured values required to determine compliance must be documented upon

completion of the applicable check/adjustment.
Warning.
Checks or adjustments which require exposure are marked with the rad
symbol ?fe .
When adjustments marked in this manner are accomplished, radiation protection

guidelines set forth in the applicable federal, state and local codes/regulations must be
adhered to at aU times.
3.0 Necessary documents for the customer
Verify that the following documents for the unit are provided to user upon installation.
Document Available
Operating instruction _yes _ no
Maintenance instruction yes no
DHHSlcasrnaions 1<V27*3
: latcnutiooal Medical Syacni Rev . 3-4
4.0 Radiation protection
Make sure that there is no mechanical fault on the image intensifier which could impair
the radiation protection, such as broken or missing S t a g s
Image intensifier has been checked for yes no

mechanical faults.
Defect present (brief description):
5.0 Checking the DHHS and IdentiScation Labels
Confu-m that the certification labels, serial number and model number labels are legible.
(Fig. l a n d la) shows the location of the labels. If labels are required, contact the I. M . S .
National Service Department.
Certified component Model N o . Serial N o Date
4 X-Ray Control
5 Image Intensifier
Assembly
6 X-Ray Generator
Certified component Warning labels
1 Cassette holder Present and legible Yes
2 Spacer Cone Present and legible Yes
3 Operator Safety Present and legible Yes
7 Present and legible Yes

Radiation Symbol ^
Exposcop Plus DHHS Instructions 1077*3

Rev. 3-5
latemuiooti Medial Systems
Location of the DHHS and Identification Labels
Exposcop Plus DHHS Tnwnwt ions 1&27/93

Rev 3-6
lmiriHi innil Medical Systems
5.2 DHHS Identification labels
WARNING
WARNING
REMOVAL OF THE CONE IS AGAINST THE

D O N O T U S E C A S S E T T E LESS T H A N RULES & REGULATIONS. SUBCHAPTER 21
24X24 C M IN CONJUNCTION WITH SECTION 1020.32. REMOVE ONLY FOR SPECIAL
23CM I M A G E INTENSIFIER SURGICAL PROCEDURES
WARNING
IMS
THIS X - R A Y U N I T M A Y B E D A N G E R O U S T O
PATIENT A N D OPERATOR UNLESS SAFE
EXPOSURE FACTORS A N D OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS A R E O B S E R V E D EXPOSCOP PLUS
M O D E L N O . EP38-D SER. N O .
DANGER
EXPLOSION H A Z A R D ! MANUFACTURE: INTERNATIONAL MEDICAL SYSTEMS. INC
DO NOT U S E IN T H E P R E S E N C E O F 4181 LATHAM ST RIVERSIDE. CA 92501 U S A.
F L A M M A B L E ANESTHETICS. DATE: MONTH:. YEAR:
IMS IMS
I M A G E INTENSIFIER
23/17cm TH9429 X-RAY GENERATOR

COMPLIES WHTH DHHS RADIATION PERFORMANCE
MODEL NO. SER. NO.
STANDARDS, 21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J. EP38-D
MAX K V P MOKV
TOTAL FILTRATION: imm A L
FOCAL SPOT 0.6 / U n i t
TUBE HOUSING: MAXPLUS- V I 1 0
TUIE TYPE E r - F . I I I - 0 6 / 1.5 • 1 2 5 * )
TUBE NO : 9 i : / (SERIAL tj
BECcrnuTiON NO- •YZf?*4*0
COMPLIES WITH DHHS RADIATION PERFORMANCE

STANDARDS. 21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J
MANUFACTURE: INTERNATIONAL MEDICAL SYSTEMS. INC
4111 L A T H A M ST. RIVERSIDE. C A 92301 U S A
DATE. MONTH: YEAR:
Fig. la
1017«3
Exposcop Plw DHHS Instruction.
Rev. 3-7
InSTMlioosU Medical Systems
6.0 Checking the blocks and displays
6.1 rharlring the "rtparimnn" fimctinn
6.1.1 Radiography
Jfc Set exposure time to 4 sec. and kV to 36 k V at the control console of the
C-Arm. Activate exposure with exposure handswitch and end it
immediately by releasing the knob. Verify exposure ends with the release
of the handswitch.
6.1.2 Fluoroscopy
3fc Carry out fluoroscopy for a short time and release the fluoroscopy
handswitch. Verify fluoroscopy ends with release of the handswitch.
Repeat this procedure using the fluoroscopy switch.
Deadman's Switch Accept Reject
6.2 Radiation indicators
• Verify that the radiation control indicator on the C - A r m control console

illuminates during radiography exposure activation. Verify that when
fluoroscopy is activated, the radiation control indicator on the C - A r m control
console and the radiation indicator light on the monitor cart illuminates.
[I Radiation
Radi indicators in order yes no
6.3 Fluoroscopytime(see 21 CFR1020.31 (a))

1. Ensure that in the following tests there is no radiation danger for persons
present.
2. Set the manual fluoroscopy voltage to 36 k V value. Close the Iris
diaphragm and cover the tube assembly with lead apron.
3. Switch on fluoroscopy.
4. Verify when total fluoroscopy time of 5.0 minutes has elapsed. The
audible alarm sounds.
5. Reset the alarm by momentarily (< 1 sec) pressing "clear radiation time/
clear audio alarm" button on control console. (Section 11.6 of User's
Manual).
Exposcop Plus DHHS Instruct ioot 1027^3
latcnatiooal Medical Systems Rev. 3-8

NOTE: Holding this button formore than one second should set theflu
timer counter to zero.
1 Fluoroscopy time in order yes no
6.4 Indication of tube potential and current
• Confirm that tube potential and current are continuously indicated during
fluoroscopy by observing the 7 segment display on the C - A r m control.
1 Indication in order yes no
7.0 Checking the kV values
Preparation
Power .Down-Remove tube head cover. Connect storage oscilloscope to " T P O V " and
T P f' on U 5 4 board (see Fig. 2), 2 0 V D C scale. Comply with radiation protection.
Fig.
1077^3
Exposcop Plus DHHS Instruction*
TiiiiiiuinMl Mulii tJ "JHUIIII Rev. 3-9
NOTE: Scaling is 1 V=10kV
Jfc Power Up System - Select kV manual, set timer to .4 sec and 40 kV. Press handswitch
and make exposure.
Note k V value displayed on storage oscilloscope.
# Select 110 k V and .4 sec. Press handswitch and make exposure.
Note k V value displayed on storage oscilloscope.
NOTE: Rejection limit of> 10%forkV.
If kV values are greater than > 10%, correction can be achieved by adjustment of PI
potentiometer on board U64 of C-Arm control. Select 75 kVp, make an exposure and
adjust PI until your kV value displayed on the storage oscilloscope is 7.5V. Then re-
check 40 k V and 110 k V stations.
K V l l O k V selected =
8.0 Checking Tube Current Display Readings
Power Down - Remove tube head cover. Remove m A bridge (see Fig. 2), insen
multimeter in place of jumper. (0-20 m A scale).
^ Power Up - Comply with radiation protection. Initiate fluoro radiation. Read tube
current on multimeter.
Reference values. with Default 3 m A setting

m A Range
.2 m A at 38kV
3.0 m A at 110 kV maTiTnirm
with 6 m A station selected
110 kV = 4.6 - 6.0 m A TTtaxhnum

(Depending max dose setting)
NOTE: If display value does not match multimeter value, adjust R3

board or PI and P2 on U92 board> 10% erroradjustment PI fo
setting, P2 for 6 mA setting.
D H H S Intmctioni 1Q77.S3
EipowoePlui
IattRuuiosaJ Medical Sycemi Rev. 3 10
kV 3 mA Selected m A max 6 mA
38 kV
110 kV
8.1 Checking Radiographic Tube Current
8.1.1 With m A meter installed as stated in Section 8.0, select radiography.
8.1.2 Select 75 kVp and 3 sec exposure time.
8.1.3 Block input to Image Intensifier with 3 mm lead blocker.
8.1.4 Activate exposure handswitch to initiate exposure and read m A value

displayed o n multimeter.
8.1.5 Release handswitch at end of exposure.
8.1.6 Note m A value and place in Table 1.
NOTE: Value ofmA must be within > 10% of fixed 20 mA radiogr

value.
Table 1
Radiography m A . Reject >10%
NOTE: IfmA value obtained at mA ist measure point exceeds

limits, readjustment ofP2located on Board U143 of C-Arm contr
be accomplished to comply with reject limits.
9.0 Reproducibility
Regulation
It must be ascertained that the radiography unit is operating on a power supply which
agrees with specifications for the Exposcop C - A r m 110 vac +/-10% - 60 H z 20 A .
CoctBdent of variation
For any specific combination of selected technique factors, the estimated coefficient of
variation of radiation exposure dose shall be no greater than 0.045.
DHHS Ipstruaioni
Exaeecop Pun 1077/93
Rev. 3-11
IntannttnmJ Medical Syaemg
A l l variable controls for technique factors shall be adjusted to alternate settings
and reset to the test setting after each measurement. A l l values for percent line
voltage regulation shall be within ± 1 of the mean value for all measurements.
[See 32 C F R 1020.3 l(b)(c)].
General remark
The following test makes a series of four exposures per selected technique factor and
must be performed in a period of one hour. Care must be taken that the tube loading
data is not exceeded. (See Tube Charts).
9.1 Measuring set-up
Instrument: dosimeter
Place the dosimeter probe in the center of the central ray path 70 cm from focal spot.
(See Fig. 3).
Fig. 3
ExpoeeepPlu*
DHHS Iottracuoni 1077^3
laternauaoml Medical Sytwm Rev. 3-12

9.2 Method
9.2.1 Timer operation mode.
Jfc Cover the intensifier input with 3 mm lead blocker. Take 4 exposures each
using the following radiographic data-
Measure the dose for each exposure.
Before each new dose measurement, make sure that the dose meter indicator is
reset to zero. T o find average value "x", see Section 9.3 (1).
Take care that
a) the measurements are made one after the other;

b) the measurements are made within one hour;
c) the exposure technique is changed after each measurement and reset to
test settings.
Dosimeter N o .
9.2.2 In addition to the measured values, the model and serial number a n d
calibration date of the measuring instruments are to be noted.
Manufacturer Model Number Serial Number
Last Calibration Date: Chamber Serial |

Number
Exposcop Plus
DHHS Ioftnniom 1&7733
li—niliimil Medical Systcmi Rev. 3-13
9.3 Calculations
Variation coefficient C
For n individual measurements, the variation coefficient C amounts to:
s = calculated standard deviation

x = average value of all individual measurements
x - measured value of the i tfc
measurement
n = number of individual measurements
A = Difference
A 2
= Difference squared
1. T o obtain the average x, the 4 dose values are added and the sum
divided by 4. xl + x2 ... = x
n
To obtain the difference, each individual measured value is subtracted

from the average. Enter value in column provided.
x - x = A Difference
i
NOTE: In differencing, negative numbers may be obtained. Howev

can be ignored since, in any case, it changes on squaring.
3. To obtain the difference squared, the difference is multiplied by itself.

Enter value in column provided.
(x, - x) = A 2 2
Radiation Exposure (x. ) Average(x) = Differences Difference Squared A"
1 •
2 M
3 m
4 m
Add the four difference squared results together and divide the results by
3. Enter results below.
1 = 3 =
DHHSIwtnnioiki 1077/93
Expoacop Plus
Rev . 3-14
latematiooml Medical Sysems
5. Obtain the square root of the new results and divide by the average value
determined in Step 1.
S =
Variation coefficient C = _s_ =

x
C =
A < 0.045 Accept Reject
9.4 Adjusting
If the calculated value of the variation coefficient is greater than 0.045, the
reason for the non-agreement is to be determined and corrective measures taken.
10.0 a»-«m Quality Test Procedure [See 21 C F R 1020.30 (m)] Half-y_alue Layer
10.1 Check calibration of mA, kV, mAs before starting measurement.
10.2 Select radiography at 110 kVp and 30 mAs. (Time set 1.5 sec).
10.3 Collimate the beam to just cover the sensitive volume of the dose probe.
Note: You must minimize the source ofscatter radiation by collima

size only large enough to include the sensitive volume of the d
10.4 Place dose probe chamber in the center of the beam at fixed distance. 70 o n
from focal spot. Block input to image intensifier with 3 mm lead blocker (See
Fig. 4).
Expoacop Plu* DHHSIactnmioae

bumatiaoal Medical Syaeau Rev. 3-15
3fc 10.5 Initiate exposure at selected 110 kVp, 30 mAs.
Determine the exposure rate R/min (Roentgens per minute) without any
additional filtration of the beam (other than that which may already be present);
i.e., inherent tube filtration, filter cap on tube head cover. Tabulate this
exposure rate under Initial Beam - Table 1. (Omm Aluminumfiltrationadded
to beam).
10.5.1 Filter material must be placed between x-ray tube and dose probe with
filter as close to source as practical; e.g. on tube head cover. (See Fig. 4)
10.6 Repeat the procedure after mcrementing filter value. Tabulate this exposure rate
under first filter position and note filter thickness.
10.7 Repeat the procedure of dose measurement after each additional increment in
aluminum filter material added to primary beam. Tabulate the dose readings
corresponding to the filter thickness in Table 1.
Exposcop Plus
DHHS Instructions 1077/93
IntcnsoioBsJ Medical Systems Rev. 3-16
10.8 Plot the data graphically with rate in R/min as the dependent variable and the
thickness of added filter as the independent variable, as in Graph 1 attached.
10.9 Locate the exposure rate corresponding to one-half the initial value on the
vertical axis. Draw a horizontal line from this point to the curve and then a
vertical line from the point of intersection on the curve to the horizontal axis
where the vertical line locates the thickness responsible for halving of the initial
exposure rate. This halving thickness is the beam quality value or half value
layer.
10.10 The H . V . L . of the useful beam for the given x-ray tube potential shall not be less
than 3.0 mm at 110 kVp. If half value layer is lower than 3.0 mm, it must be
determined why half value layer is low and corrected.
Rejection Limit < 3.0 mm A L H . V . L .

Table 1
Added Aluminum Filtration Exposure Data
Table 1 ( E X A M P L E )
Added Aluminum Filtration Exposure Rate
mm R/min
0 .600
1.0 .450
1.5 .400
2.0 .355
2.5 .325
3.0 .300
4.0 .275
Half Value Radiation - 300 mRAnin

Results of Graph #1 = 3.0mm A L
Fipi t *r Plus
t Fi#
DHHS iDstnsstioos 1077/93
latomatiociaJ Medical Systems Rev. 3-17
Example o f G r a p h 1
Unrt# Chassis # Generator #

Tube Type: Nagle Insert*
Technique: 100KV@30mAs. Set probe 70 cmfromfocal spot

AL (mm) = mR
o « eoo
1.0 - 450
1.6 « 400
2.0 « 955
a5 - 825
a.0 « 300
4.0 «= 275
975mR
950mR
^mR
900mR
875mR
850mR
825mR
SOOmR
775m R
7S0mR
72SmR
700m R
675m R
650mR
625mR
SOOmR
575mR
SSOmR
S25mR -s
SOOmR v
476mR •
450mR \ s
42SmR
400mR
375mR
SSOmR
325mR
SOOmR
27SmR
2S0mR
2SSmR
200mR
0 mm 1.0 mm 20 mm 3.0 mm 40 mm 1?
Hart value raciaton: SOOmR HVL: SO mm 1
Prepared by: Date:
Ptui DmSIaMmauooi 1077*3

Graph 1
Unit* Chassis # Generator #

Tube Type: Nagle insert #
Technique: 1COKV@30rnAs. Set probe 70 cmfromfocal spot

AL (mm) « mR
0
1.0
1.5
20
25
§0
4.0
960mR
925mR
SOOmR
875mR
SSOmR
82SmR
SOOmR
775mR
750mR
725mR
TOOmR
675mR
SSOmR
625mR
SOOmR
575mR
SSOmR
S2SmR
SOOmR
475mR
460mR
42SmR
400mR
376mR
SSOmR
32SmR
SOOmR
275mR
2&UmR
226mR
200mR
0 mm 1.0 mm 20 mm ao mm 40 m 5Q
Hatf value radiation: SOOmR HVL: 3.0 mm

Prepared by: Date:
.Plus DHHS Iterations 1027*3

lustnstinosl McdicsJ Systems ^
11.0 Checking the exposure times
11.1 Checking the exposure time set
Connect oscilloscope to: U54 Test Point.F ( l V / D i v - D C storage operation).

Set timer to 400 ms exposure time and 60 k V . (See Fig. 2).
Insert 3mm lead into beam path to block radiation to image intensifier.
Trigger exposure with handswitch.
Take reading of exposure time on oscilloscope at point of positive wave from
start and ending at negative going edge of wave from.
Exposure time measured: ms
If exposure time variation is greater than > 10%, the cause for non-agreement
has to be determined and correction measures undertaken.
12.0 Checking the maximum dose rate during fluoroscopy
Regulation
Fluoroscopic equipment which is provided with automatic exposure rate control shall
not be operable at any combination of tube potential and current which will result in
an exposure rate in excess of 10 roentgens per minute at the point where the center o f
the useful beam enters the patient. [See 21 C F R 1020.32(d)].
• Position the dosimeter probe as shown in F i g . 5 in the operating field. Select

fluoroscopy and 6.0 m A . Select full I.I. format, fully open the collimator, cover image
intensifier input with 3 mm lead blocker.
Initiate fluoroscopy with foot pedal. Note k V , mA reading on control. They must be
at iiiaximum setting 110 kVp, up to 6 mA. Measure the exposure rate value and enter
the value below.
EXBMBOpPtut DHHSIaftnaieat 1077*3
Imiwniinml Medical Synenu Rev. 3-20

Maximum Dot* R i t a
During Fluoreteepu
sourct
Fig. 5
Patient entrance dose rate Rimin
Rejection limit > 9.1RAnin.
Dosimeter N o Sr #
X-ray production controlled by hand or footswitch required

continuous pressure by the operator .... yes .... no
Expeaeop Rut DHHS Iactructiou 1077*3

Rev. 3-21
IfiMtirwil Medical Syttenu
13.0 Checking the central ray
NOTE: For carrying out further tests and adjustments, it is importan

image intensifier TV-chain is exactly adjusted.
Regulation
Means shall be available whereby the center of the radiation Meld in relation to the
radiation image receptor shall be centered to within a tolerance of less than 2% of the
SID. [See 21 CFR 1020.31 (e) (1)].
13.1 Position ofcentral ray in relation to the LI. input
The check is made at the TV-monitor, Determine the central point at the image
intensifier input by installing beam alignment target which is fixed with 4 screws
to image intensifier. Open the slot collimator, and open the iris diaphragm to
the full open position. The following checks are to be made in the C - A r m
positions shown. (See Fig. 6)
SxpCSKSOp PtllS DHHS Instructions 1077*3

IoUECuUtaesJ M e d i o ! Systems Rev. 3-22
Fig. 6
ExpeôpFI* DHHSb*n«i« 1077/93
ItJcmatioaai Medial Sy«u*M 3 - 2 3

13.1.1 Work sequence:
1. Select the full image intensifier input format (no zoom).

2. Adjust C - A r m (see Fig. 6, Basic Position).
• 3. Switch on the fluoroscopy. Close iris slightly to see edges on

monitor.
4. Carry out evaluation at the TV-monitor (see Fig. 7).
(use stored image, if there is an image store).
A - mid-point image intensifier input

B - middle of the radiation field
A = deviation of A to B
Monitor Install the beam alignment

*
Circle**^ r target to the I.I . This will
be used to view central
Iris • ^ point of I.I. on the Video
collimator Monitor.
edge
Fig. 7
5. Test result (see also Fig. 7)
Average deviation Maximum permissible* Average deviation actual
Basic setting = 5mm mm
C - A r m to the left — 18.0mm mm
C - A r m to the right = 18.0mm mm
* Note: The values given are relative to the TV monitor. At the

unit, full LI' format is selected.
6. In case of larger deviations, carry out adjustments in accordance

with Section 13.2.
F r P * T T Pbn DHHSIosunoion* 1077/93

laurauiaaai MedieaJ Sy*enn Rev. 3-24
13.2 Adjusting the central ray in relation to LI. input
Note: A djustment ofthe central longitudinal x-ray beam center shou

made in the basic position of the C-Arm. (See Fig. 6)
13.2.1 Alignment of X-ray central longitudinal axis
Place C-Arm system in position as shown in Fig. 8. Image Intensifier

above and x-ray tube head below.
Note: Make sure C-Arm is perpendicular to floor and is not r

right to left.
13.2.2 Place alignment device stand, Fig. 8(3), on top and center over filter
cover, Fig. 8(4).
13.2.3 Place light/beam alignment device, Fig. 8(2), on top of alignment device
stand, Fig. 8(3), with the 5 small lead balls at bottom of plastic cylinder.
(See Fig. 8.1).
• 13.2.4 Initiate fluoroscopy. After a few seconds, release handswitch (observing

all safety precautions for working in and around radiation). The image
on the T V monitor will display the beam alignment device.
Note the position of the center two lead balls. If the images of the two
lead balls are centered over one another, then you need to also look at the
4 outside lead balls on the screen. If all 4 lead balls are equally spaced on
the delineation marks, you are properly aligned with the x-ray longi-
tudinal radiation central beam axis (see Fig. 9).
13.2.5 Affix beam center target to Image Intensifier. Initiate fluoroscopy again
for a few seconds (observing all safety precautions for work in and
around radiation) then release handswitch.
Note the position of cross on T V monitor. It must be in the center over

the image of the beam alignment device (see Fig. 9,9a).
If cross does not intercept the center of the lead balls, you must adjust the
tube head to correct for a misahgnment of the central longitudinal axis
of the x-ray radiation.
P i p ^ f * T Plus DHHS Instructions 1077*3

tnsstusiirwsl MsstsssJ Systcsns Rev. 3-25
D H H S IaBmaioM 1077*3
ExpoteeePim
Rev. 3-26
l i a m m i i n l Medical *fyntmi
If the Central X-Rsy Longitudinal beam alignment
li Incorrect it ihovo move the Light/beam
device at aetded to achieve coincidence.
Small Lead Ball Is top ctntcr of the
dsvlce.
Larger shadow Is lover Lead Ball
and the center of the bottom of
the device.
Hale If all fnur outside lead b i l l s
are SJUUU distance from the center
vnu are neraendleulsr to the r t n . n l
1-P.av B t i n But vou sre net centered
with the c e n i r s l I - R a v u n t i l all four
o u n l d e lesd balls sre centerefl in i h r
delineation m i r t i and the Isrse anfl
s m i l l center shadow! t o l n r l f l e . See
f l i u r e 9s below for correct s l i i n m e n t
Figure 9
Figure 9a
Beam Center Target
Target Cross must be
centered with ihseov
of the large and small
lead bails
Four outside Lead
bails are centered to the
delineation marks and are
equal distance from the
center of the device.
Large and Small Shadow are

perfectly centered.
Video Monitor display shoving the X-Ray thadov of the Target device
and the shadow of the beam / light alignment device In perfect coincidence.
Figs. 9 and 9a
DHHS Instruct ions 107753

Fspnarop Plus
IiMiiiaiiiiisiHliiliiail "jithiiii Rev. 3-27
13.3 Tube head adjustment for longitudinal central x-ray beam
13.3.1 Remove tube head cover, Fig. 10(1).
13.3.2 Remove two 4mm Allen head screws (Item 3/Fig. 10), for filter bracket
assembly, (Item 2/Fig. 10).
Note: Place /liter assembly out ofthe way, being careful not to
filter assembly.
13.3.3 Unscrew the two 17mm nuts (Item 4/Fig. 10), and remove metal cover.
13.3.4 With screws (Items 6A and 6B/Fig. 10), central longitudinal adjustment
is accomplished (see Fig. 10a).
13.3.5 By loosening screw (Item 6A/Fig. 10a), adjust inclination to the top.
13.3.6 By loosening screw (Item 6B/Fig. 10a), the inclination to the bottom can
be adjusted.
13.3.7 By loosening 17mm nuts (Item 5/Fig. 10b), a horizontal side-to-side

adjustment can be accomplished.
13.3.8 Reinstall metal cover filter assembly and tighten all screws and nuts
firmly after adjustment.
13.3.9 After adjustment of tube head, reinstall tube head cover with light beam
device on tube head and recheck center of alignment device and central
longitudinal x-ray beam to the cross mark of the beam center target.
Once you have aligned the central longitudinal x-ray beam, alignment
device and beam center target as in Fig. 9, you are ready to check the
position of the central longitudinal x-ray beam in each of the other four
positions shown in Fig. 6 After all positions have been checked, remove
beam alignment target from image intensifier.
Exfwaeop Plus D H H S Instruction 10/27*3

Intamaiioml Medical System Rev. 3-2?
Mounting Plite Filter Colllmstor Mounting Plate
1. Tube Head cover
2. Filter aittmbty
3- Filter mounting tcrevt
4. Metal cover / 17mm nutt
5. Mounting bolts
6. 6mm Allen mounting and

Figure 10 adjustment tcrevt.
Alignment of X-Ray Central Longitudinal Beam Axis
(6B) (6B)
Tighten M o u n t l n
« p l t t e
Tighten
am-£*Jal
F i g u r e 1Oa
(6A)
Loosen
Allows i n c l i n a t i o n a d l u i i m t o t to tbe tube Beta.
Center movement side to side
(5) (5) Tube Head

Loosen Loosen
Mounting plate
o o
Figure 10b
A l l e v t l a b * bate edksstateai aide i * aids
Bapeat nt> Pius

DHHS Tnttmasan* 1077*3
]0hafssasiossal Medical Systems Rev. 3-29

Note: A greater accuracy ofadjustment can be attained by switchin
over to zoom operational mode. After adjustment of the ce
longitudinal x-ray beam center, carry out the check again in a
with Section 13.1.
14.0 Checking collimation
14.1 II. format
Regulation
During fluoroscopic operation, the x-ray field in the image indicator plate must
not exceed 3% of the SID in length or width of the visible image-indicator
surface. Tne sum of the lengths and widths access may not be greater than 4%
of the SID. 1020.32 (B)(2) (i).
Aid
Fluorescent-cross or fluorescent screen
Work sequence.
14.1.1 Set C-Arm to basic position (see Fig. 6).
14.1.2 Select the full I.I. input format.
14.1.3 Set the iris diaphragm to max. opening.
14.1.4 Switch on fluoroscopy. If all six leaves of the iris diaphragm are
still visible at the edge of the T V monitor image (Fig. 11), no.
further tests are necessary.
F i g . 11
Exposcop Plus D H H S Instruction 10Y27/93

T M n n i w l Medical Systems Rev. 3-30
14.1.5 Select zoom format (check as in Point 4).
Attention
If one or more sides in the monitor image and the multi-leaf

collimator leaves are not visible, carry out the following points.
14.1.6 Secure the light-cross or a fluorescent screen in the middle of the

LI. input.
14.1.7 Open the iris diaphragm to maximum
* 14.1.8 Switch on fluoroscopy. Move both measuring sliders on the light

cross in the longitudinal direction inward until they are just visible
at the monitor image edge. Switch off fluoroscopy. Mark the
position of the measuring sliders on the light-cross and repeat
Point 7 in the transverse direction. (In the case of a fluorescent
screen, mark the edges of radiation fields when marking device is
just visible at the monitor image edge.)
14.1.9 Switch on fluoroscopy once again and mark the dimensions of the
x-ray field on the light-cross. (In the case of a fluorescent screen,
mark the edge of the x-ray field.)
14.1.10 Measure the deviations A, B, C and D .
DA
X-ray field
F i e l d observed on monitor
B A
Fig. 12
DHHSIaatruoioes 1077*3
bmmmSmai Medio*! Syncm* Rev. 3-31
14.1.11 Calculate the length deviation L = A A + A C and the
width deviation W = AB + A D .
14.1.12 Calculate the sum of the length and width deviation A A + AB +

AC + ad.
14.1.13 Calculate the percentage deviation by multiplying the deviation

by 100 and dividing the result by the SID, 94 cm or 37".
// format
Length deviation cm % <2.4%
Width deviation _. cm % <2.4%
Length and width deviation cm % <3.2%
Zoom.
Length deviation cm % <2.4%
Width deviation cm % <2.4%
Leneth and width deviation cm % <3.2%
In case of deviations >3.2%, make adjustments in accordance with Section 14.2.
14.2 Adjusting the LI. format
14.2.1 Open the iris diaphragm fully.
14.2.2 Switch on fluoroscopy. (Observe radiation protection practice.)
14.2.3 The leaves of the iris diaphragm must be just visible at the edge of the
post-blanking circle displayed on the video monitor. (See Section 13.1,
Fig. 11). If this is not the case, adjustment must be performed on U 6 6
board. P6 will adjust size of iris control for zoom mode. P7 will adjust
size of iris control for normal mode.
14.2.4 Carry out the same procedure with zoom format. After successful
adjustment, repeat the check in accordance with Section 14.1.

iBiematioasJ Medical Systems Rev. 3-32
14.3 Cassette format
Regulation
The total deviation of the edges of the x-ray field from the corresponding edges
of the selected part of the image indicator may not exceed 3% of the SID in the
plane of the image indicator in either length or width of the x-ray field, if full
coverage of the selected part of the image indicator has been set. The sum
(disregarding the sign) of the deviation in all orthogonal dimensions may not
exceed 4 % of the SID. (See 27 C F R 1020.31 (g) (2).
NOTE: The limitation ofthe cassette format is made by means oft

collimator.
14.3.1 Exposure of the cassette format
Work sequence.
1. Select fluoroscopy.
2. Lay cassette 14" x 14" with film on the I.I. input and open iris
diaphragm fully.
3. Select radiography.
4. Set 60 k V and set sufficiently long exposure time to properly
expose film.
• 5. Actuate exposure switch, release exposure.

6. Develop film and measure the exposed x-ray field (Fig. 13).
Record image size in table below.
Exposed x-ray field: Length (A) cm Width (B) cm
Expoacce Plus D H H S Instruct tons 1077*3

lattnaiiotwl Medical Systems Rev. 3-33
Cassette 35x35 (14 x 14)
Exposed
X-ray field
I.I. Input'
size
Fig. 13
14.3.2 Cassette to x-ray Geld
1. Fit the cassette holder to the LI.

2. Load 10" x 12" cassette with film and push into the cassette
holder.
3. Set 60 k V and set sufficiently long exposure time to expose film.
^ 4. Actuate radiography mode and release exposure.

5. Develop film and measure the shading of the film edge.
iSID 90 cm
t
X-ray- !a* A -a
Fleld
K i t e r e s u l t of 14.3.1 . Step 6)
i
A • C < 21.6mm (2.4X SID)
F i l m Cassette 2 4 x 3 0 c m
Fig. 14

iatCRUUiotMU M***" Systems
-1
Rev. 3-34
The test steps 1 - 5 of 14.3.2 are to be carried out in all
C - A r m positions shown in Section 13.0, Fig. 6.
C - A r m basic position
Shading AA + B = mm < 21.6 mm
C - A r m to the left
| Shading AA + B = mm < 21.6 mm
C - A r m to the right
| Shading AA + B = •mm < 21.6 Trim
C - A r m to the left, tube assembly at stop
Shading AA + B =: mm < 21 6 mm |
C - A r m to the right, tube assembly at stop
Shading AA + B = m m < 21.6 mm

]
If the deviations are within the given tolerance.then no further checks are
necessary. If there are greater deviations, adjust in accordance with
Sections 13.2.
15.0 Checking the smallest Geld size
1. The smallest field size should amount to max. 5 cm x 5 cm at the I.I. input. The
check is made by placing film cassette in front of I.I. input.
2. Select fluoroscopy and fully close the iris diaphragm (9" or 7" mode depending
on C-Arm I.I. size). N o zoom mode.
3. Select radiograph mode and make exposure 70 k V 1 sec. Measure the image on
the film. (See Fig. 15) and enter in table below.
Exposed
X-rty Held * / A
- \
24 cm X 30cm
film —
B
Fig. 15
Fipotrop Plus DHHS Instructions 1077*3

lntueniiiocau Medical Systems Rev. 3-3$
Smallest field size: Film (A) cm (B) cm = Reject >5cm x 5cm
4. If minimum field size is larger than 5cm x 5cm, readjustment of collimator is

necessary. (See iris adjustment procedure).
5. After adjustment of iris, repeat step 15.0, 1-3.
16.0 Mechanical Test (See Fig. 16)
16.1 Inspect monitor can XPO cable for any defects. Replace if necessary.
16.2 C-Arm cables in good condition. See Fig. 16.
16.3 Inspect set-screws for vertical extension column. See Fig. 16.
16.4 Check all locks for proper operation. Repair if needed. See Fig. 16.
16.5 Inspect wheels for clean, free movement Clean and repair if Deeded. See Fig. 16.
16.6 Check for smooth rotation of C-section. Repair if Deeded. See Fig. 16.
16.7 Inspect cover screws and re-seal tube bead cover if Deeded. See Fig. 16.
16.8 Inspect akin cone and replace if damaged. See Fig. 16.
16.9 Inspect cover screws and re-seal T.V. camera cover if needed. See Fig. 16.
ExpoeeopPlut DHHS Inwnrt toot 1077*3

Rev. 3-36
lejMBalinal MscbcaJ Syxtani
17.0 Installation certification
(These entries should be made during installation)
17.1
1
Dose rate value at uR/s
fluoroscopy LI. input
17.2
Maximum resolution LP/mm

on monitor
with resolution test Part N o
17.3
Exposure Time Time Sec

.1 sec - 2 sec
.4 sec
.2 sec
2 sec
Exposcop Plus D H H S Inst run tons

^ « m — * 4 ~ < f « ~ i Systems
HM
SECTION # 6
SYMBOLS I SIGNALS
IMS2000
Service Manual
SYMBOLS I SIGNAL IDENTIFICATION
The E X P O S C O P P L U S Digital Mobile Surgical C - A r m instructional material uses many symbols for
functions and signals. The following page of symbols w i l l be helpful in servicing the system.
LZ3 = RELAY J U L _T|P = PULSED FLUORO
RESISTOR _ J L _TL1 = SNAP SHOT
— r ^ i — = POTENTIOMETER
= PELVIS K E Y
6 m A F L U O R O at 1 l O k v p
= FUSE
HIp
L—1
• = TRANSFORMER = TO DISK
© = ON • = F R O M DISK
o = OFF
Cro
= T R A N S F E R A to B o r
0
LIVE IMAGE TRANSFER
= PREPARATION
= START
= FLUOROSCOPY
= OR GATE
HDD = RADIOGRAPHY
= CARD EDGE
X I
= MANUAL CONNECTOR OR
CABLE CONNECTOR
ZOOM
: RADIATIONO N = STOP
i : FAULT B.A.S. = COMPOSITE

VIDEO
u
: FAULT TEMP
= ALARM
Y. = FOOT SWITCH
9
= CONTRAST
= H A N D SWITCH
= BRIGHTNESS
NOMINAL
SOLL
ACTUAL
1ST
VOLTAGE PEAK
Vss
TO PEAK
Exposcop Plus IMS2000 Section 6 08/28/95

International Medical Systems, Inc. Symbols / Signals Rev. 1 - 1
SECTION # 7
IDENTIFICATION I LOCATION
OF PARTS FOR IMAGE SYSTEM
IMS2000
Service Manual
1
2
00
IMS2760 D I G I T A L DESCRIPTION: Monitor Can Exploded View Component Locations SCALE 1:2 SHEET 1 OF 1
INTERNATIONAL MEDICAL SYSTEMS, INC.

SECTION: 7 FIG. 7- 1 DRAWN: RICH ARD WESTRICH DATE: 04/05/96
f
NOTE: Monitor Can Exploded View CHECKED: DATE: PAGE: REV.l 1
of Major Components for Image
System. MODEL: LMS2760 DIGITAL WITH MONITOR CART
IMS2760 C-ARM CART REAR COMPONENT LOCATION
RIGHT LEFT
o
9
• . • " 0 • •
• .• .••
MONITOR • ' .' ' " •° «
M O D E L VM4433 . ..
'".At
• . ,»*•••
•« 1 FLOPPY DRIVE
KEYBOARD AND
KEY INTERFACE
PAPER PRINTER
FILM CASSETTE OR V C R
HOLDER
FLOPPY DIRIVE
INTERFACE BOARD
HARD DRIVE
REAR CART B A Y 1 -3 A T A
COVER FAN
U116
POWER
CABLE
— -U361
HOLDER
CONTROL
VCI-2000
DIODES
POWER P O W E R S U P P L Y " I M S 2000

ASSEMBLY 3 0 0 W / 2 2 0 V a c Input BRACKET
V I D E O OUTP1
XPO CABLE
Figure 7-2
POWER CORD
IMS2760 Digital DESCRIPTION: Monitor C a n Component Locations S C A L E 1:2 SHEET 1 OF 1
tfÎMS INTERNATIONAL MEDICAL SYSTEMS, INC.

SECTION: 7 F I G . 7- 2 DRAWN: RICHARD WESTRICH D A T E : 04/05/96
N O T E : Monitor Cart rear View of CHECKED: DATE: PAGE: REV.l - 2

Major Components for
Image Memory System 2760 M O D E L : IMS2760 Digital
IMS2760 DIGITAL MEMORY COMPONENTS
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Figure 7-3
1. V i d e o Image Processor Assembly 13. Intel Pentium / Board A Z .
2. H i g h L i n e Rate Display Board 14. V i d e o Bus 1 & 2
3. D I O - 4 8 Digital I/O 15. S I M M Modules 1 6 M B
4. L U C Y U353/U300 16. V i d e o Bus 3
5. D S A _ C I N E _ P C I R T E - E d g e Enhance
6. Empty Slot
7. V G A P C I Monitor Card
8. H D / P C I / I D E - M o d e 4 Connectors
9. Floppy D i s k Interface Connector
10. Power Supply 220Vac 230-300 W 1 0 .
11. H a r d Drive Bay
12. D C Fan . Second Fan on Front Cover
L M S 2 7 6 0 Digital D E S C R I P T I O N : Computer Case Component Location SCALE N/A S H E E T 1 OF 1

SECTION: 7 F I G . 7- 3 DRAWN: RICHARD WESTRICH D A T E : 04/05/96
N O T E : Computer case Component CHECKED: DATE: PAGE: REV.l - 3

Location for IMS2760 Image System.
M O D E L : IMS2760 D I G I T A L
IMS2760 COMPUTER B O T T O M VIEW
System Configuration for Cine/DSA
DSA,PCI
Power 220VAC R T E
Input Connector RDC2000

220VAC Video Input
Ouput 110/220Vac / Power TJP2000
Select Switch / ON/OFF T W ^ n V.I.P.
Switch U p S C a n
I (®)
(®)
1 \
1
\ /
VJ
(®)
\ /
Fan
PC
Keyboard' Mouse Empty U353
Input Connector Connector Slot Lucy Video Image
for V G A Processor
COLOR DIO 48
Monitor I/O
FIGURE 7 - 4
I M S 2 7 6 0 Digital D E S C R I P T I O N : Computer Case Board Locations Bottom View

DRAWN: RICHARD WESTRICH D A T E : 04/05/96
SECTION: 7 F I G . 7- 4
Y
CHECKED: DATE: PAGE: REV.l - 4
N O T E : Computer Case Bottom View
of Board Location for IMS2760
M O D E L : IMS2760 D I G I T A L
IMS 2 7 6 0 D I G I T A L IMAGE S Y S T E M
CABLE INTERCONNECTION S P E C I F I C A T I O N LIST
PART NO. LOCATION CONNECTORS LENGTH

FROM TO FROM TO IN. CM.
VCI 2000 XA U361 X4 26 PIN IDC 9 PIN MALE D-SUB 8 20.5
VCI 2000 XB KEYBOARD INTERFACE 26 PIN IDC 26 PIN IDC 76 193
VCI 2000 XD UP 2000 J15 15 PIN MALE D-SUB BNC 17 43
VCI 2000 XD VIP 2000 J8 15 PIN MALE D-SUB BNC 17 43
VCI 2000 XD XPO 15 PIN MALE D-SUB BNC 46 117
VCI 2000 XD RIGHT MONITOR-VIDEO IN 15 PIN MALE D SUB BNC 86 218.5
KEYBOARD INTERFACE U108 X2 16 PIN IDC 16 PIN IDC 76 193

X6
Ulll X2 10 PIN IDC 10 PIN IDC 76 193

X5
D I/O - 48 JO 26 PIN IDC 26 PIN IDC 75 190.5

X3
D I/O - 48 J l 26 PIN IDC 26 PIN IDC 75 190.5

XI D I/O - 48 J2 #13 PIN 26 3 PIN MOLEX
PRINTER REMOTE 2 PIN MOLEX REMOTE JACK 24 61

X8
UPS 2000 J14 LEFT MONITOR-VIDEO IN BNC BNC 76 193
UPS 2000 J16 HARDCOPY CAMERA-VIDEO BNC BNC 60 152 . 5

IN
PRINTER VIDEO OUT 75 OHM TERM. BNC 75 OHM BNC 60 152 . 5
PRINTER VIDEO IN HARDCOPY CAM VIDEO OUT BNC BNC 60 152.5
U361 X10 BASE BOARD RESET 2 PIN MOLEX 2 PIN RESET JACK 8 20. 5
U361 X3 U353 X3 25 PIN IDC MALE 25 PIN IDC MALE 32 81.5
U361 X2 U353 X4 9 PIN IDC FEMALE 9 PIN MALE 20 51
BASE BOARD SPEAKER 4 PIN MOLEX 2 PIN MOLEX 32 81 . 5

2 PIN SPEAKER JACK
BASE BOARD PRI IDE HARD DRIVE 40 PIN IDC 40 PIN IDC 22 56
BASE BOARD FDC FLOPPY DRIVE 34 PIN IDC 34 PIN IDC 43 109
COMPUTER POWER BASE BOARD P8 POWER SUPPLY 6 PIN 14 35.5

SUPPLY
BASE BOARD P9 POWER SUPPLY 6 PIN 14 35.5
FLOPPY DRIVE POWER SUPPLY 4 PIN 38 96.5

„
HARD DRIVE POWER SUPPLY 4 PIN 20 51
II II
FAN 1 POWER SUPPLY 4 PIN 20 51
FAN 2 POWER SUPPLY 4 PIN 20 51
UPS 2000 P3 VIP 2000 J3 AND 50 PIN (BUS 50 PIN (BUS 5 13

DSA/RTE PI CABLE) IDC CABLE) IDC
UPS 2000 P4 DSA/RTE P2 50 PIN (BUS 50 PIN (BUS 4 10.5

CABLE) IDC CABLE) IDC
2760
04/05/96
Exposcop 7000 Section 7.0
Rev. 1 - 6
International M e d i c a l System IMS2760 Part Location
Speaker (lôi -SKo^^
Floppy
Drive M o n i t o r \Cari Neclc.

Coble NAoniior Cor + .
V\deo J-WooinOj
Flo'ppY
Sys1ew\ ,
PotJer.
Specie
Coble
and
Connector.
G romrn
Cob\e3,
CoMe
Conduit
\Jideo
Ground
XiolcHlO^l
Diodes.
Video Harness
Coble
Holders
(Qh- 5 ) .
Ground .
S e r v i c e L o o p ,

International M e d i c a l System LMS2760 Part L o c a t i o n Rev. 1 - 7
Floppy Disk Driv<f
Floppy C ^ ^ Drive R'bbo^ Co(ole.
5
•Floppy DUK Drive ?ou>er C a b l e ,
S p e a K e f . (Mounts to AAoni~tor \
Neck \)eni H o l e s . J
s
Monitor Neck.
S p e a k e r C a b l e
'and connecto-c.
-AllocJ Seance l o o p -
coiih +We cobles.
• Coble Holder.
UU4 Soar.
u2)CS d
Soar d
VCI
Board
•— Video Xmacjivvj
System.

International M e d i c a l System IMS2760 Part Location Rev. 1 - 8
Keyboard
feme/
Front.

International M e d i c a l System PMS2760 Part Location Rev. 1 - 9
RM
SECTION # 8
IMAGE PROCESSOR SYSTEM
SECTION 8.1 - 8.20

IMS2000
Service Manual
SECTION 8.1
PRINCIPLE OF
IMAGE PROCESSOR
8.1 - P R I N C I P L E O F A N I M A G E P R O C E S S I N G S Y S T E M
"Ik -fs
IMAGE
A / INPUT OUTPUT
PROCESSING
VIDEO
/ AND
TEMPORARY
INPUT
/
/
L.U.T. L.U.T.
STORAGE
D
\ 7
MASS CONTROLLER
PERMANENT
STORAGE
<H> C.P.U.
SOFTWARE
I
KEYBOARD DISPLAY TEXT
DRIVER DISPLAY
MONITOR
Figure 8.1-1
Exposcop Plus IMS2000 Section 8.1 08/28/95

International Medical Systems Principle of Image Processor Rev. 1-1
KEYBOARD
This input device accesses software instructions by means of alphanumerical keys which are
interpreted into digital instructions for the key pressed.
TEXT DISPLAY MONITOR
This output device allows the viewing of input and output information of software instructions.
OUTPUT LUT
The output lookup table performs the same function as the input lookup table, except its location. This
table is used, if desired, to alter the data from the image processor (i.e., enhance the contrast in the
image), especially in fluoro digital subtraction angiography or for manual windowing (manual contrast
enhancement).
D/A
The digital-to-analog converter is used to change the digital shades of gray code to an equivalent
analog value. It is also to reinsert the horizontal and vertical synchronization pulses that were striped
o f f by the A / D converter. This w i l l reestablish a composite video signal for the video display monitors.
Copyright 1995 by IMS Corporation. All rightsreserved.Reproduction or issue to third parties in any form is not permitted without express written
authority of IMS Corporation.

International Medical Systems Principle of Image Processor Rev. 1-3
SECTION 8.2.1
IMS2000 - VIP2000
VIDEO IMAGE
PROCESSOR BOARD
IMS2000 VIDEO IMAGE PROCESSOR ASSEMBLY
INTRODUCTION
T h e I M S 2 0 0 0 digital image processing system is designed to extend the advantages o f D i g i t a l

Image Technology to C - A r m F l u o r o s c o p y . T h e I M S 2 0 0 0 has image enhancement a n d
processing capabilities that answer specific needs for a variety o f clinical C - A r m a p p l i c a t i o n s
performed during fluoroscopy.
T h e I M S 2 0 0 0 D i g i t a l Image System is an integral part o f the C - A r m system, designed to

w o r k h a n d i n h a n d w i t h the C - A r m control.
T h e I M S 2 0 0 0 D i g i t a l Image System was designed for easy and efficient repair. M o d u l a r

design and simple operation m a k e the IMS2000 a service-friendly system. High-reliability
parts were used i n its design and affords a long service life.
T h e I M S 2 0 0 0 D i g i t a l Image System is a combination o f several m o d u l a r board sets. T h e

f o l l o w i n g w i l l describe the b o a r d set and its functions.
VIP2000
T h e V I P 2 0 0 0 (Video Image Processor) has two boards connected together and requires two
16 bit P C / A T I/O bus slots. T h i s two-board set digitizes the image, performs image noise
reduction, controls the bus timing, and image capture and transfer o f images on the video
image bus.
T h e analog front end and image digitization are discussed i n the following overview o f the
VTP2000 b o a r d set.
T h e digital p o r t i o n o f the b o a r d controls all the image transfer, image bus, real-time image
noise reduction, and supplies the digital clock for the system.
R E A L - T I M E VIDEO F R A M E ACQUISITION
T h e V I P can digitize an input signal, RS-170 m o n o c h r o m e input i n real time. T h e b o a r d

supports external input and can also provide its o w n internal sync signals when needed. T h e
design incorporates a P h a s e - L o c k e d L o o p ( P L L ) circuit w h i c h reduces pixel jitter to 1/4 o f
a pixel a n d provides precise tracking. A precision 10 bit converter provides u p to 1024
intensities for grey-scale applications.
Exposcop Plus IMS2000 Section 8.2.1 09/07/95

International Medical Systems, Inc. IMS200O-VTP20O0 Board Rev. 1-1
Supported Video Standards
Standard Application
RS-170 N o r t h A m e r i c a n T V (monochrome)
Supported V i d e o Standards
INPUT CALIBRATION
Set-up and gain controls are used to ensure that the i n c o m i n g video signal accurately reflects
the original picture, without losses and distortions produced by the camera or transmission
line. These controls allow the service technician to calibrate individual system response
independent of interference.
IMS2000/VTP2000 BOARD SET FRONT END
OVERVIEW
T h e front end of the VLP2000 Baseboard accepts one o f three possible N T S C RS-170 video
sources, passes the video through a series o f gain and offset stages, then digitizes the video
at 21.477 M H z sampling rate with 10-bits o f resolution. T h e video path is s h o w n i n the
diagram below.
VTDEOMUX 10-BIT
VIDEO VARIABLE DC OFFSET WITH FIXED GAIN
MUX GAIN AMP AMP A/D
Av-2
o
(Av=0-5)
0 Aruurr
VOUHOE
WHITE
COMPRESSION
GAIN
OFFSET
DAC
DAC

International Medical Systems, Inc. IMS20O0-VIP2OOO Board Rev. 1-2
VIDEO M U X
T h e video m u x is set up to accept three composite RS-170 video sources at 0.714 video
levels, but can accommodate a signal as large as 2 V p-p. E a c h input is terminated w i t h
75ohms w h i c h should be considered when choosing a driving source.
VARIABLE GAIN STAGE
T h e video out o f the variable gain stage can be fully attenuated ( A v = 0) or gained by 5. In
order for the gain stage to operate over this range, the gain control voltage must swing
between - I V and I V where - I V corresponds to full attenuation and I V to a gain o f 5. T h e
swing o f the gain control voltage can be adjusted to alter the gain range o f the amplifier via
adjustment pot R l 12. T h i s pot sets the reference voltage o f the D A C w h i c h varies the gain
control voltage. T h e D A C is set up so that a full scale control w o r d w i l l output a voltage
equal to the reference voltage while a control w o r d of zero w i l l output a voltage equal the
negative of the reference voltage. Pot R112 can be adjusted by measuring the voltage at test
point W 2 2 .
DC OFFSET STAGE
T h e video out o f this stage can be D C offset i n both the positive and negative directions.
T h e D C offset value is m u c h the same as the above gain control voltage. The reference
voltage o f a n offset D A C is adjusted via Pot R 9 7 so that a full-scale control w o r d w i l l result
i n a positive offset while a control w o r d of zero will result i n a negative offset. T h e offset
value is related to the D A C voltage reference with this equation - 4 . 0 2 * V r e f * ( l 1/4096)
•(control w o r d value) - 3.09*Vref. W i t h a V r e f of I V , the full-scale output w i l l be 0.93V and
the output w i t h control w o r d equal to zero w o u l d be - 3.09V. P o t R 9 7 can be adjusted by
measuring the voltage at test point W 1 9 .
VIDEO M U X WITH FIXED GAIN
T h e m u x stage allows the selection o f n o r m a l video o r while compressed (similar to gamma

function) video to be passed to the digitization stage. T h i s stage has a fixed gain o f 2 w h i c h ,
i n conjunction w i t h full-scale output at the variable gain stage, allows the D C offset to be
as l o w as - 6 V a n d still have output video fit within the digitizing w i n d o w .
A N A L O G TO DIGITAL CONVERTER STAGE
T h e A / D stage accepts the gained and offset video and digitizes at 2 1 . 4 7 7 7 M H z w i t h 10-bit
resolution. T h e digitizing w i n d o w , that is the range over w h i c h the A / D input is digitized,

International Medical Systems, Inc IMS2000-VTP2O00 Board Rev. 1-3
is 0 to 3.6V. V i d e o levels above 3.6V are converted as full-scale values which levels below
OV are converted as zero values.
SUMMARY
It c a n be seen f r o m the discussions o f the previous sections that the video input into the
VEP2000 Baseboard can be manipulated to produce a wide range of effects by adjusting the
c o m b i n a t i o n o f gain and offset values. The default setting for the gain reference p o t and the
offset reference pot are b o t h I V . These values give full gain swing f r o m 0 to 5 and D C
offsets o f -3.09V to 0.93V. These settings provide for a wide enough range o f video
m a n i p u l a t i o n to accommodate various video input ranges and still digitize a usable image.
T h e analysis o f the image is, however, purely subjective a n d thus the settings m a y be altered
to give the best image for a particular application.
T h e I M S 2 0 0 0 V i d e o Image Processor is a unique concept i n imaging. Its sophisticated

design incorporates such innovations as A r e a of Interest processing; real-time A L U image
operations; interlaced display output; and a 32-bit plane image buffer. These features allow
y o u to combine extensive text, graphics, and overlay capabilities w i t h the most advanced
real-time image processing functions available.
A n I B M P C A T equipped w i t h the VIP2000 t w o - b o a r d set creates an extremely p o w e r f u l

medical image processor w h i c h can be used for a wide range of clinical studies. The
V I P 2 0 0 0 is equipped with image enhancement applications for postprocessing o f medical
images.
T h e V I P 2 0 0 0 performs histograms, averaging, and m a n y other operations.
T h e V I P 2 0 0 0 image processing two-board set offers image buffering capability, real-time

video frame acquisition plus a wide variety of image processing techniques i n conjunction
w i t h C P U processor.
REAL-TIME IMAGING
T h e V I P 2 0 0 0 c a n p e r f o r m a wide variety of image processing operations f o r image

enhancement. T h e o n - b o a r d A L U performs real-time, single-image operations such as
frame averaging, real-time and last image h o l d .
N o i s e reduction is used to enhance an i n c o m i n g image for h u m a n viewing by eliminating

r a n d o m noise i n the final digitized image. A picture is digitized a number of times (up to
16), the images are added together at video frame rates (l/30th o f a second) and divided i n

International Medical Systems, Inc. IMS2000-VIP2000 Board Rev. 1-4
one frame time. Since the noise in each m c o m i n g image will never be i n the same place, an
averaged picture of m a n y m c o m i n g images will produce one clear image. T h i s technique is
extremely useful for i m p r o v i n g medical images acquired during fluoroscopy.
VIP2000 R E A L T I M E N O I S E R E D U C T I O N S E C T I O N
INTRODUCTION
T e m p o r a l filter section o f the VTP2000 b o a r d filters image noise by factors of 2 - 1 6 images.

T h e reduction o f noise is approximately 50% for 2 frames to about 87% for 8 frames.
PURPOSE
T h e primary cause of the p o o r signal-to-noise ratio i n fluoroscopic imaging is very l o w dose

r a d i a t i o n used to produce the video image. W i t h the VTP2000 b o a r d temporal filter section,
the signal-to-noise ratio can be dramatically improved by averaging m c o m i n g video frames
(noise tends to be a non-fixed pattern i n the image where the video signal is more constant).
FUNCTION
T h e I M S 2 0 0 0 employs an averaging technique termed "exponential averaging", i.e.,

weighted frame average of the m c o m i n g video pixel (Pc) and the last o r previous pixel value
(Pi). T h e selected number value ( N ) o f averaging sets the parameter by w h i c h the system
assigns a value to a scale factor (Sf). T h i s determines the relative weight attached to the
i n c o m i n g and previous pixel values, as illustrated i n F i g . 8.4-2.
VIDEO C A M E R A
Camera Image
Pixel Value Multiplied by. Scale Factor
(Pc) (Sf)
[ Pc (Sf)+Pi (1-Sf) ] Normalize Video

DISPLAY
Pixel Values
Previous Image
^lujtirjliedjjv^
Pixel Value 1-Sf
(Pi)
I
Figure 8.2.1 - 1 IMS2000 Image Averaging Technique.

International Medical Systems, Inc. IMS200O-VTP2O00 Board Rev. 1-5
W h e n N = l , the m c o m i n g camera pixel value will represent 100% o f the averaged image.
T h u s n o averaging w i l l be performed.
W h e n N = 2 , the i n c o m i n g camera pixel value and the previous image pixel value are assigned
the same weighted value reducing the noise by 50%.
T h e effect o f increasing the value N is to decrease the noise value f o u n d i n each pixel. I f N
is selected at t o o h i g h a value, the signal-to-noise ratio is very good, but the system w i l l
respond very slowly to real pixel values. This c a n result i n b l u r r i n g o f the fluoroscopic
image due to natural b o d y organ movements. Thus, c a u t i o n should be used i n setting t o o
high o f a weighted N value f o r some exams.
INPUT LOOK-UP TABLES
Input l o o k - u p tables allow y o u to m o d i f y input grey-scale values before they enter the frame
buffer. Real-time modifications include m u l t i p l i c a t i o n by a constant, logarithmic
conversion, and multiple-level thresholding.
ORIGINAL FIRST STEP SECOND STEP

PICTURE SUBTRACT 200 MULTIPLY BY 2
Copyright 1995 by International Medical Systems, Inc.. A l lrightsreserved. Reproduction or issue to third parties in any form is not
permitted without express written authority of International Medical Systems, Inc.

International Medical Systems, Inc. IMS2000-VIP2000 Board Rev. 1-6
SECTION 8.2.2
IMS2000 - UPS2000
UPSCAN DISPLA Y BOARD
8.2-2 IMS2000 HIGH LINE RATE UPS2000 DISPLAY BOARD
INTRODUCTION
The UPS2000 board performs four functions. It converts 525V X 1365H interlaced video to 1049V X
1287H interlaced video, provides graphics overlay, displays captured video on reference monitor, and
process monitor. The board set requires one 16 bit I S A P C I/O slot for system operation and image
transfer to IS a bus for image storage.
PURPOSE
Provide sharp clear display of medical images with near flicker free data overlays for text, and graphic
information, i.e., Patient name, Patient ID#, Dr. name, Images to store to disk, Graphical displays of
functions and menus for operator use. The board also provides the image system with a reference display
output for the right hand display monitor, complete with text and graphic overlays when needed.
SCAN CONVERSION
The UPS2000 board converts 525 lines of 30 H z interlaced video into 1049 lines of 30 H z interlaced
video. See figure 8.2-3. The conversion is done using dual ported video R A M s ( V R A M ) . The 525 line
vertical interlaced digital video is written to V R A M one field at a time. The 1st interlaced field writes the
even lines and the 2nd interlaced fields writes the odd lines. Since the V R A M is dual ported, the video can
also be read from the V R A M at the same time that the interlaced video is being written to the V R A M . See
Fig. 8.2 -3. For each line of video that is written to the V R A M two lines of video are read from the
V R A M . B y reading the lines sequentially at twice the input rate, the video is converted to a 60 H z video
output. For each 256 line field of interlaced input video there is a 525 line field of video output video. The
output video is converted to a 1049 interlaced output by shifting every other frame down 1/2 line as shown
in F i g . 8.2-3, Video output timing is shown in F i g . 8.2-4
CAPTURE VIDEO FOR REFERENCE MONITOR

The Process of converting the 525 line interlace video into 1049 line interlaced video requires that the video
pass through a V R A M buffer. When the system stops writing video to the V R A M buffer, the last two
fields are still held and the V R A M buffer can be displayed. Capturing an image on the reference monitor is
done by writing two fields of video into the V R A M buffer for the reference monitor as shown in
F i g . 8.2-3
GRAPHICS OVERLAYS
The UPS2000 board set has the capability to overlay a processed image with non-destructive text and
graphics. The graphics overlay is mapped as a 64k byte region of memory at paragraph address DOOOh in
the P C ' s memory space. This allows the overlays to be accessed directly by the P C processor. Each
overlay is 4 bits deep, which means it can support 16 shades of gray. A l l the graphics operations are
performed by the P C in a similar manner to the way the P C would write to the computers display when set
to graphics mode. The graphics overlay is combined with the image in a 14 bit L U T . For each pixel the
graphic overlay selects the L U T for modifying the image intensity for that graphic value. See Fig. 8.2 - 5
For each video input to L U T there is a video output. The 16 bit L U T ' S are selected pixel by pixel in the
graphic overlay providing the system with extended capabilities in performing text and graphic displays
without effecting the video image quality.
Some of the flexibility of the graphic overlays are shown in the following:
1) Invert video functions with text and graphic displays.

2) Text overlays with values of text display keyed to video level. This makes text always visible
despite video background levels, i.e., white text on black background and black text on white
background or half white and half gray text due to video level of blk to white gray scale.
3) Graphic blanking of video output. Example I M A G E C R O P function or electronic shutters.
Exposcop Plus-IMS2000 Section 8.2.2 09/05/95

International Medical Systems IMS2000/UPS2000 Board Rev. 1 - 1
PAN, SCROLL, AND ZOOM (AREA OF INTEREST PROCESSING)
For those applications where you are concerned with only a portion of an image, the UPS2000 provides
and Area of Interest bit plane. The Area O f Interest allows the operator to select a rectangular area for
processing. Since only the pixels within the A O I are scanned out of the image frame buffer, execution
speed is proportional to the size of the area being processed. The object of interest window selects which
pixels within the specified area are to be processed, thereby increasing the precision.
The IMS2000 - UPS2000 board set has a X 2 , X 4 hardware zoom which allows the operator to expand
1/4 or 1/16 of the image so that it fills the entire display of the reference monitor. Increasing and decreasing
the zoom w i l l not destroy any data stored in the frame buffer. The UPS2000 board allows the operator
with the add of a special snap image buffer and a complex video bus data path to P A N and Scroll the Area
Of Interest " A O I " with single-pixel precision. The relative position of the display origin can be positioned
anywhere within the video memory. This makes it possible to shift the image memory by one pixel or
more in any direction right ,left, up, or down. The process monitor w i l l display a rectangular box
corresponding in size to the size of zoom selected. The box will move its relative position in response to
the P A N , and S C R O L L direction to provide a reference for the operator of that portion of the image
displayed on the reference monitor magnified.
I B M P C , P C , A T are registered trademarks of International Business M a c h i n e C o r p .

International Medical Systems IMS2000/UPS20O0 Board Rev. 1 - 2
• Ii
3 Upscan
Interlaced VIDEO
Odd Field Odd Field
•S MEMORY
•7
1¬
2 2¬
3¬ Upscan
Interlaced - 4 VIDEO 4¬ Even Field
Even Field MEMORY 5¬
6 6
7-
8 §•
9
Figure 8.2 - 3
1
Odd Field i Even Field
2
Time 60th of 3 2 Time 60th of a
a sec. 4 3
sec.
5 5S 4
6 5
7 6
8 7
9 8
1 0
9
10
In the time a normal system reads out one video field the IMS2000/
UPS2000 display board reads out the same field twice and shifts the
second filed by 1/2 a line. Thereby reducing image flicker and
increasing image quality. The results are a 1049V x1287H display rate.

International Medical Systems IMS20OO/UPS20O0 Board Rev. 1 - 3
H O R I Z O N T A L TIMING
b d
c
CSYNC
525LINE 1049LINE
a) Line Time 63.566 |XS 32.0 |is
b) H o r i z o n t a l Front P o r c h 1.50 \is 0.75 (J.S
c) H o r i z o n t a l Sync Pluse 4.70 |is 2.50 u.s
d) Horizontal Back Porch 4.70 u,s 2.87 us
VERTICAL TIMING
f
< ___ , — k>
525LINE 1049LINE
e) Field Time 16.683 ms 16.784 ms
f) Vertical Sync Pluse Width 572.10 u.s 576.0 (is
g) Blanking Interval 1.27 ms 1.28 ms
F I G U R E 8.2-4

International Medical Systems IMS20O0/UPS20O0 Board Rev. 1 - 4
T E X T / G R A P H I C O V E R L A Y IMS2000- UPS2000 B O A R D
GRAPHIC 14 B I T
4 BIT
BUFFER LOOK UP
TABLE
( LUT )
10 B I T 1 0 4 9 X 1 2 8 7
WITH GRPAHIC
OVERLAY
10 B I T VIDEO IMAGE 10 B I T
BUFFER
V I D E O DATA UPSCAN 1 049V
RS170 TIMING 1287H VIDEO 1
GRAPHIC 14 B I T
4 BIT
BUFFER LOOK UP
TABLE
( LUT )
10 B I T 1 0 4 9 X 1 2 8 7
WITH GRPAHIC
OVERLAY
10 B I T VIDEO IMAGE 10 B I T
BUFFER
V I D E O DATA UPSCAN 1 049V
GRAPHIC 14 B I T
4 BIT
BUFFER LOOKUP
TABLE
( LUT)
10 B I T 5 2 5 V X 1 2 8 7 H
WITH GRPAHIC
OVERLAY
10 B I T VIDEO IMAGE 10 BIT
BUFFER
VIDEO DATA RS170 525V
F I G U R E 8.2-5
Exposcop Pius-IMS2000 Section 8.2.2 09/05/95

International Medical Systems IMS2000/UPS2000 Board Rev. 1 - 5
SECTION 8.2.3
REAL TIME
EDGE ENHANCEMENT
RTE2000 BOARD
IMS2000-RTE2000 REAL TIME ENHANCEMENT
PURPOSE:
The R T E board provides the operator with the ability to enhance the edge detail
in an image during live fluoroscopic procedures.
OPERATION:
The R T E board uses a high speed integrated circuit to perform convolutions.

Convolutions are a class of neighborhood operations which enhance a particular
feature of an image at the expense of others, less important features. The edge
detection of the R T E board picks out the edges of objects so that the operator can
more easily determine their location and shapes. The convolutions are performed
by computing a new value for a pixel based on the value of its surrounding
pixels. The R T E board performs standard 3x3 convolution on a 1024x525 image
at 30 f/sec.
LOCATION:
The R T E board is a single board Option and requires a single 16 bit I S A P C I/O
bus slot and is connected to the UPS2000 and VIP200 boards by two video bus
cable connectors. The video bus data enters the R T E board from the V I P board
then is routed to the UPS2000 board for image upscan display.
The board must be connected to the VIP2000 and UPS2000 boards for proper
operation. See schematics in section 8.3

International Medical Systems IMS20007RTE2000 Board Rev. 1 - 1
SECTION 8.3
IMS2000
IMAGE SYSTEM
BOARD SCHEMATICS
VIP2000, UPS2000, RTE2000
SECTION 8.3
VIP2000 SCHEMATICS
US
LIHDATO 23 LIHDO /
DO vo
Dl Y l
2 2 LIHD1 /
D2 Y2
21 LIHD2 /
D3 Y3
20 LIHD3 /
19 L I D4 /
u-1 Y4
18 L I D5 /
D5 Y5
D6 Y6
17 L I D6 /
D7 Y7
16 LIHD7 /
D8 Y8
15 LIHD8 /
14 LIHD9 /
D9 Y9
W2 W3 W4 W7
/DVSYNC TP TP TP TP
/DHSYNC
OC
>CP 0 $ •
74FCT821AT
/CBLANKQ
U65
DO YO
Dl Y l
D2 Y2 FIELD ^3D5,4C5,5C4,9C-:
D3 Y3 / C S Y N C ~ > 5C4, 6B6
/CBLANK
D4 Y4 /CBLAHjO 5C4,6B6
DS Y5 IHHACC ~> 4C8
D6 Y6 SERTR C5,4C8
D7 Y7 C3EFR C5,4C8
D8 Y8 VPEN > 3C5, 4C8, 5C4
CPTVIP
D9 Y9 C P T V I P ~> 3C5
OC
•CP
74FCT821AT
RHv-mro. .91
~S> 3B8
23 BHVIDO /
22 BHVID1 /
A
2 1 BHVID2
20 BHVIH3 /
19 BHVID4 /
IS BHVID5 /
17 BHVID6 A
16 BHVID7 /
15 BHVIDS /
14 BHVID9 /
74FCT821AT
CLK3B1 >3C8,4C8
CLK3B2 ~> 5C5
CLK3B3 >6B6
/CLK3B1>4A8
SYSCLK ~> 9D6
BDRES >8D7
H/BDRES > 3C5, 4C8, 5C4, 9C4

VPIN INTERFACE
S i z e Docu Number
VPINTRF.SCH
try 3, 1995|sheet
2D4|LIHD[Q. .9] > MHg f P . h&j
V L T C H I H
2C3 ,4C5 , 5C4I/VSYNC >

2C3,5C4/H5YNC~S
2C3 ,5C4|FIELD >—
AO DQ1
A l DQ2
-{J5T_SPVTD> 4 C 8 , 5 C 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I C C I I I I I A2 DQ3
O O OOOO 3 2 L L O O O O O A3 DQ4
1 1 1 1 1 1 KK1 1 9 8 7
A4 DQ5
7 6 5 4 3 2 10 10
3 9 FVID4 A5 DQ6
105 1027 1018 106
3 8 FVID5 A6 DQ7
106 102 6 1019
37 FVID6 A7 DQ8
107 102 5 \ VADD8
3 6 FVID7 IO2 0 IOS A8 jBVID[0 . .7 } >5D8
102 4 1021 104
DISPVID SQ1
CK1/I5< 1022 103
MASKEN TR/OE SQ2
9 C 1| M A S K E N > 1023
roi
33 VLTCKIN 102 ME/WE SQ3
2B4, 4C8|CLK3B1
roo
FVID10 14 32 MIRHL SQ4
/FVID11 15 31 FVID8 AIMASK RAS SQ5
/FVID12 16 1023 5B5 1024 CAS SQ6
3 0 FVID9
/FVID13 17 102 2 2C3,4C8 102 5 SQ7
1021 2C3,4C8 1026 1047
67 VADD8 /
SE SQ8
2C3,4C8,5C4 66 VADD7
1027 104 6 SC
G5 VA D D G
1028 1045 QSF
64 VADD5 /
102 9 1044 DSF
1043
63 VADD4 /
A
CC 62 VADD3
103 0 1042
MACH210-15 LiLI
I I I I I I
MT42C8256-7
KK O O O O O O
I I I I I 2 3 13 3 3 3 4 4
O OOOO / / 7 6 7 8 9 0 1
3 3 3 3 3 1 I I
1 2 3 4 5 4 5 6
AO DQ1
A l DQ2
A2 DQ3
A3 PQ4
A4 PQ5
A5 PQ6
A6 PQ7
VMXOUT~"> 5 C 5 A7 PQ8 4BVID E10 - . 1 7 ] > 5 D S
MIRVL > 4 C 5 AS
SQ1
TR/OE SQ2
ME/WE SQ3
SQ4
RAS SQ5
4B8, 10B2IATADD [ 1 . .10] ' A T f i n nF CAS SQ6
SQ7
SE SQ8
SC
QSF
DSF
MT42C8256-7
/ST HST
/LP PLSE
9C1 / L D _ P L S E V
9C1
9C1 FCT0
FCT1
FCT2
U21
AO DQ1
H S T U W S A l DQ2
2C4|BHVID[0..9] > RHVTPfn 9t
s E 4H/IHSI S TUWWFSO> - / H I S T W R
/HISTRD
UWS
WR
A2
A3
PQ3
PQ4
9B6 /HISTRD, R P A4 PQ5
9B4 A5 PQ6
31 ATADD1 / \ VADD6
PINO IOADPD A6 DQ7 B V I D [ 8 . .9 j > 5D8
PIN1 IOADP1
30 ATADD2 A \ VADD7
A7 DQ 8
PIN2 IOAPP2
29 ATADD3 A AS BVID[18..19]>5D8
PIN3 IOAPP3
28 ATADD4 A SQ1
PIN4 IOAPD4
27 ATADD5 A TR/OE SQ2
PINS IOADD5
26 ATADD6 A\ ME/WE SQ3
PIN6 IOADD6
25 ATADD7 A sg4
PIN7 IOADD7
24 ATADD8 A RAS SQ5
PINS 23 ATADD9 /
IOADD8 CAS SQ6
PIN9 IOADD9
22 ATADD10 A SQ7
SE SQ8
SC
QSF
PINO DIO0 PSF
DIN1 DIOl
PIN2 DI02
PIN3 DI03 MT42CS 256-
DIN4 DI04
DIN5 DI05
DINS DI06
DIN7 DI07
DINS DIOS
DIN9 DI09
DIO10 ATDAT10
DIN10
DIN11 D I O l l
DIN12 DI012
PIN13 DI013
DIN14 DI014 ATPAT14
DIN15 DI015
PIN16 DIOl 6
DIN17 DI017
PIN18 DTOIS
DIN19 DI019
DIN2 0 DIO20
DIN2 1 DI021
DIN22 DIQ22
DIN2 3 DI023
HSP48410-33
3A4,4D3 , 6 C 5 , 7 C 7 , 8D7, 9D2, I0C2<~ATDAT1
3A4 ,4D3, 6 C 5 , 7 C 7 , SD7, 9D2, 10C2<TATDAT[0

HISTOGRAMMER & ROTATION BUFFER
S i z e Document Number
C HISTO.SCH
December 1994[Sheet
/IOCHRDY
3A4 , 6 C 5 , 7 C 7 , 8D7 , 9D2 , 1 0 C 2 f A T D A T [ 0 . . lTJ
1
O V M A 1 0 . .91
CPU_.DISP
9B1 C P U _ D I S P :
CPU CAPT
9 B1 CPU._CAPT
9 Si C L R F R R D Y CLRFR_RDY \ OVMA0 25
>— AO DQ1
\ OVMA1 24
A l DQ2
\ OVMA2 23
A2 DQ3
\ OVMA3 22
A3 DQ4
Ovi-Lv'l I 9
4'i \
\ OVMA5 18
A4 DQ5
A5 DQ6 ÔVED[0..3] > 5 E
\ OVMA6 17
A6 DQ7
OVERLAY MEMORY \ OVMA7 16
1 I I I I I 1 I I I I I A7 DQ8
O O O O O O O O O O O O \ OVMA8 15
A8
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 11
u
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 10 9 8 /OVTR 7
SQ1 ÔVOD[0..3] > 5 B 8
1031 1017 TR/OE SQ2
/CPUCAS2 /OVWR 13
1032 161-6 ME/WE 3Q3
/IOCHRDY" 46 /CPUCAS1
103 3 1615 SQ4
9B4| / M E M S E L > — 1034 1014
/CPURAS2 /OVRAS 14
RAS SQ5
1035 1013 /OVCAS 27
/CPURAS1 CAS SQ6
CLK2/I4 1012 SQ7
CLK3/15 13 35
SE SQ8
2 A 4 , 5 C 4 , 9C4| / B D R E S 16 OVSC 2
SC
QSF
12 t 29
DSF
9A6,10B6 /SBHE >— 17 CLK1/I1
9A6,10B6 103 6 CLKO/10
9A6,10B6 1037 I O l l MT42C8256-7
1038 IO10
103 9 109
2C3I I H H A C C ^ > - IO40 IOS
25
2C3 , 3C5|SERTR >-— 104 1 107
S OVMA0
24
AO DQ1
I I I I I I OVMA 3
DQ2
s 23
O O O O O O I I I I I I A l
OVMA 2 DQ3
s 22
4 4 4 4 4 4 O O O O O O A2
OVMA3
2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 2C3,5C4 DQ4
19
A3
MAC H 2 2 0 - 1 5 2C3,5C4 \ OVMA4
DQ5
18
A4
C PTCTRL. PDS 3C4 MIRVL >—
AGC MEMORY \ OVMA 5
17
A5 DQ6
k OVMA 6
OVMA'/
16
A6 DQ7
15
A7 DQ8
2C3 , 3C5 C B E F R OVMA 8
A8
7
2 C 3 , 3 C 5 , 5C4 VDEN > SQ1 -jAGCED0~~> 5B8
DISPVID /AGCTR
3 D 5 , 5C-1 TR/OE SQ2
9 E4
/C P U A C C
/AGCCAS
/ AOCWR
13 ME/WE SQ3
14
9B4 SQ4
/AGCACC /AGCRAS /AGCRAS
9B4
27
RAS SQ5 HAGCOD0 >5B8
9 B 4 / LMR /AGCCAS
CAS SQ6
35 SE
SQ7
SQ8
AGCSC
2 SC
29 DSF
QSF
R60
RES
332
2 C 3 , 5C4| / H S Y N C >— C P U A I Q
- - 8 1
8 ATDAT0 /
AO DQ1
4 C 8 , 1 0 B 2 r A T A D D [0 . - 15~p A l DQ2
9 ATDAT1 /
10 ATDAT2 /
A2 DQ3
1 1. ATDAT3 /
A3 DQ4
C PU MEMORY 3 j ATDAT4 /
A4 DQ5
A5 DQ6
32
33
ATDAT5
ATDAT6
/
/
gFtfBBff | • 1 1 rg~PUED [ 0 . . 7 ) > 5C8
\ ATADD2 A6 DQ7
34 ATDAT7 /
A7 DQ8
A8
3 CPUED0 /
SQ1
4 C PLIED 1 /i
TR/OE SQ2
5 C PUED2 /
ME/WE SQ3
6 CPUED3 /
I I I I I I I I C C I I I I I SQ4
O OOOOO 3 2 L L O O O O O /CPUHAS1 :? 6 CPUED4 /
RAS SQ5
1 1 1 1 1 1 KK 1 1 9 8 7 /CPUCAS1 /CPUCA51 37 CPUED5 /
7 6 5 4 3 2 10 10 CAS SQ6
-:- 8 CPUED6
SQ7 X
\ ATADD3 28 39 CPUED7
IOIS 106 SE SQ8
\ ATADD4 29
1019 SC
X ATADD5 30
X
IO2 0 105 QSF
ATADDfi 31
k
102 1 104 DSF
ATADD7 32
1022 103
ATADD8 33
1023 102
l O l
IC0
1024
ATADD10 37
1025
\ ATADD11 3 8
1026 1047
\ ATADD12 8 ATDAT8 /
1027 1046 AO DQ1
\ ATADD13 9 ATDAT9 /
102 8 1045
k
ATADD14 41 A l DQ2
102 9 1044 10 ATDAT10 /
A2 DQ3
1043 11 ATDAT11 /
ATADDI5 43 C C A3 DQ4
IO30 1042 31 ATDAT12 /
L L A4 DQ5
I
K K
I I I I 2 3 I I I I I I
A5 DQ6
32
33
ATDAT13
ATDAT14
/
/
^TO f?..71 icPUODIO.
D
.7T-->5C8
O O O O O / / O O O O O O A6 DQ7
34 ATDAT15 /
3 3 3 3 3 I I I 1 3 3 3 3 4 4 A7 DQ8
U A D D f 1, 6 . B 1 1 2 3 4 5 4 5 6 7 6 7 8 9 0 1 AS
9 B 4 f U A D D [ 1 6 . . 1 8 ] >E 3 CPUOD0
SQ1
4 CPUOD1 /
TR/OE SQ2
5 CPUOD2
ffl
M E / WE SQ3 /
6 C PUOD3 /
\ UADD16 SQ4
/CPURAS2 / C" P U R A S 2 36 CPUOD4 /
\ UADD17 RAS SQ5
/C PUCAS2 37 CPUOD5 /
\ UADD18 CAS SQ6
38 CPUOD6 /
SQ7
39 CPUOD7 /
SE SQ8
SC
26 .
QSF
DSF
MT42C8256-7
R61
/CLK3B1
2A4r7cLK3Bl >-
RES
221
C P U D I
R62 T i t l e
RES
CPU CAPTURE BUFFER
332
S i z e Document Number REV
C CPUMEM.SCH 2
or JI
Date : December 12, 19 9 4 | S h e e t 4 of 11
3B1, 5D81BVID [ 0 . .9
3 B 1 , 5D8|BVID [ 9 . .1 9T
D V T O I O . ,9J_
^ D V I D j O . - 9) > 6C7
4B1<CPUED [ Q . . 7]
4 A l < C P U O D [ 0 . .7 ]
9Bir7vBOUT >- i^C OE2
74FCT827AT
, 4C5
/BDHSYNC
2C3
BDFIELD
2C3 F I E L D
DISPVID BDISPVID
, 4C8
z
, 4CS VDEN >
2C3
/CBLANK /BCBLANK R63
2C3
2 A 4 , 9C41 / B D R E S >— - WV-

J
3II/VCOUT >-
74FCT827AT
+ 5V
4C1IAGCOD0 >— R57

RES
221
4DiroVED [ 0 .
IO/CLK I/OO
4Dl[75vbD [ 0 . . 3 ~ 11 I / O l
12 1/02
13 1/03
14 1/04
15 1/05 -j A I M A S K > 3C5
16 1/06
17 1/07
18 I/OS
19 1/09
110
4C1|A G C E D O >— 111 NC
ftYTr!?rP i HOVLD[0..3) >6C7

/BDHSYNC /BDVSYNC
/BCBLANK
22VI0 PLCC BDFIELD
DOMUX.PDS BDISPVID
CONSOA
GND GND
OUTPUT MUXES & VIDEO BUS

ze Document Number
OUTMUX.SCH
Date: J a n u a r y 12, 1995|Sh.eet S o f 11
5VA > 7D7
3A4 , 4D3 , 7 C 7 , 8D7 , 9D2 , 1 0 C 2 < A T D A T [0 - .7 j >s

5D3[T3viD[ 2 - - 9
5 B 4 r o V L D [ 0.
U3 6
\ DVID2
PO DO
\ DVID3
PI Dl
P2 D2
P3 D3
P4 D4
P5 D5
P6 D6
P7 D7
OLO IOR 2 ®
OL1 IOG
OL2 IOB
OL3
OPA
VREF COMP
IREF
2 C 3 , 5C4] / C S Y N C SYNC
2 C 3 , 5C4| / C E L . BLANK
SETUP VAA
S/6 VAA
VAA
a®
4B8, 10B2| ATADDO RSO VAA
4 B 8 , 1 0 B 2 A TA D D 1 RSI
LM3 8 5 - 1 . 2
4 B 8 , 1 0 B 2 A TA D D 2 RS2 GND
GND
9B4| / B T R D ED
9B4[ / B T W R ~ > C207
WR
0 . l u F
2B4fc"LK3B3 >— CAP NP:
B T 4 7 8-5 0
2
-@
VIDEO DAC OUTPUT

S i z e Document; Number
VDAC.SCH
• • • I'.;ci:iiber 1. ? .. 1994lsh5^ti
FB11
C2 0 9
-a C2 0 5
0 . l u F lOuF
C107
Jl
11
1
0 .l u F AGND
3 A 4 , 4D3 , 6 C 5 , SD7 , 9D2 , 1 0 C 2 < ~ A T D A T t0 - .1 1 ] ^ ^ S B & J ^ U ^ ^ ^ ^ ^
3IT12
3IT11 R7»
3IT10
3IT9 2 OK
BITS TP
VREF
3IT7
3IT6 R37 0
-tyV\—
\ ATDAT4
^ r
3IT5
\ ATDAT3
3IT4 RF3
\ ATDAT2
3IT3
\ ATDAT1
3IT2
3IT1 IOUT1
9B4ITDAC1CS ; ] D A C Q U T T > 8D3

9B4| / D A C W R R64
OP495 9.09K POT
2K
R4 0
ATnAT r
y- .luF AGND
3IT12
\ ATDAT10
3IT11
\ ATDAT 9
3IT10
\ ATDAT3 W9
3IT9
\ ATDAT7 TP
3IT8 VREF
\ ATDAT6
3IT7
\ ATDAT5 R69
3IT6
\ ATDAT4
3IT5
\ ATDAT3
3IT4 RFB
\ ATDAT2
3IT3
\ ATDAT1
3IT2
3IT1 IOUT1
/DAC2CS DACOUT2
9B4|7"DAC2CS >— [ D A C O U T T > 8D3
R65
OP4 9 5 9.0 9K POT
2K
AD7 54 5 A
T i t l
D/A OUTPUTS
S i z e Docur tent Number REV
C DACS.SCH 2
Date Mav 5, 1995lSheet 7 o f 11
3A4 , 4 D 3 , 6 C S , 7 C 7 , 9 D 2 ,I0C2<ATDAT[0..7] > ATDrtTfP,•7U PA r o. 7 1
y
5 PAO /
PAO
4 PA1 /
PA1
\ ATDAT2 3 PA2_/
PA2
2 P A 3 /
PA3
44 P A 4 /
PA4
PA 5 43 P A 5 / PBro, .71
42 P A G /
PA6
41 PA7 /
PA7
20 P BO /
5
9B4 PBO
21 P B1 /
9B4 PB1
22 P B2 /
4B8,10B2 PB2
4 B 8 , 1 0 B 2 A T A DDI PB3
24 P B3 / FB5
j:
2A4 BDRES >- PB4
25 PB4 /
n
LS
j
26 PBS /
934 PB5
27 PB6 /
PB6 F B
28 PB7 /
PB7 - C3 6 7CII DACOUTl">-
0 . l u F 7Bl| D A C Q U T l V
PCO
16 PCO / CAP KP
1
17 P C I /
PCI
1 8 PC2 /
PC 2
1 9 PC 3 / AGND GND
PC 3
PC4
1 5 PC 4 /
PC 5
1 4 PC 5 /
1 3 PC6 /
PC 6
PC 7
11 PC 7 /
PC f Q . .71
16
i1s4. .
J
/
<
12 1
PCO
11 PCI /
10 PC 2 /
9 PC 3 /
FAftfi
+ 5 V
1 6
15
14
I PC 4
PC 5
/
/
13 PC 6 /
1 2
1 1
PC7
/
10
9
T i t 1
IO PORT INTERFACE
C INTERFAC.SCH 2
Date : December 13, 1994lSheet 8 o f 11
|S |4 |3 ^2 ^4 |4 |4 J4
9A6, lOBSfSATO . . 9 ]
105 1027
106 102 6
107 102 5
ENFR_RDY
102 4
2C3 , 4 C 5 , 5C4I / V S Y N C >— CK1/I5< 1
ATDAT fO _ _71
3 A 4 , 4 D 3 , 6 C 5 , 7 C 7 , 8 D 7 , 1 0C2<T"ATDAT [ 0 - -7 ]
2A4|SYSCLK >— C K O / 1 2 14
IOS 13
109 1023 cr.,RV__ • N T
/MEMOUT
1022
1021
U16
1A1 1Y1
1A2 1Y2
1A3 1Y3
1A4 1Y4
I O D B . P D S
2A1 2Y1
MACH210-15
2C3 , 5C4jFIELp~'>— 2A2 2Y2
2 A 4 , 5C4|/ B D R E S >— 2A4 2 Y4

ENFR_RDY
SW SMT-8
4 D5| FR_RDY~>-
/DATENH
7 D A T E N H > 1 0 C 5
/ D A T E N L
/DATENL>IOC5
/DATOUT> IOC5
U12
/LD_PLSE
Dl Ql / L D _ P L S T > 3B6
D2 Q2
\ ATDAT2
D3 Q3
S ATDAT 3
D4 Q4 M A S K E N > 3 C 5
< D5 Q5
D6 Q6
X_ _ C P U D I S P
D7 Q7 CPU D I S P ;
C P U C A P T
D8 Q8 CPU CAPT ,
>CLK
/MEMSEL
/ M E M S E L > 4 C 8
uwg
H/IHS I S T R D
/AGCACC
H I S U W S J
/ H I S T R D ;
/AGCACC;
U13
/CPUACC
/ c P U A C C ; Dl Ql
/ LMR >4C8 D2 Q2
UADD18 ~> 4A8, 9B4 D3 Q3
U A D D 1 7 ~~> 4 A 8 , 9 B 4
UADD16 >4A8,9B4 D4
D5
Q4
Q5
CLRV._INT
> 7C7 D6 Q6
EHFR._RDY
•\ / H I S T W R > 3 B 6 /DAC2CS. * 7B7 D7 Q7
/DAC1CS CLRFR_RDY
/DAC1CS • 7C7 D8 Q8 ^CLRFR,RDY"> 4D8
>CLK
1 1 1 1 1 1 I I I I I I
O O O O O O O O O O O O
5 4 3 2 1 0 4 4 4 4 4 4
7 6 5 4 3 2
107 1041 /' T T L C S ~ > 8 D 7
IOS IO40 / T T L R D ~> 8D7
109 103 9 / T T L W R ~ > 8D7
rs. U14A IO10 103 8 / BTWR ^>6B6
I O l l 1037 /BTRD > 6B6
lOBSfBALE >— CLKO/10 1036
74FC CLK1/I1 17
10B6["LA [ 1 7 . 12
16
/MEMRYSEL
13 CLK3/15
1012 CLK2/14
1013 103 5
1014 103 4
1015 103 3
1016 1032
1017 103 1
I I I I I I I I I I I I
112 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
QO 8 9 0 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 MDECB.PDS
Ql
MACH2 20 - 1 5
Q2
Q3
IKQ5
Q4 \IRQ5 >IOCS
SW SMT-4
Q5
Q6 10B6 / S B H E > —
IRQ7
Q7 4C8,10B6 HIRQ7 > 10C8
4C8,10B6
10C6 SA16 >-
9D8,10B6 HIRQIO > 1 0 B 8
/£ •j / M E M C S 1 6 > 1 0 B S
MRMOFY DECODE & IO CONTROL

nent Huirtber
IOCTRL.SCH
' January 3, 19 9 5 I S h e e t
3 > 3A-i,4D3,6C5,7C7,8D7, 9D2, 10C2
r
ATDAT0 A
*-12V - 1 2 V ATDAT1 A
ATDAT2 A
ATDAT3 A
GND -IOCHK
RESET SD7
+ SV SD6
IRQ9 SD5
-5V SD4
DRQ2 SD3
-12V SD2
-SRDY SD1
+ 12V SDO
GND IOCHRDY
B l l HTT~> 3 A 4 , 4 B 3 . £ C S , 7 C 7 , 8 D 7 , 9 D 2 , 1 0 C 2
-SMEMW AEN
B12
-SMEMR SA19
B1 J
-IOW SA18
-IOR SA17 17 ATDAT14 ,
B15
-DACK3 SA16 ATDAT13 j
__B 1 6 16
DRQ3 SA15 ATDAT12 j
B17 1 S
-DACK1 SA14 1 -\ ATDAT11 j
DRQ1 SA13 13 ATDAT10 ,
RFRSH SA12 1 ?. ATDAT9 ,
BCLK SA11 ATDAT8 ,
I 1
9Al|TKQ7~*>~ IRQ7 SA10
IRQ6 SA9
9Al|TRQ5~>— IRQ5 SA8 9C4j / D A T ^ ; ; H > -
IRQ4 SA7
IRQ3 SA6
-DACK2 SA5
TC SA4
BALE SA3 2> 338. 4B8, SB6,8U7
+ 5V SA2
B3-0 U3
osc SA1
1 8 ATADDO
P. 3 1
HB A L E > 9B8 GND SAO 1A1 1 Y 1
I 6 ATADD1
1A2 1 Y 2
14 ATADD2 /
1A3 1 Y 3
12 ATADD3 /
1A4 1 Y 4
9 AT.ADD 4 /
2A1 2 Y 1
7 ATADD5
2A2 2 Y 2
2A3 2 Y 3
5 ATADD6 /
3 ATADD7
2A4 2 Y 4
p 4
1G
P2
/KEMCS16 P > 3353 , 4 3 3 , 6 B 6 , 3 D 7
9A4| / M E M C S 1 6 " > -HEMCS16 SBHE
-IOCS16 LA23
9A1|IRQ10 > IRQ10 LA22
18 ATADD8
IRQ11 LA21
16 ATADD9
IRQ12 L.A2 0
14 ATADD10
IRQ15 LAI 9
12 ATADD11
I R Q 14 LAI 8
9 ATADD12 /
-DACKO LA17
7 ATADD13 /
DRQO MEMR
MEMVJ
5 ATADD14 /
-DACK5
3 ATADD15
DRQ5 SD8
-DACK6 SD9
DRQ6 SD10
-DACK7 SD1 1
DRQ7 SD12
+ 5V SD13
SD14
SD15
CON AT3SC
ATBUS INTERFACE
Document Number
ATBUS.SCH
December 13, 1994|sheet
T R5^ T R4<
' Wr
Wl via
W2 W3
0 . l u F 10 0 . l u F
m 5! 0 C13 C14
0
"If •7k
4 . 7uF
J4 U91 AGND
0 2 VINO
GND
V+ 16
R61
J5 15 VIDSRC
.R4 8 2 vo AV\— IVIDSRC >7D8
•49.9 0 J6
VIN1
GND V-
14 RES
10
R60
R47 2 VIDSRCFB
75
VIN2
GND
FB
-AM—
AGND SD l12 RES
IT
R4 6
75 VIN3
REF
EN
A l
1 PUSD
MV 1 . 3K
AO
AGND LT1204CS
LT1204
14B1 SRCSEL SRCSELO

14B1 SRCSEL
W4 W6
0 0 h5VA
R52
6BllAGC~> A G C C3
+ 5VA
IK C l l
: l . O U F - CIO 10uF
METALLIZED FILM 0 . l u F
C4
l u F
U62 0 . l u F + 5VA
VCC AGND C5
VCC
R58 C12 VG VCC
VIDSRC VIDSRCB II 0 . l u F J
RES 1 . OuF
R54
12 C L C I -
R57. 0 AGND
+ RG I -
O CERAMIC AXIAL -RG
10 VIDGNA
-AM—'
2K
R5 6
732 VOUT AM * -j V I D G N B > 3D8
-VIN 10
R53
7 C 2 | B P C L M P "> BPCLAMP CLCVREF
-AM-
B P C L M P
I 1
Q l VREF GND
IK 2N7000 -VCC - V C C
R51-< R5 0
7 5 >• 2 0 CLC522AJE
AGND C8 CLC522 C€
SILICONIX
H H O . l u F
C7
0 . l u F
-5VA AGND lOuF
AGND - 5 V A
COMLI NEAR
T i t l e
VIDEO MUX & DC RESTORE
B VIDMUX2. 2
May 1995|Sheet 2 of
W13
R68 0
VIDOFSTFB T R71
TBD L—AM- ^ k
10 io 4 . 7uF
4 .7uF
+ 12VA C21 C23
T R6
R6 9
' — vMw — U92 ^VA
10 VDOFST VINO V+ AGND
4 . 7uF
C19 GND
U82 15 VIDLOUT {vTDLOUT> 4B8
VO
VIDLC VIN1
2 B 2] V I D G N B >- 1 VIN- 14
GND V-
V+ R7 4
R7 2 13 VIDLOUTFB
VIHt
7 VOFST
VIN2 FB
R7 5 -wv—
OFFSET __A AA
R 7
OFFSET I 3 VOUT
^ M ~ GND
5B1| O F F S E T >
-AAA- /BPCLMP 4
S/H
GND VIN3
SD
EN szzr 84S
~C2| / B P C L M P >- 20 HOLD REF A l R73
AO
V-
84 5
LT12 0 4CS
EL4089CS LT1204 AGND
EL4089C
14B1|GAM ON
0 . luF
R70 C31
M—
10
^k
L Z V A
T R663 >12VA
W10 W12 T R6
•—AM
R66
0 0 10 0 . luF M-
L—AM
C25 O . luF W9 win
10
C29
0 ra
4 . 7uF
AD811 4 . 7uF
AGND AD811
R8S R85 U7 3
VDOFSTA U7 5 AGND
VDOFSTB 3
-AM— R62
1
—Wi— R7 8
•AM—
_DLA
75
-AM R83
VIDLCFB 2
AD811JR
348
D6
DIODE SCHOTTKY <^ VGSET
0 . luF
1N5712 /N T R6
/R4 0
R65 C2 8
IK
R82 M MM—
10
^k
4 . 7uF
AGND
R84
R45
499
-MV-
T i t l e
VIDEO OFFSET & LEVELING
Si.:e Document Ni m W e r IREV
B V I D O F F . SCH
D a t: e Kav 5, 19 9 5 S h e e t s of 16
+ 5VA
W18
0
U83D
OP495GS
OP495
AD58 9JR
1 AD589
AGND AGND 10K
T R90 C34
'—W\r—
0 . luF
C37
-If"
U83A lOuF AGND
2
R89
1 OVR
OP495GS
AAA-
OP495 10 ±- C40
AGND C39 Z "* lOuF ADVTp [ 0 | , ? j | ^ y j - p [Q, .9 ] > 8D3 , 9C8
0 . luF
U81
• 5VA 3.6VRHF U85
VRHF D10
3•6VRHS 27 1 23 ADVID9 /
VRHS D9 DO YO
26 ADV8 3 22 ADVID8
D8 Dl Y l
/
25 ADV7 4 21 ADVID7 '
VMSB D7 D2 Y2
24 ADV6 5 20 ADVID6 /
2S DIODE SCHOTTKY D6 D3 Y3
OVRLS 23 ADV5 6 19 ADVID5
'/RLS D5 D4 Y4
/
1N5712 OVRLF 20 ADV4 7 18 ADVID4 /
VRLF D4 D5 Y5
19 ADV3 8 17 ADVID3 /
D3 D6 Y6
18 ADV2 9 16 ADVID2 /
3 P l | V I D L O U T > V I D L O U T
V\V VIN D2 D7 Y7
15 ADVID1
4
VCAL 17 AD V I 10
VCAL Dl D8 Y8
16 ADVO 11 14 ADVIDO
D4 DO D9 Y9
CLK5 13
DIODE SCHOTTKY C41 SLJC
1N5712 0 . luF
15
EN h5V CLK5
4c OC
+ 5VA >CP
DAV
T RR991 GND 74FCT821ATSO
DVDD
10 21 74FCT821
1
—VW WDD DGND
AGND DVDD
AGND DGND
C38 SPT7855SCS : C35 : : C36
O . luF SPT7860 o. luF 0 . luF
8C5ITESTON >-
CLK5
8A6|CLK5~~>
T i t l e
VIDEO A/D CONVERTER
Size Document Number REV
B VIDAD2.SCH 2
Date: J a n u a r y 3, 1995|sheet 4 of 16
^12VA
OFF REF
T Rl(
'—MV
3 .57K U67A
R104
OFF A D J
OP2 9 5GS -AM—
OP295
0 .l u F
T Rl< C51
M M1 0 -
• 5VA lOuF AGND
0 . l u F 1
AGND RFB_OFF
6B7, 13C8, 14D4, 1 5 C 2 < A T D A T f 0 . . 11 ) > ATDAT f 0 111
U7 0
18 -12VA
VDD
R9<
ATDAT11
\
ATDAT10
AT DAT 9
BIT12
BIT11 MM-
BIT10 10 W2 0 W21
ATDAT8 lOuF
BIT9
\ ATDAT7
BIT8
AT DAT 6 C43
BIT7 R102
ATDAT5 10
BIT6
\
ATDAT4
AT DAT 3
11
12
BITS
BIT4 20 0 . l u F
-AM
\ ATDAT2 13 40 . 2 K
BIT3 15pF I '
\ ATDAT1 14 U65A
BIT2
ATDAT0 15 OUT O F F R103 U65D
BIT1
1
14B4
14B4
/ O F F C S ~^>-
/OGWR >-
/OFFCS
/OGWR
16
17
CS-
WR-
•AM— 16 OFFSET
[OFFSET >3C8
OP4 9 5GS 10K 14
OP495 OP495GS
1 OP495
R101 3
AD7545ALP
GND AD7545A 4 .99K
C44
0 .l u F
-12VA
f R9 8 C47
MM-
10
lOuF
AGND
T i t l e
DAC GAIN & OFFSET CONTROL
B OFFDAC. SCH 2
Date : December 15, 19 94 S h e e t 5 o f 16
AGC REF
R145 C172
^—AAV
M—
10
lOuF
+ 12VA C173
T R110
1
—AAA—
3 . 57K R112 U67B
0 . luF
GAIN
W2 2 CONTROL
AGND
6 R105
AGC. ADJ -AAA—
OP295GS 20K
OP295
IK
• 5VA
5C7, 13C8, 14D4, 15C2<~ATDAT f 0 . . I l l >• A T D A T T 0 . .111
VDD
W2 3
ATDAT11 BIT1
\ ATDAT10
BIT1
ATDAT9 BIT1 C50
ATDAT8 BIT9
AT DAT 7 BIT8 19
AT DAT 6 VRE
BIT7 0.OOluF R108
AT DAT 5 10 BIT6
ATDAT3
BIT5
BIT4
-AAA—
ATDAT2 20K
BIT3
ATDAT1 14 BIT2 15pF
\ ATDAT0 15 BIT1 OUT AGC R106 UG5C
AGC_FB R107
14B4 / G A I H C S > /GAINCS 16
CS-
14B4 /OGWR >- / OGWR 17 WR-
OP495GS
10K 12 AAA— {AGC > 2C7
OP495
10
OP4 9 5GS
R i l l OP495
AD754 5ALP
4 . 99K
GND AD754 5
AGND
T i t l e
DAC GAIN & OFFSET CONTROL
Size Document Number RE\J
B GAINDAC.SCH 2
Date: January 3, 1995|sheet 6 of 16|
C54
O . luF
W2 5 W2 4
+ 12VA R114
T R l l7 C60 0 0
MAA- tt- -AAA
0 . luF 681K
C7 0
A D 8 11
U94 7
1r
4.7uF 12
U63
5 /VSYNCI /VSYNCI
VIDSRC 3 AGND RSET VSYNC /VSYNCI . 8C8
2DlfvTbSRC >- 13 FIELDI FIELDI 8C8
6 ODD/EV
HSYNC 15 /HSYNCI /HSYNCI
F I L I N / H S Y N C T > 8C8
AD811JR
2 DETLEV
4 C61 FILOUT RLV
FVID6AC 8 CSYNCO J7 9A
C56 VIDIN C58
-12VA 0 . luF LVOUT •R115 "
10 NOSIG 0 . luF
T R l l ! C71 RF NOSIG 82 . 5K
0 . luF 11 /BPCLMP
BPCLMP
MAA— DGND 7 4ACTQ14
AGND
R l l ^
! . 1K<
R119 EL4583CS
: CM AGND GND
0 . luF EL4583C
-AAA— /BPCLMP
NOSIG >
/BPCLMP>
8C6
3C8
562
U7 9B
/BPCLMP {BPCLMP > 2B8
74ACTQ14
+ 12V U90
LM317LZ
VIN VOUT
A
D C66 R123
R121
C65
0 . luF J LM317LZ
301
lOuF 10
GND + 5V1
C67
R122
909
R124
0.OOluF
4 . 99K SMT FILM
U64
VCOCTRL 24 W C O VDD 20 -5VR
+ 5VR 21
PDEN VDDO
AVDD + 5V1
SOUT 2 C62
14B4 SDATA
14B4 ' SCLK 3 SCLK 0.OluF
14B4 SELN 4 R116 C59
SELN C64 - C69
CP ||
IPRG -vw
51.IK 0-OluF
0.OluF 22uF
R125 15 VCL
100K FINE OUT1
OUT2
CLK- OUT 3
: C68 19 l l :
CLK+ OUT4
0 . luF R120
XTAL/EX
XTAL2
16
-AAA— -TVCLK > 8C8
VSS
EXTFBK VSS
EXTVCO VSS
ICS1522M
ICS1522
INTEGRATED CKT SYS
VIDEO SYNC GENERATOR/PIXEL CLK

B VIDSYNC.SCH 2
Date: December 14 ; 1994|sheet 7 of 16
-I / D V S Y N C ;
^ A D V I D [ Q . .9 3 > 9C8
a
/MRSHSYNC /MRSVSYNC
MRSVDEN /MRSCBLNK
7D2[7HSYNCT>
/MRSRES MRSCPTVID
MRSVID4 /MRSCSYNC
MRSVIDO
5 4 3 2 1 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 MRSVID9
7 6 5 4 3 2
7D2rFTELDI > 104 1

IO4 0
103 9
7D2[/VSYNCT>
1038
1037
103 6 HCAPTVlTJ> 11D8
/DVSYNC /MRSVSYNC
17
/DHSYNC /MRSHSYNC
16 MRSCPTVID
M R S V D E N
14Bir/TPEN CLK3/15
/MRSCSYNC
CLK2/14
/ C B L A M K O /CBLAMKO /MRSCBLNK
103 5
T E S T O N
103 4
103 3
-\ T E S T O N > 4A8
/BRDRES 10 / M R S R E S -AAA-
103 2
103 1
1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3 4 4
1 4 B lj~7 B L A N K ~Z
7 C 2 f N Q S I G Z.
14C4|7BRDRES Z
P A T 10 1
1 0 C 1 , 13 B2| L I H D A T [ 0 . • T ] > ^
- VIDEN "> 11D8

LIHDATQO
LIHDATOl
/DHSYNC LIHPATQ2
] /DHSYNC~> 11D8
LIHDATQ3
LIHDATQ4
LIHDATQ5
LIHDATQ6 CAPTVIDO
LIHDATQ7
LIHDATQ8
LIHDATQ9
/DVSYNCO
/DHSYNCO
DFIELDO
/CSYNCOQ
/CBLANKOO
U59
-AAA— /DVSYNC
DO Y0
/DHSYNC
Dl Y l
47 . 5
D2 Y2
/ C S Y N C O
D3 Y3
R135 /CBLAMKO
HCLK2 >10C8,11DS D4 Y4
D5 Y5
-AAA— D6 Y6
R127 D7 Y7
DS Y8
-wv— D9 Y9
OC
>CP
R128
R131 A D V T D f 0 - - 91
-AAA HCLK5 > 4A8

U60
DO Y0
R142 Dl Y l
D2 Y2
-AAA— HCLK6 >9C8.12B7 D3 Y3
D4 Y4
D5 Y5
D6 Y6
D7 Y7
R136 D8 Y8
D9 Y9
-AAA— ^ C L K 2 > 11D8
OC
>CP X- 26 25
R129
-AM—
SYSCLKA
-AAA— HSYSCLKA> 14B6
47 . S
R133 SYSCLKB
-AAA—
TIMING GENERATION & OUTPUT BUFFERS
ize Document Number
C TIMGEN.SCH
ate : J a n u a r y 9 , 1995|Sheet 8 o f
RT.1 A f 0 . - 1 3 1
13D2<TRL.1A [ 0 - . 13 ]
4 B 2 , 8 D 3 | A D V I D f O . .9] ^ A H Y T P f O . .9]
7 RL1D0
8 RL1D1 V
9 RL1D2 \
10 RL1D3
13 RL1 D4 \
14 RL1DS \
\ RLIA6 15 RL1D6 \
RL1A7 1 6 RL1D7 '•-
\ RL1A8 29 RL1D8 \
3 0 RL1D9 \
3 1 RL1D10
RL1A11 32 RL1D11 \
8A6, 12B7[CLK6 >
\ RL1A12 35 RL1D12
36 RL1D13 \
37 RL1D14 •••••
38 RL1D15 1
\
llDSf/RLl WR>- / R L I vm
/RL1 BLR / R U B L E
/RL1 BHE /RL1_BHE
3> IOCS, 13C2
UPD431016LE-20
GND NEC
14B1|RLUA [0 - 3 j ~ * > J i h S f t i j MT5C64K16A1
U37
1A1 1Y1
1A2 1Y2
1A3 1Y3
1A4 1Y4
2A1 2Y1
2A2 2Y2
R L 2 A 1 4 A
2A3 2Y3
RL2A15 \
2A4 2Y4
/RL1 ATEH /RL1 VIDEN
HD5r7RLl_ATEN >— 1G
/RL2 VIDEN
74F04SC
NATIONAL 74LS244M
74F04 NATIONAL
U15C 74LS244
L> 11D1, 12C7
11D51/RL2 ATEN > /RL2_ATEN H/RL2_VIDEN > 1 1 D 1
74F04SC
NATIONAL
74F04
CURSIVE FILTER LUT 1

REV
llDSlTLlH ATEN~>
NR F D A T [ 0 --1 9 ] > 11B7

8B6, llD8fcXK2~>
HL I H D A T [ 0 . -9 ] > 8 C 5 , 13B2
9C2, 13C2<"RL1D ( 0 U3 9
AO DQ1
LIHDAT1 /
A l DQ2
DQ3
2 RFDAT0 / AT3 /
A3 DQ4
5 RFDAT1 / A4
6 RFDAT2 / A5
9 RFDAT3 / A6
1 2 RFDAT4 / A7
1 5 RFDAT5 / RFDAT10
A8
.6 RFDAT6 / RFDAT11
A9
19 RFDAT7 / RFDAT12
A10
RFDAT13
A l l
RFDAT14
A12
RFDAT15
A13
RFDAT16
A14
RFDAT17
A15
llCirRL2MD [ Q A16
RFDAT19 11
A17
2 RFDAT8 /
5 RFDAT9 <•
CK
12C2rRL2D [ 4 6 RFDAT10 /
9 RFDAT11 / /LIH WRL QE.
WE
12 RFDAT12 /
15 RFDAT13 / MCM62 2 9AWJ2 5
16 RFDAT14 / MOTOROLA
19 RFDAT15 / MT5C1005
U38
L I H D A T 4 /
AO DQ1
LIHDAT5
A l •g2
LIHDAT6 /
A2 DQ3
LIHDAT7
A3 DQ4
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
RFDAT11
A9
RFDAT12
A10
RFDAT13
A l l
18 RFDAT16/ RFDAT14
1 Y 1 A12
16 RFDAT17 /
1 Y 2 A13
14 RFDAT18 /
1 Y 3 A14
12 RFDAT19 / RFDAT17
1 Y 4 A15
9 RFDATJ 7 /
2 Y 1 A16
7 RFDAT': 8 /
2 Y 2 A17
5
2 Y 3
3 x
2 Y 4
RFDAT19 f
/LIH WRL
WE
MCM6229AWJ25
DM74LS244M MOTOROLA
GND NATIONAL MT5C1005
74LS244 U40
LIHDAT8
AO DQ1
LIHDAT9
A l DQ2
A2 DQ3
A3 DQ4
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A l l
RFDAT14
A12
A13
A14
A15
RFDAT18 10
A16
R F D A T 19' 11
A17
CE
/LIH_WRL
1 1 C 5 p ~ L I H . W R tT
/LIH_WRH
1 1 C 5 i 7 " L I H~WRH~I WE
MCM6229AWJ25
MOTOROLA
MT5C1005-25
T i t l e
ALU & LAST IMAGE HOLD LUT
C ALULIH.SCH 2
Date • J a n u a r y 12 , 1995|sheet 10 o f 16
•I / R L 1 W?~> =
\ /RL2_V?T> :
14B4 /-Lines ~>- 4R L 2 A [ 0 . , 1 1] > 12C7

14B4 /RLUT1CS
/RLUT1CS-
14B4 /RLUT2CSJ /RLUT2C5
15C2 ATADDO_ >- /RL2_ATEN
•933.13C8
14A6,15B6 /SBHE >-— /RL1 A T E N
/ RL 1 ATE^ .9BS.13D8
/ L I H _ A T E N
.IOCS,13C8
|4 4 4T3J:
3 1 0 9 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1
14B4(~7MEMSEL>— /MEHSEL 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 /RL2_ENH
1031 1017 / RL2 E5C-: > 13A3 I I I I I I I I I I I I
25 / RL2 ENL
103 2 IOI6 / RL2 > 13A8 O O O O O O OO O O O O
8D3 D F I E L D p 24 / RL 1 ENH 5 4 3 2 1 0 4 4 4 4 4 4
I033 I015 / RL1 > 13BS
8B6/DHSYNCb 23 / RL1 ENL 7 6 5 4 3 2 9B61/RL2 VIDEN-> /RL2_VIDEN
I034 I014 / RL1 y " > -3B3
8D3/DVSYNC; 22 /LIH ENH
103 5 I013 /LIH EJvH > 13A8 107 1041
8A6 7 C L K 2 >— 21 /LIH ENL MXSELO
CLK2/14 I012 /LIH EKL > 13AS IOS IO40
8B6 CLK2 >—- CLK3/I5 20 /MEMWR
13 IO 9 1039 14BlfLUTSEL >—
16 IOIO 1038
I O l l I037
12 CLK0/I0 1036
17 CLK1/I1 CLK1/I1 17
1036 CLK0/I0 12
/RL2_BHE
I037 I O l l
/RL2 B L E
1038 IO10 16
/RL1 BHE
1039 I09 13 CLK3/15
/RL1 B L E /RL2..VICEN
IO40 IOS I012 CLK2/I4
1041 /LIH_WRH
I07 I013 1035
IOI4 1034
I I I I I I I033
I015
O O O O O O I I I I I I
4 4 4 4 4 4 O O O O O O IOI 6 1032
2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 1017 1031
14A6, 15B6[7~v : I I I I I I I I I I I I
FCTRL2.PDS 1 O O O O O O O O O O O O
14A6, 1 •)B6p- 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MACH12 0 - 1 5 • 9 • I A1 I R L 2 M D [~0~^
/LIH_V.'RL MACH12 0
R137 MUXES.PDS
RES
221
/RFBCAS2
/RFBCAS1
/RFBRAS
R138
RES RFBOD12
3 3 2 RFBOD11
RFEOD10
1 2 C 3 , 1 3B2j"R~L2DAT j 0 .
R13 9
RES
22 1
RFBAf 0 .
R140
RES
332
0 C 1 , 1 3 D2| R F D A T [ 0 . . l T T ^ ^ ^ - ? ^ ^
U49
AO DQ1
AO DQ1 A l DQ2
A l DQ2 A2 DQ3
RFDAT2 /
A2 DQ3 A3 DQ4
A3 DQ4 RFDAT4 /
A4 DQ5
A4 DQ5 A5 DQ6
A5 DQ6 A6 DQ7
A6 DQ7 RFDAT? /
A7 DQ8
A7 DQ8 AS.
A8 SQl
SQl SQ2
TR/QE. SQ2 ME/WE SQ3
ME/WE SQ3 SQ4
SQ4 / RFBRAS
PAS SQ5
RAS SQ5 /RFBCAS 2 27
/RFBCAS1 27 CAS SQ6
CAS SQ6 SQl
SQ7 SE SQ8
SE SQ8 SC
SC QSF
QSF DSF
DSF
UPD482234LE-70
UPD4822 34LE-70 GND NEC
NEC MT42C8256
MT42C82 56
U50
8 RFDAT8 /
8 RFDAT8 / AO DQ1
AO DQ1 9 RFDAT9 /
9 RFDAT9 / Al DQ2
A l DQ2 \ RFBA2 10 RFDAT10/
10 RFDAT10 / A2 DQ3
A2 DQ3 \ RFBA3 11 RFDAT11/
11 RFDAT11 / A3 DQ4
A3 DQ4 31 RFDAT12/
31 RFDAT12 / A4 DQ5
A4 DQ5 32 RFDAT13/
32 RFDAT13 / A5 DQ6
A5 DQ6 33 RFDAT14/
3 3 RFDAT14 / A6 DQ7
A6 DQ7 34 RFDAT15/
34 RFDAT 15/" A7 DQ8
A7 DQ8 A8
A8 3 RFBOD8
3 RFBEDS SQl
SQl 4 RFBOD9
4 RFBED9 TR/OE SQ2
TR/OE SQ2 5 RFBOD10
5 RFBED10 ME/WE SQ3
M E / WE SQ3 6 RFBOD11
6 RFBED11 SQ4
SQ4 36 RFBOD12
aaa
36 RFBED12 SQ5
RAS SQ5 /RFBCAS 2 27 37 RFBOD13
/ R F B C A S 1 27 37 RFBED13 CAS SQ6
CAS SQ6 38 RFBOD14
38 RFBED14 SQ7
SQ7 39 RFBOD15
39 RFBED15 SE SQ8
SE SQ8 SC
SC 26 K
26 x
QSF
QSF DSF
DSF
UPD4822 34LE-70
UPD482234LE-70 NEC
NEC
MT42C8256
MT4 2 C 8 2 5 6
asctmsiVE F I L T E R C O N T R O L & B U F F E R
c-jient. Number
F F B U F . S C H
r-a-cej-.ber 16, 1994|sheet 11 o f

9B4, 11D1, 13D2|RL2A [ Q - - 157
.RL2DAT[0. •11CS,12C3,13B2
7 15] >IOCS
RL2 DAT 0 /
a RL2DAT1 /
9 RL2DAT2 / \ RL2DAT0 3
10 RL2 DAT3 / \ RL2DAT1 4
4
13 RL2DAT4 \ RL2DAT2 7
A
14 RL2DAT5 \ RL2DAT3 8
15 RL2DAT6 RL2DAT4 13
1 6 RL2DAT7 RL2DAT5 14
D8
2 9 RL2 DATS RL2 DAT 6 17
A 8 D9
A9 D10
3 0 RL2DAT9 \ RL2DAT7 I S
31 RL 2 DAT10 s
A10 D l l
A l l D12
32
3 5
RL2DAT11
RL2 DAT12 \
\ CLK6 |
l
11
r
L
A12 D13
3 6 RL2DAT13 \
A13 D14
1
37 RL2DAT14 \ 74F374SC
A14 D15
3S RL2DAT15 *s GND NATIONAL
A15 D16
74F374
CE
I I P 5r7~R L 2 _WR >- - »< R L 2 D A T [ 8 . . 15] > 11C5 12C3.13B2
/ RL2_:3LK
J
•Ki,:-: Y ,: i iz.
U56
UPD431016LE-20 DO DO
NEC
D l Ql
MT5C64K1GA1 RL2DAT10
D2 Q2
D3 Q3
RL2DAT12 13
D4 Q4
RL2DAT13 14
D5 QB
K:.-:::AT14 17
D6 QG
RL2 DAT15
D7 Q7
OC
CLK
74F374SC
GND NATIONAL
74F374
R143
RES
2 2 1
8A6|CLK6
R144
RES
332
RECURSIVE FILTER LUT 2

Document Number
RLUT2.SCH
1995 ISheet
11D8, 1 5 C 2 r A T A D P [ I.
4 R L l A [ 0 - -13] > 9C8
HRL2A[0..15] >11D1,12C7
jRFDAT[2.-16 1>10C1,11B7
A
U19 U2 1 U24
1A1 1Y1
18 RL1A0 / \ ATADOl 2
1A1 1Y1
18 RL2A0 / 1A1 1Y1
18 R F D A T 2
y
A
16 RL1A1 / \ ATADD 2 4 16 RL2A1 16 R F D A T 3
1A2 1Y2 1A2 1Y2 1A2 1Y2
1A3 1Y3
14 R L1 A 2 / \ ATATD3 6
1A3 1Y3
14 RL2A2 / 1A3 1Y3
14 R F D A T 4
A
\ ATAPD4
1A4 1Y4
12 R L l A3
A \ ATADD4 8
1A4 1Y4
12 RL2A3
A 1A4 1Y4
12 RFDMTS /
2A1 2Y1
9 RL1A4
A ATATDS 11
2A1 2Y1
9 RL2A4
A 2A1 2Y1
9 R F D A T 6
y
2A2 2Y2
7 RL 1 AS
A • ATATD6 13
2A2 2Y2
7 RL2AS / 2A2 2Y2
7 RFDAT7
A
2A3 2Y3
5 RL1A6 / S ATATD7 IS
2 A3 2Y3
5 RL2A6
A 2A3 2Y3
5 R F D A T 8
A
2A4 2Y4
3 R L l A7 / \ A TA T D 8 17
2A4 2Y4
3 RL2A7 / 2A4 2Y4
3 R F D A T 9 /
/RLl A T E N .
11D5[~7RL1_ATEN~>- 1 G 1G 1G
DM74LS244M DH74LS244M DM7 4 L S 2 4 4 M

NATIONAL NATIONAL NATIONAL
74LS244 74LS244 74LS244
U2 0 U23
1A1 1Y1
2 n RL2A8 / \ ATADD9 2
1A1 1Y1
RFDAT10 /
AZDI C 4 1 G RL2A9 s V ATADD10 •',
1A2 1Y2 1A2 1Y2
k :-~ \
ATD1 1 6 14 RL2A10 / ATADD11 6 R F D A T I 2 /
1A3 1Y3 1A3 1Y3
v. \
RL1A11 / AT A D D 12 S 12 RL2A11 / ATADD12 8
1A4 1Y4 1A4 1Y4
2A1 2Y1 X - AT AZD13 11 9 RL2A12 / \ ATADD13 11
2A1 2Y1
RFDAT14 /
\ ATADD14 • AT ACLM4 13 7 RL2A13 y AT ADD14 13
2A2 2Y2 2A2 2Y2
2 A3 2Y3
AT A~D15 15 5 RL2A14 / ATADD15 1 5
2A3 2Y3
A
-CIS 17 3 RL2A1S
2A4 2Y4 2A4 2Y4
RFDAT16 A
1 G 1G
DM74LS244M DM74LS244M DM7 4 L S 2 4 4 M

NATIONAL NATIONAL NATIONAL
14B4 UADP16 ~> 741,5244 74LS244 74LS244
/RL2 ATEN
13-
11D5 / R L 2 ATE)
/ L I H A T E N / L I H A T E N
11DS
5 C 7 , 6 B 7 , 1 4 D 4 , 1 5 C 2 < A T D A T 1 0 . . 1 5'] ;
•g< R L 1 D [ 0 . j >9C2,10C8
15] >11C5,12C3
; L I H DAT 1 0 . . 9 !~> 8 C 5 , 10C1
18 RL2DATO / 18 LIHDATO
\ ATDAT1 17 RL2DAT1 / 17 LIH DATI /
\ ATDAT2 16 RL2DAT2 / 1 6 L I H DAT 2 /
IS RL2DAT3 A 15 LIHDAT3
y
\ ATDAT4 14 RL2DAT4
y 14 LIHDAT4
A
A
\ A T D A T 5 13 RL2DATS y 13 LIHDAT5
12 RL2DAT6 A 12 LIHDATS
A
1 1 RL2DAT7 •' 11 LIHDAT7 /
/RLl ENL
1 1DS1/RL1 E N L >—
DM74LS245M DM74LS24SM
NATIONAL NATIONAL
74LS24 5 74LS245
RL2DAT9
RL1D10 RL2 D A T 1 0
RL1D11 / 15 RL2 DAT11 /
RL2 D A T 1 2
RI.1D13 y 1 3 RL2DAT13 /
RL2DAT14
RL2 DAT15
/RLl E N H
1 iD5r7RLl_SNH~>—
DM74LS24SM DM74LS245M
NATIONAL 74LS245 NATIONAL
/RL2_ENL 74LS245
1 IDS /RI..2_HM1.-^
/RL2_ENH
1 IDS / RL2~ENiTp
/LIH ENL / L I H _ E H L
1 1D5 / L I H ' ENTT; / L I H._ENH
11D5
/ L I H _ E N H 3
14A4
/ M E M O U T >'
LUT ADDRESS £, D A T A BUFFERS
BUFFERS.SCH
December- 13, 1 9 94 | s h e e t
5C7 , 6B7 , 13CB , 15C2<T"ATDAT [ 0 . . 7 ] ^TPAT10..71
ATADDfO..ISi
1 1 D 8 , 1 5 C 2 r A T A D D [ 0 . . 15 1 ]
U18
\ A T A D D 0 12
AO DQO
1 3 ATDAT0 /
\ A T A D D 1 11 DQ1
14 ATDAT1 /
A l
\ A T A D D 2 10
A2 DQ2
15 ATDAT2 /
\ A T A D D 3 9
A3 DQ3
17 ATDAT3 /
\ A T A D D 4 8
A4 DQ4
i 8 ATDAT4 /
\ A T A D D 5 7
AS DQ5
.1.9 ATDAT5 /
\ A T A D D 6 6
A6 DQ6
20 ATDAT6 /
\ A T A D D 7 5
A7 DQ7
21 ATDAT7 >
\ A T A D D 8 27
A8
7 4 F 3 8 S C \ A T A D D 9 26
A9
lOuF N A T I O N A L \ A T A D D 1 0 23
A10
C A P 7 4 F 3 8 A T '-.DDI 1 25
A l l
X A T A D D 1 2 4
A12
\ A T A D D 1 3 28
A13
\ A T A D D 1 4 29
A14
X A T A D D 1 5 3
A15
U A D D 1 6 2
A16
U A D D 1 7 30
A17
U A D D 1 8 1
A18
/ F S S D C E 1 22
^5 J4 ^4 J4 V.
^4 ^3 ^2 r •-: s D R D 24
OR
/FSSDV.'R 31
WE
14A6, 15C5fSA"[ 0 . . 9 ]
U9 5
102 7
102 6 \ ATADD0 12
AO DQO
13 ATDATO /
102 5 \ ATADD1 11
A l DQ1
1 4 ATDAT1 /
102 4 \ ATADD2 10
A2 DQ2
15 ATDAT2 /
CK1/I5 \ ATADD3 9
A3 DQ3
17 ATDAT3 /
\ ATADD4 8
A4 DQ4
18 ATDAT4 /
14
/SFTRES \ ATADD5 7
A5 DQ5
19 ATDAT5 /
•> 6 20 A T D A T ?
Ab DQ6
102 3 \ ATADD7 5
A7 DQ7
21 ATDAT7 •
/ M E M Q U T ATADD8 27
1022 A8
\ ATADD9 2 6
lSDSfRESET >— 102 1 A9
\ ATADD10 23
A10
\ ATADD11 25
A l l
\ ATADD12 4
A12
\ ATADD13 28
A13
\ AT ADD14 29
A14
IODB.PDS \ ATADD15 3
\
MACH210-15 A15
UADD16 2
A16
MACH210 UADD17 30
A17
UADD 18 1
A18
SW SMT-8 /FSSDCE2 22
/BRDRES /FSSDRD 24 ££
•j / B R D R E S > 8 C 6 , 1 1 D 8 OF
7 4 L S 5 2 1 M /DATENH /FSSDWR 3 1
• .-;:iH> 1 5 C 4 WE
N A T I O N A L /DATENL
7 4 F 5 2 1
•/DATENL>15C4
• /DATQuT> 15C4
/ L I H C S ~ > 11P8
,- R L U T 1 C S
/RLUT1CS > 11D8
/RLUT2CS
/ R L U T 2 C " S > 1 1D8
/ MEMSEI~> 11D8
7B5
SCLK >7B5 ^RLUA!0•.31 ^ R L U A [ 0 . .3] > 9B8
\0__J
S E L N > 7B5
U12
/OGWR >SB7,6B7
/ G A I N C S > 6 B 7 \ A T D A T 0 ?
Dl Ql
\ A T D A T 1 ••; F.THTT&Mfi. T>1
/ O F F C S
UADD18
~> 5B7
i8 , 1 3 C 8 , 14B4 \ A T D A T 2 '/
D2
D3
Q2
Q3
\2_A j L I H U A [ 1 6 . . 1 9 )~> 1 0 B 8
UADD17 J8 , 1 3 C 8 , 14B4 \ A T D A T 3 8
D4 Q4 \3_y
UADD16 S8 , 1 3 C 8 , 14B4 \ A T D A T 4 13
DS Q5
12 LIHUA16 /
\ A T D A T 5 14
D6 Q6
\ A T D A T 6 17
D7 Q7
/ F S 5 D C E 2 \ A T D A T 7 18
D8 Q8
P U A L U > 101
/ L E I J 1
> CLK
/ B R D R E S
7 6 5 4 3 2 CLR
DM74LS273M
O O O O O O O O O O O O NATIONAL
5 4 3 2 1 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 74LS273
7 6 5 4 3 2 U13
/RLUT2CS 60 /FSSDCE1
107 1041 Dl Ql / T P E N > 8 C 8
/ R L U T 1 C S
i Ofl I O 4 0 D2 Q2 / B L A N K ~> 8 C 6
109 1039 D3 Q3 L U T S E L > 1 1 D 1
IO10 1038 D4 Q4
B A L E I N
I O l l 1037 D5 Q5 HcT> ;
lSCSfBALE >—
S Y S C L K A
CLK0/10 103 6 D6 Q6 i~i> ;
8A6fSYSCLKA>— CLK1/I1 17 D7 Q7 RSI >
15B5| L A [ 17 . . 2 3 ] >fa& GAM.. O N
12 D8 Q8 GAM__ON_J> 3C3
• MEi:PYSEL
16 CLK
13 /'BRDRES
C L K 3 / 1 5 CLR
1012 C L K 2 / 1 4
1013 103 5 DM74LS273M
1014 103 4 NATIONAL
1015 103 3 74LS273
1016 103 2
1017 1 0 3 1
1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 MDECB.PDS
MACH22 0 - 1 5
MACH2 2 0
SW D I P - 4
11D8,15B6
15B6
15B6
15C5
14C8,15C5
74LS521M
NATIONAL
74F521
/MEMCS16
/ MEMC S 16~> I^'BB
/MEMQUT 74F38SC
{7MEMOtrF> 13A8
NATIONAL
74F38
MEMORY DECODE & IO CONTROL

Document Number
IOCTRL.SCH
January 12, 1995jsheet
/IORD > 14CS
/IOWR > 14C6
PRESET > 14C6
fl2V -12V
GND -IOCHK
RESET SD7 ATDAT T 0 .15! ATDAT[0..15]>5C7,6B7,13C8,14D4
+ 5V SD6
IRQ9 SD5
-5V SD4 18 ATDAT0 A
DRQ2 SD3 17 ATDAT1 A
-12V SD2 16 ATDAT2 /
-SRDY SD1 IB ATDAT3
+ 12V SDO 14 ATDAT4 A
GND IOCHRDY
Aiq. 13 ATDAT5 A
-SMEMW AEN
~ATT 12 ATDAT6 Â
SA19 11 ATDAT7 A
-SMEMR
- IOR SA17
-DACK3 SA16 -fSA16 > 14A6 1 4 C 4 | / D A ;• :
A16 SA15
DRQ3 SA15
A17 SA14 DM7 4 L S 2 4 5M
-DACK1 SA14
A18 SA13 NATIONAL
DRQ1 SA13
A19 74LS245
RFRSH SA12
BCLK SA11 A.: •
IRQ7 SA10 A21
IRQ6 SA9 A22 ATDAT15 /
IRQ5 SA8 A23 ATDAT14
IRQ4 SA7 A2 4
IRQ3 SA6
A2 6
-DACK2 SA5
TC SA4
A27 WT-Y-'.LI...-,-
A2 3
BALE SA3
A2 9
+ 5V SA2
yB30 A3 0
OSC SA1
^331 A3 1
-j B A L E > 1 4 B 8 GND SAO 1 4 C 4 f / D A T E N H >—
/DATOUT
CON ATS2C
DM74LS245M
NATIONAL
1 74LS245 A T A D D f0 . - T i l
MfiMJLîL&l^ S A [ 0 . . 1 6 ] > 1 4 A 6
L A T17 . . 2 3 !
;ATADD[0 • -15] > 11D8, 13D8, 14D4
L A [ 1 7 . . 23 3 > 14E U9
1A1 1Y1
18 ATADD0 /
1A2 1Y2
16 ATADD1 /
14 ATADD2 /
1A3 1Y3
1A4 1Y4
12 ATADD3 /
2A1 2Y1
9 ATADD4 /
{ y S B H E T > 11D8, L4A6 7 ATADD5 /
1 4 A i r ? ~ M E M C S l 6~^>
/MEMCS16 /SBHE p 2A2 2Y2
5 ATADD6 /
-MEMCS16 -SBHE 2A3 2Y3
-IOCS16 LA2 3 3 ATADD7 /
2A4 2Y4
IRQ10 LA2 2
IRQ 11 LA21 1G
I R Q 12 LA2 0
IRQ1 5 LAI 9
IRQ14 LAI 8 1 DM74LS244M
-DACKO LA17 GND NATIONAL
C 9
DRQO -MEMR ~~> 11c 74LS244
C1Q
-DACK5 -MEMW
DRQ5 SD8
CI I
C12
3 ire U10
-DACK6 SD9 1A1
CI3 1Y1
DRQ6 SD10 1A2 1Y2
CI 4 1A3
-DACK7 SD11 1Y3
C15 1A4
DRQ7 SD12 1Y4
CI 6
+ 5V SD13 2A1 2Y1
.D17 C17
-MASTER SD14 2A2 2Y2
*D18 C18 ATADD14
GND SD15 2A3 2Y3
2A4 2Y4
CON AT3 6C
1 G
1 DM74LS244M
GND NATIONAL
74LS244
AT BUS INTERFACE
ATBUS.SCH
Date: January 3, 1995|sheet 15 o f
FB4 U9 6
L M 7 8 0 5CT
-a—
C157
0 . luF
C A P NP
C166
lOuF
CAP E
C1S5
0.luF
CAP NP
C168
lOuF
CAP P
T C169
luF
-a- C170
lOuF
CAP P
CAP NP
FB5 74F04SC
NATIONAL
-a— 74F04
U14C
C156 C167
0 . luF lOuF
CAP NP CAP E 74F04SC
NATIONAL 7 4ACTQ14
74F04
U14D U79D
74F04SC 74F04SC
NATIONAL 74ACTQ14 NATIONAL
74F04 74F04
U14E U7 9E U15E
74F04SC 74F04SC 74F38SC

NATIONAL 7 4ACTQ14 NATIONAL NATIONAL 74F3 a
74F04 74F04 U 1 6 D
U14F U79F U15F
74F04SC 74F04SC 74F38SC

C161 C162 C163 C159 C158 NATIONAL NATIONAL GND NATIONAL
22uF 22uF 2 2uF 22uF 22uF 74F04 74F04 74F38
CAP P CAP E CAP £ CAP P CAP
J i i x i — i — i — i — i — r
= p C75 =p C76
T_
=p C77
C7 8
0 . luF
I±= CAP NP
I
-- 1
C79 =p C80 C81 =±Z C82 == C83 = p C84 = p C85 == C86 Z±Z
CSS
0 - l u F
CAP NP I
C87 —r— C89 —
—
j C90 r
1 CAP
C91
o.iu
0.luF 0.luF 0.luF
| CAP NP ^ CAP NP I CAP NP [ O.luF
CAP NP ^
0.luF
CAP NP j,
O.luF
CAP NP j
O.luF
CAP NP ^
O.luF
CAP NP ^
0.luF
CAP NP |
0.luF
CAP NP ^
O.luF
CAP NP ^
0.luF
CAP NP
0.luF
1 CAP NP I CAP
0 . l u
= L C109
T C106 i — i — i — r I r x C99 X X C97 X X C95 I 1 1
0 . l u F =±I C105 =p C104 C103 r±r
C102 C101
C94 =rr: C93 =J= C92
0.luF
X x XI X X X 0.luF
I
Z±Z
XI XI
C . l u F luF luF luF
j CAP NP I CAP NP 0.luF 0.luF 0.luF CAP NP CAP NP CAP NP CAP NP
j CAP NP I I
CAP NP CAP NP
CAP NP CAP NP |
0.luF 0.luF 0.lu
CAP NP \ CAP NP I CAP
i „ 1 j
T C113 C I
0
14
I
=±= C115
1 C116 =p
1 C117
1 C118
1
= p C119
1
=p C120
1
=p C121
1 = p C122
C123 : C 1 2 4
X 125 T C126 1 C127
1 L- X X w V— X X X j i UX.S , l_ l u F . l u F —p- =ZZ i_ l u F 0.luF uF
Xii
luF luF
I
O.luF
I
O.luF
I
O.luF C0 A P NP C A P U P
|
0.luF
CAP NP I
0.luF
CAP NP ^
G.luF
CAP MP
0.luF
CAP NP [
0.luF
CAP MP [
0.luF
CAP NP [
0.luF
CAP NP ^
O.luF
CAP NP j C C0 A P N P CAP NP AP NP
T °CAP NP
J
CAP NP CAP NP CAP NP [ C.
St!
I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 XXXXXTXXX^ X i — x — I
XI
C146 C147 C13 9 C136 C132 C129 C128
C131 C130
C 1 4 0 C137
—
I
/— 1 A C
—I— C 1 4 5
0.luF
CAP NP [
— r~. Il Au cF
.— CAP
k_ X <i NP
-0.luF
CAP NP
D
I
1
i—
1 CAP
- l1u AF -I
l„ X fl NP
0.luF
/
— — r-~ 1
—j— l_ X 'i £
CAP NP \ CAP NP ^
1
0.luF
A1 — f 1 A 1
•— <_ X 1 X
1
0.luF
CAP NP j,
1
1
C A P
0.luF
l ur~F 1 A r\
l_ X t UN P
CAP HP ^
—
1—CAP
l u fF 1 T
1_ X JNP
1
0.luF
CAP NP [
i>
n
1 t_ X JS «
1
0.luF
CAP NP [
—•— L i < i
0.luF
CAP NP J,
._ t_X JS q,
O.luF
CAP NP [
._ U l »
0.luF
CAP NP ^
—.—
luF
Jb
CAPL INP
0.luF
CAP NP ^ C.
1CAP
0
l_" NP
. luF . l u F
CAP NP I 0.luF
CAP NP
—r—
I
0.luF
CAP NP
—p-
I
0 . luF
CAP NP
0.luF
CAP NP
x=F— X
C149 d= C148
X C143 ~= C144
I
0.luF
CAP NP ^
0.luF
CAP NP X 0.luF
CAP NP I
O.luF
CAP NP
POWER,DECOUPLING & SPARES

went Number
Size Do
POWER.SCH
J a n u a r y J . 199S;Shegt
SECTION 8.3
UPS2000 SCHEMATICS
D I M E N S I O N S IN I N C H E S
11.000
10.750
7.200 T4
UPSDAU2
LAYER 1
R28 i
U7 US
ui< uu
11 , ,S ,
• L _ l U17
• C D
-\ r
E23
•» r i
• U15 L J l_
Ult UU
J L u* wo
w wo
•
4.500 BtS H21
, • LZ
"1 I I 4.100
R24 uia
R23
U25 U24
.2501 ®
.250H5F Ifli
6.300
+ 5V
+ 5V
Z0~> <
^ V 2 Q [ Q . .9 ] >3C8 ATDAT ro
6D6,7B7, 8C8< A T P A T [0 , . 15]
\_
M V 3 Q [0 • -9 ] > 3C4
ATDAT12
ATDAT13
IOCHRDY._D
7B2| I O C H R P Y P^>-
EMOUTMUX
EHSMPREG
ENSCROLL
ENPAULSB
V1DKN3 43
V I D E N 3 4 3 ~ > 4C7, 6C2
DISPVID343
DISPVID343 >4D7,7C7,8A8
/H5YNC343 >4C7,7C7
Z0~> A 7P2 , 8B8|ACTZ.1024 >

ACTZ102 4
LHRTXFR
ENPANLSB
ENSCROLL
ENSNPREG
ENOUTMUX
SBirVAO [0 - -9 ]
VIDEM170
DISPVID170 V I D E N 1 7 F > 4P7 ,7B7 , 8A8
DISPVTD170 >4C7,7A7,8A8
/HSYNC17 0
FIELD170 / H S Y N C 1 7 0 > 4D7
F I E L D 1 7 0 > 4D7,7A7, 8B8
VIDEN Z
VIDEN_2T> 7B7 , 8A8
DISPVID_Z
PIS P V I D _ Z > 7A7 , 8A8
/CSYNC_170_Z
/CSYNC. 170 Z > 7A7
/BRDRES
/BRDRES > 4P7, 6C5,7C7,8B8
/CLK170D2
•j/CLK170D2 > 7A7 , 8A8
V R r 9 1
S B l j V B O [0 . . 9 ]~ " °-
CLK170D1
HCLK17 0 D 1 > 3 C 8 , 4C7
/ C L K 1 7 GDI
^/CLK17D10 >3C8,4C7
HCLK343^> 4C7, 6C8,8D8

CI.K17 0D2
j C L K 1 7 0 D 2 > 7A7 , 8B8 , 9C4
R2 6
221
CLK170D1 /CLK170D1 CLK170D2 /CLK170D2
R27 R29
332 332
9D2|V3 I [ 0 . . 9 ]
BOARD TO BOARD INTERCONNECT

PCONNECT.SCH
May 5, 1995|Sheet
mir\ Yi?rvrr°M?i | B U F 1 VD A T [O..9I > 5 p 8
2 D 6 | V 2 O [ 0 . .9] pmOM* >V BUF7, YPftTrq,,S) fBUF2_VPAT[0..9) > 5B8
BUF1_VDAT0 / 16 B U F 2 VPATO /
DO QO
BUF1_VDAT1 BUF2 VPAT1 /
Dl Ql BUF2_VPAT2 /
BUF1_VDAT2
D2 Q2 BUF2_VDAT3 /
BUF1 VPAT3
D3 Q3
BUF1_.VDAT4 5UF2 VDAT4 /
D4 Q4
BUF1..VDAT5 BUF2_VDAT5
P5 Q5
BUF1VDAT6 BUF2_VDAT6
D6 Q6
BUF1_VDAT7 3UF2_VDAT7
BUF1 VDAT8
D7
Q~ BUF2 VDAT8 /
QB
D8
/FFRE B l /FFRE_B2
tzaaj
4D3|'/FFRE_B1 >— REN1 ] •\ / I F F S F _ B 1 > 4 C 7 4B3|/FFRE_B2 > REN1 EF \ /IFFEF_D2 > 4B7
tIFFEF_B2
REN2 1 REN2 FF
/CLK17QD1 / I F F A E F J l /CLK170P1 'IFFAEF_B2
2A7r/CLK17 O P Q - RCLK P, H/IFFAEF_B1 > 4C7 RCLK PAE \/IFFAEF B2 > 4 A 7
P. PAF
iX
4 D 3 [ " 7 F F W E _ B 1 >— WEN1 4B3j7F"FWE_B2 > ~ WEN1
WEN2/LD WEN2/LD
CLK170D1 CLK170D1
2 A 7 r C L " K 1 7 0 D l >— WCLK WCLK
/FFR5 B l /FFRS..B2
4D3r7F*FRS_Bl >- 433| / F F R S _ B 2 > — RS
OE
IDT72221L12J IDT72221L12J
\V2Q9 BUF1_VDAT9
DO QO
1 6 3 U F 2 . . V D A T 9 /*
Dl Ql DO QO
D2 Q2 Dl Ql
D3 Q3 D2 Q2
D4 Q4 D3 Q3
D5 Q5 D4 Q4
D6 Q6 D5 Q5
D7 Q7 D6 Q6
DS Q8 D7 Q7
D8 ' Q8
/ F F R E B l
REN1 EF
/FFRE_B2
REN2 FF REN1 EF
/CLK170D1
RCLK PAE REN 2 FF
/CLK170D1
PAF RCLK PAE
/ FFWE_. B l
WEN1 PAF
WEN2 / L D WEN1
CLK170D1
WCLK WEN2/LD
CLK170D1
WCLK
RS
/FFRS_B2
OE RS
OE
IDT72221L12J
IDT72221L12J
VIDEO INPUT
Tient Number
VIN.SCH
1995[Sheet
V I D E N L 7 0
2B7,7B7,8A8 VIDEN17"F>-
2B7,6C5,7C7,BBS /BRDRKS>-
D I S P V I D 3 4 3
2C7,7C7,8A8 DTSPV.I.D343 >-
2B7 /HSYNC170 >-—
FIELD170
2 B 7 , 7 A 7 , SB: F I B L D 1 7 0 >-
/RAS_BUF1
/ RAS B U F 1 > 5D7
/FFVJE B l
7FFWE_B1 > 3C8
/TROE BUF1
/ T R O E Z B U F I > 5D7
/ICAD_BUF1
/FFRS_B1
/ICAD_BUF1
i _ > •E5 D 7
r>:
/FFRS_B
/FFRE . B l
/FFRE_B
R19
/CAS1 BF1 /CAS1.BUF1
•
j / C A S 1 _ 3 U F 1 > 5D!i
R2 0 2 6.1
/CAS0_BF1 /CAS0_BUF1
•j/CASO BUF1 > 5D7
{7SNPFFWE> 8D8
B U F 1 A D D f 0 . .81
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 4BUF1ADD[0..8] >5D8
/ / / / / / / / 5 / / / / / / / /
o o o o o o o o O O O O O O O O
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 6 6 6 6 S 5 5 5
3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6
1/08
/CAS1 BF1 BUF1ADD4
1/09 1/055
BUF1ADD5 R2 3
I/O10 1/054
/IFFEF_B1 BUF1ADD7 SC0_BUF1
3 C 5 r / I F F E F Bl~>— I / O l l 1/053 •jSC0_BUFl~> 5C7
1/012 1/052 — 1
26.1
69 /ENO0 BUF1
1/013 1/051
DISPVID17Q 68 /ENOl BUF1
2B7,7A7,8A8 DISPVID170 ^ 1/014 I/O50 / E M Q 1 _ B U F
VIDEN343 67
2 C 7 V I D E N 3 4 3 >— 1/015 1/049 v
/CLK170D1 66 R
BUF1ADD3 /
2A7 /CLK17 0D1*>- CLK0/I0 I/048
65 x
CLK3/14
CLK17QD1
2 A 7 I C L K 1 7 Q D 1 >— CLK1/I1
62 CLK343
2D61MX2SC1 >-— 1/016 CLK2/I3
/ICAD_BUF1
I/017 1/047
1/018 1/046
2D6fMX2SCQ >— 1/019 1/045
/FFWE_Bl
I/O20 1/044
1/021 1/043
/RAS_BUF1 B U F 1 A D D 1
1/022 1/042
BUF1ADD0
1/023 1/041
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I/O40
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
MACH435-15JC 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
UPSVRAM
HSC1_BUF1~> 5C5
/IFFAEF..B1
2 A 7 f c X K 3 43 >-
V I D E N 1 7 0
DISPVID343
FIELD17Q
/RAS_BUF2
/RAS. B U F 2 > 5 B 7
/FFWE..B2
/FFWE_B2 > 3C4
/TROE...BUF2
/TROE~BUF2 > 5 B 7
/ICAD_BUF2
/ I C A D Z B U F 2 > 5 B 7
/FFRS_B2
/FFRS~B2 > 3C4
/FFRE B2
/ F F R E B 2 > 3 C 4
/CAS1 BF2 /CAS1_BUF2
H/CAS1_BUF2 > 5 B 5
R2 1
-Wi—
/CASO BF2 /CAS0_BUF2
\ /CAS0_BUF2 > 5B7
RTTFS&nnrn. RH
HB U F 2 A D D [ 0 . .8T~> 5B8
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
/ / / / / / / / 5 / / / / / / / /
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 6 6 6 6 5 5 5 5
3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6
I/OS
/CAS1 BF2 73 BUF2ADD4 /
1/09 I/OS5
72 BUF2ADD5 / R2 4
I/O10 1/054
/IFFEF B2 71 BUF2ADD7 / AAA SCO BUF2 r
3 C 2 r 7 l F F E F . . . B 2 ~>— I / O l l 1/053 SCO BUF2~> 5B7
ill
1 / 0 1 2 1/052 7 0 SCL0 BUF2
1 / 0 1 3 1/051 69 /ENO0 BUF2 i
DISPVID170
1 / 0 1 4 I/O50 68 /ENOl BUF2 26.1 f
VIDEN343
1 / 0 1 5 1/049 67 v
/CLK170D1
C L K O / I O I/048 66 * BUF2ADD3 /
65
CLK3/I4
CLK1/I1
2 C7| 1-1X3 S C 1 "> 1/016 CLK2/I3
/ICAD_BUF2
1/017 1/047
/TROE_BUF2
1/018 1/046
2C7fMX3SC0 >- 1/019 1/045
/FFWE_B2
I/O20 1/044
1/021 1/043
/RAS BUF2 BUF2ADD1
1/022 1/042
BUF2ADD0
1/023 1/041
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
MACH435-15JC 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
UPSVRAM 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/HSYNC343
4SC1_.BUF2 > 5B5

/IFFAEF_B2
3C2| / I F F A E F _ B 2 ~ > -
VIDEO BUFFER CONTROLLER

VBCNTRL.SCH
te: May 5, 1995jsheet
BtfFl PfiBfBll?! IBUF1 OSDIQ..91 >6D8
BUF1 ESPfO..91
B U F 1 _ E S D [ 0 . . 9~] > 6 C 8
A T f q 1
3 C 2 | B U F 1 _ V P A T [ Q . .9] ^ fflffl Y R "
4D3| B U F 1 A D D [ 0 . . 8 ] > B U F ] A D D [0
- - a
1
\BUF1ADD0 BUF1_VPAT0 BIJ F I ADDO

AO DQ1 AO DQ1
\BUF1ADD1 BUF1. VDAT1 / , BUF i A c m BUF1_VDAT1
A l DQ2 A l DQ2
\BUF1ADD2 BUF1 VDAT 2 \ B U K 1AU-;: 10 BUF1_VDAT2 /
A2 DQ3 A2 DQ3
.BUF1ADD3 BUF1..VPAT3 / BUF1 VPAT3 /
A3 DQ4 A3 PQ4
\BUF1ADD4 BUF1 VPAT4 y BUF1ADD4 BUF1_.VDAT4 /
A4 DQ5 A4 PQ5
BUF1ADD5 BUF1 VDAT5 XBUF1ADD5 BUF1_VDAT5
A5 DQ6 AS DQ6
. BUF1ADD6 BUF1_VDAT6 \BUF1ADDS 33 BUF1_VDAT6 /
A6 DQ7 A6 DQ7
\BUF1ADD7 BUF1_VDAT7 \BUF1ADD7 34 B U F 1 . _V P A T 7 /
A7 DQ8 A7 DQ8
\BUF1ADD8 . BUF1ADDS
AS AS
BUF1 OSPQ BUF1..ESP0
/TROE_BUFl SQl SQl
4D3pTROE...BUF BUF1_QSD1 /TROE...BUF1 B U F 1 .ESDI
TR/OE SQ2 TR/OE SQ2
/ ICAD._BUF1 BUF1..Q5D2 /ICAD_BUF1 BUF1 ESP2
4D3|/ICAD BUF ME/WE SQ3 ME/WE SQ3
BUF1.OSD3 BUF1_ESP3
SQ4 SQ4
4 D 3 I / R A S _ B U F 1 >- /RAS B U F 1 BUF1 OSD4 /RAS B U F 1 BUF1 ESP4
RA,S SQ5 RAS SQ5
/CASO B U F 1 27 BUF1 OSD5 /CAS1 BUF1 BUF1 ESPS
4D3|7 C"A50_BUF1^>-
7
CAS SQ6 4D3{7CAS1_BUFT~>- CAS SQ6
BUFl_OSD6 BUF1_ESP6
SQ7 SQ7
BUFl_OSD7 BUF1_ESP7
SE SQ8 SE SQ8
SCO_.BUFl SC1BOF1
4C3|SC0 BUFl">- SC 4C3fSC"l_BUFl y— SC
QSF QSF
DSF DSF
U P D 4 82 234 L E - 7 0 UPD482234LE-70
U6
. BUF1ADDO BUF1 VDAT'3 \ B U F 1 AOL' 8 BUF1....VDAT8 /
.BUF1ACPI AO DQ1 AO DQ1
Al DQ2 .BUF1ADD1 BUF1_VDAT9 /
, BUF1ADD2 HiiFi Ann? Al DQ2
DQ3
,&>jy \ A DP 3
A3 DQ4 BUF1 VDAT 9 f . BUF1ADD3
A2 DQ3
A3 DQ4
A4 XBUF1ADD4
\BUF1ADD5 A4 DQ5
AS DQ6 , BUF1ADDS
. BUF1ADD6 AS DQ6
A6 DQ7 , BUF1ADD6
.BUF1APP7 A6 DQ7
A 7 DQ8 . BUF1ADD7
^BUFIAPPS A7 DQ8
AS \BUF1ADDS
BUFl_OSD8 AS
SQl BUF1_ESD8
/TROE_.BUFI BUFl_OSP9 SQl
TR/QE SQ2 /TROE..BUF1 BUF1_ESD9
/ I CAP
TR/QE SQ2
ME/WE SQ3 /ICAD_BUF1
BUF1 ME/WE SQ3
SQ4 SQ4
/ RAS BUFl
r r l RAS SQ5 /RAS BUF1
RAS SQ5
/CASO_BUFl CAS SQ6 /CASI_HU:---!
CAS SQ6
SQ7 SQ7
SE SQ8 SE SQ8
SCO BUF1 SC1 BUF1
SC SC
QSF QSF
PSF DSF
UPD482234LE-70 UPD482234LE-70
BUF2 QSP.O..91
| B U F 2 _ O S D [ 0 . .9 ] > 6 B 8
3C2|~BUF2 VPATj0..9]
BBSS
RUF-?APnm
v n a T rn q1
BVFg BSP f WI I ?1 TBUF2. E S D I O . - 9] > 6B8
4B3rBUF2APP {0 .. 8 ) > R 1
BUF2APP0
AO DQ1
8 BUF2 VDATO / S. B U F 2 A D D O
AO PQ1
8 BUF 2 VDATO /
\BUF2APP1 9 BUF2 VDAT1 / \HUF2ADU]
A l DQ2 A l PQ2
9 BUF2 VDAT1 /
\BUF2APP2 10 BUF2 VDAT2
A2 DQ3 \BUF2APP2
A2 DQ3
10 BUF2 VDAT2 /
.BUF2ADD3
A
11 BUF2 VDAT3 \BUF2ADD3 11 BUF2 VDAT 3
A3 DQ4 A3 DQ4
. BUF2ADD4
A4 DQ5
31 BUF2 VDAT-1 / BUF2ADD4 31 BUF2 VDAT 4 /
.BUF2ADD5 32 BUF2 VPATIj A4 DQ5
AS DQ6 . BUF2ADDS 32 BUF2 VDAT 5 /
A5' DQ6
. BUF2ADDG
A6 DQ7
33 BUF2 VDAT 6 / BUF2ADD6
A6
33 BUF2 VDAT 6 /
. BUF2ADP7 34 BUF2 V PA T 7 DQ7
A7 DQ8 . BUF2ADD7
A7 DQ8
34 BUF2 VDAT 7 /
\ B U F 2 A: _ BUF2ADD8
AS A8
SQl
3 BUF2 OSDO / 3 BUF 2 ESDO /
/TROE BUF2 SQl
1 /TROE BUF2 " TR/OE SQ2
4 BUF2 o s PI / /TROE BUF 2 4 BUF2 ESDI /
/ICAD_BUF2 TR/QE SQ2
I/ICAD BUF2 ' ME/WE SQ3
5 BUF2 OSD2 / /ICAD BUF2 5 BUF 2 ESD2 /
6 ME/WE SQ3
SQ4
BUF2 OSD3 / 6 BUF2 ESD3 /
/RAS_BUF2 SQ4
1 / R A S 3 U F 2 >- RAS SQ5
36 BUF2 OSD4 / /RAS BUF2 36 BUF 2 ESD4 /
/CASO BUF2 27 RAS SQ5
I/ CASO BUF2 v
CAS SQ6
37 BUF2 OSP5 / 37 BUF2 ESD5 /
4B3r7c"ASl_BUF"2~^
SQl
38 BUF2 OSD6 / /CASI Ti-jr.-. CAS SQ6
38 BUF 2 ESD6 /
BUF 2 OSD7 SQl
SE SQ8
39 / 39 BUF 2 ESD7
S C 0 B U F 2 SE SQ8
4 B 3 r s c " 0 _ B U F 2 \>- SC 4A3|SC1_BUF2 > SCI BUF2
26 SC
QSF x 26 x
QSF
DSF DSF
U P P 4 822 34 L E - 7 0 UPD482234LE-70
±~3
\BUF2ADDO B UF 2 _VDAT \BUF2ADP0 BUF2_VDAT8
AO DQ1 AO DQ1
\BUF2ADD1 BUF2. VDAT s, B U F 2 A D D 1 BUF2^VPAT9 /
A l DQ2 A l DQ2
.BUF2ADD2 \ B U F 2ADD2
A2 DQ3 A2 DQ3
. BUF2ADD3 \BUF2ADD3
A3 DQ4 A3 DQ4
BUF2ADD4 .BUF2ADD4
A4 PQ5 A4 DQ5
\BUF2ADD5 \BUF2ADDS
A5 DQ6 AS DQ6
\BUF2ADDS . BUF2ADD6
A6 DQ7 A6 DQ7
BUF2ADP7 \BUF2ADD7
. BUF2AP1J3 A7 DQ8 A7 DQ8
A3 \BUF2ADDS
3 BUF2 QSD8 AS
SQl BUF2 ESPS
/TROE _BUF2 BUF2_OSD9 SQl
/ICAP BUF2 TP/og SQ2 /TROE, B U F 2
jER/OE SQ2
BUF2_ESD9
M E / WE SQ3 1 CAD _BUF2
M E /WE SQ3
SQ4 SQ4
RAS SQ5 /RAS BUF2
/CAS0_BUF2 RAS SQS
CAS /CASI BUF 2
CAS SQ6
SQ7 SQ7
SE SQ8 SE SQ8
SCO_BUF2 SCI BUF 2
SC SC
QSF QSF
DSF DSF
UPP482234LE-70 UPD482234LE-70
VIDEO BUFFER
t Number
VIDBUF.SCH
January 10, 1995|sheet
2P4 , 6D6 , 7 B 7 , 8 C 8 < T A T D A T [4 . .5 ] > M ^ i C D A
X l A M ^ L
A T P A T T 0 . .21
2 P 4 , 6 D 6 , 7 B 7 , 8 C 8 < A T P A T [ 0 . ."2~f"
\ I\ ATDAT 5
\ ATDAT4
i\_
U
5 D l | B u F l _ O S D [ 0 . .9 ) > I s F 1
[ 0 ,.,,9,1 \_
\_
BUF1..O5D0
BUF1...QSD1
BUF1 OSD2 • /VB3XMT> 2D4
BUFl_OSP3 / V B 3 R C V > 2D4
BUF1 OS:;4 2 B 7 , 4 D 7 , 7 C 7 , 8B8| / B R D R E S >- • /SNPXMT> 7C2
BUF1 OSD5
BUFl_OSD6 , - R2nrn Qi
BUFl_OSD7
BUFl_OSD8
BUF1 OSD9
/ENOO_BUF1
4C3I / E N O 0 _ B U F " l ~ > - X c
2A7|CLK3 43 > — — —
4
IPT74FCT821ASO
0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
/ / / / / / / / 5 / // // // /
OOOO O O OO OOOOOOOO
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 6 6 6 6 5 5 5 5
\ BUF1 ESDO 2
I/OS
3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6
X BUF1 ESDI 3
X BUF1 ESD2 4 1/09 1/055
BUF1 ESP3 5 I/O10 1/054
X
BUF1 ESP4 6 I / O l l 1/053
X
BUF1 ESPS 7 1/012 I/OS2
X
X BUF1 EED6 8 1/013 1/051
f\ BUF1 ESP7 9 1/014 I/O50 —< L U S L I O I 2C2
BUF1 ESD8 10 1/015 1/049
X 2 C 21 L U S I , 2 Q ~ > - ENOUTMUX
CLK0/I0 1/048 —< EN<:••" ] 2C2
N BUF1 ESD9 11
CLK3/I4
PISPVIP343
-< P I gP V I P 3 4 3
/ENOl BUF1 • -••<.BUF I O W
4C3I/ENQ1 BUF"l~>— C CLK1/I1
CLK34 3 13
1/016 CLK2/13 YlWnfflu?! |vSNPO l 0 ..9] >8D8
1/017 1/047
1/018 1/046
IPT7 4FCT8 21ASO 1/019 I/045
I/O20 1/044
1/021 1/043
5 B 1 | B U F 2 _ O S D [ 0 . .9] J B H B 22012—21 1/022 1/042
1/023 1/041
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
BUF2 OSPO 23 B2D0 / OOOOOOOO O O O O O O O O
BUF2 OSD1 22 B2P1 / 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
BUF2_.Q:.-.i .-J: 21 B2P2 / MACH435-15JC
BUF2_OSU3 20 B2D3 /
BUF2_OSP4 19 B2D4 / VMUX2
BUF2 OSD5 /
[
18 B2D .i
BUF2 OSD6 17 B2P6 / V R n r 0
- q 1
HVBO[0. .9] > 2B4
\ BUF2_OSD7 16 B2D7 /
\ BUF2_OSP8 15 B2P8 /
BUF2_OSP9 14 B2P9 /
/ENO0_BUF2
4B3r7ENO0_BUF'2~~>-
IPT74FCT821ASO
5 B 1 | B U F 2 . E S P [ 0 . . T T ^ PlfPjj flffT? [ft' s

VAO f Q .
3> 2B4
BUF2_ESP0 23 B2D0 /
BUF2_.ESD1 22 B2P1 /
3I.JF2._ESD2 21 B2P2 /
BUF2 ESD3 20 B2D3 / VAO 6 /
BUF2 ESD4 19 R2IM / VAQ7 /
BUF2_BSD5 18 B2D5 / VAO 8 /
BUF2_ESD6 17 B2P6 / VAO 9 /
BUF2. E S P 7 16 B2P7 / VAO0 /
BUF2 ESD8 15 H2 1)3 / VAOl /
BUF2_ESP9 14 B2D9 VAO 2 /
VAO 3 /
/ENOl BUF2 VAO 4 /
4B31 / E N O l BUF~2~>^
VAO 5 /*
IPT74FCT821ASO
VIDEO OUTPUT MUX

Size Document Numbe
VMUX2.SCH
1995lSheet
ACTFREEZ
-ACTFREEZ'
ACTZ1024
-ACTZ1024 >2C4,
ACTRSTAD
- ACTRSTAD> 8AS
/TR_OEl
-SMPQRAD;
R 1 7
/SNPCAS Q
\/SNPCAS0 > 9D8
/SNPCS1 / SNPCAS 1 1 /SNPCAST7> 9B8
/SNPFFRE
/SNPFFRE > 8 D 8
S E T I C A D >'8A8
/SNPRAS Q
/SNPRAS0>9D8
/SNPRAS1
/ S N P R A S X > 9B8
/SNPWEl"759B8
SNPIRAD
SNPIRAD> BBS
SNPICAD
2 B 7 , 4 D 7 , 6 C 5 , 8B8| / B R D R E S >— ENOCAD_ZM

ENQCAD ZM > 8BS
ICADD 511 ORADODD
SNPCNTO > 8A2
0 9 S 7 6 5 4 3
/ / / / / / / / 5 / / / / / / / /
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 6 6 6 6 5 5 5 5
/SNPFFRE 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6
I/OS
/SNPCS1
1/09 1/055 /SNPWEO> 9D8
/SNPCSO /SNP EOUTO
I/O10 1/054 /SNP_BQUTQ >9C4
SNPOCAD
I / O l l 1/053 S N P O C A D > 8B8
SNPORAD /SNPXMT
1/012 1/052 < /SNPXMTl 6C2
RSTICAD LSNPDAT
1/013 1/051 |LSNPDAT > 8A2
1/014 I/O50
/TR_OEl
1/015 1/049
ENSNPREG
2C2] ENSNPREG~">— C1K0/I0 1/048 {TCAST^T^ 8B8
CLK170D2
CLK3/I4
CLK1/I1
/CLK170D2
1/016 CLK2/I3
J
FIELD17 0
2C7,4C7H I/017 1/047
2C7,4D7,8A8I I/OIS 1/046
8C6 I/019 1/045 HATCNTl > 8A5
2C2 1 DISPVID170
I ' 02 0 I / 04 4
DISPVID Z
1/021 1/043
ACTFREEZ ENORAD,ZM
1/022 I /042 H ENORAD_ZM > 8A8
LORADD8 VI DEN17 0
1/023 1/041
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/SNPFFAEF
8CbT7s"NPFFAEF^>- -lENIRAIJ > 8A8
R16
SNPSCL1
SNPSCLO
-Wi— HSNPSC3- > 9B8
-Wr- HSNPSCO > 9C8

/SNPFFRS
A T D A T T0 . .7! 7SNPFFRS~> 8B8
2D4, 6D6, 8C8<"ATDAT [0 • 77T~ IOCHRDY..D
IOCHRDY D > 2D4
LOCADD3
LOCADD8"*!>8B8
/SNP_EOUTl
/SNP_EOUTl > 9 B 4
LORADDS
LORADDS > 8A8
2C2 LWRTXFRT;
2B7,8A8 V I D E N _ Z ;
VIDEN17 0
,4D7,8A8 V I D E N T 7 O > -
DISPVID_.Z
2B7,8A8 D I S P V I D Z >-
DISPVID170
,4C7,8A8 D I S P V I D 1 7 0 y-
2B7
FIELD170
,4D7,8B8 FIELD170~>-
2B7 /CLK170D2
/CLK170D2" y-
C L K 1 7 0 D 2
2A7 CLK170D2 >—
2B2,4C7
SNPCTRL.SCH
T i t l e
SNAP BUFFER CONTROL
c
Date : Hay 5, 1995|sheet 7 o f 10
; YliNF fftI iV T H A T r 0 .91
S W P
n
6 C l l V S N P O [ 0 . .9]
&S&f:°••T^y< S N P I D A T E [0 , .9 j > 9D8
SNP_IDAT0 /
03 18
S N P I D A T 1
S N P IDAT2 / SNP IDATO 2 23 SNPIDATEO
Q2 DO YO
SNP_IDAT3 ^ SNP IDAT1 3 22 SNPIDA.TE1 ,
Q3 Dl Y l
SNP_IDAT4 / SNP IDAT2 4 21 SNPIDATE2 ,
Q4 D2 Y2
21 SNP_IDAT5 / v SNP IDAT3 5 20 SNPIDATE3 ,
Q5 D3 Y3
SNP_IDAT6 / SNP IDAT4 6 1 9 SNPIDATE4
Q6
v
D4 Y4
SNP .IDAT7 / SNP IDAT5 7 18 SNPIDATE5 ,
Q7
v
DS Y5
SNP_IDAT8 ^ SNP IDATS 8 17 SNPIDATE6
Q8 D6 Y6
^ SNP IDAT7 9 16 SNPIDATE7
D7 Y7
/SNPFFRE „ SNP IDATS 10 15 SNPIDATES
7 D2| / S N P F F R E >— REN1 : D8 Y8
^ SNP IDAT9 11 D9 Y9 14 SNPIDATE9
REN2 ]
/CLK17QD2
RCLK P.
ACTFREEZ 1 _
P, OEl
/ SNPFFWE
4D3r7SNPFFWE >- WEN1 i 1 3
C OE2
WEN2/LD
2A7rcLK3 43 >- WCLK
ACTFREEZ
IDT72221L12J
£ X P 3 ^ Q 4 A ^ A j < f s N P IDATO [0 . .9 ] > 9B8
\ VSNPQ9 SNP_IDAT9 / SNP_IDAT0 23 SNPIDATOO /

QO • <• i • . - i SNPIDATG1
22 /
Ql
S N P I D A T 2 21 SNPIDAT02 /
Q2
SNP IDAT3 20 SNPIDAT03 /
Q3
Q4
SNP_IDAT4 19 SNPIDATO4 /
S N P _ I D A T 5 18 SNPIDAT05 /
QS
SNP_IDAT6 1 7 SNPIDATO6 /
QS
S N P _ I D A T 7 16 SNPIDAT07 /
Q7
SNP._IDAT8 15 SNPIDATO8 /
08
\ SNP_.IDAT9 14 SNPIDATO9 /
/SNPFFRE /SNPFFEF
FF
\ t S N H v E g l> 7C7
/CLK170D2 /SNPFFAEF
PAE
j7SNPFFAEF > 7 B 7
PAF
/SNPFFWE 74FCT827
WEN1
WEN2/LD
WCLK
.-' S N P F F R S
ACTFREEZ
IDT72221L12J
A T D A T rO . 15 1
2D4, 6 D 6 , 7 B 7 < ~ A T D A T [ 0 . .15] ]
2 B 7 , 4 D 7 , 6 C 5 , 7 C 7 / BRDRES~>—
A C T F R E E Z
7 D 2 A C T F R E E Z >—
RSTICAD
7D2 R S T I C A D ;
7C2
ENOCAD ZM
7 C 2 E N Q C A D _ Z M >—
2B7
CLK170D2
/ S N P F F R S
ICADD 511 SNPIDATO9 /

ICADD_511 > 7C7
ENPANLSB 5NPIDATQ8 /
ENPANLSB > 2C2
ORAD_ODD SNPIDATQ7 /
QRAD_QDD > 7 C 2
ATDAT3 SNPIDATO6 /
\ ATDAT4 SNPIDATQ5 /
SNPIDATQ4 /
0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 7 6 5 4 3 2
/ / / / / / / / 5 / / / / / / / /
6 6 6 6 5 5 5 5 I I I I I I I I I I I I
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 O O O O O O O O O O O O
SNPOCAD 5 4 3 2 1 0 4 4 4 4 4 4
1/08
SNPICAD 7 6 5 4 3 2
1/09 1/055
ICAD 511 SNPIDATQ3 /
I / O 1 0 1/054 107 1041
SNPORAD A T D A T 8
7D2 SNPORAD, I / O l l I/OS2 H/SNPSE > 9 C 8 108 IO40
S N P I R A D \ A T D A T 9 SNPIDAT_1
7C2 S N P I R A D : 1/012 1/052 109 103 9
LOCADDS
7B2 1/013 1/051 IO10 103 8
FIELD170 SNPIDATOO jr
,4D7,7A7 FIELD170. 1/014 I/05C I O l l 1037
ACTZ1024
2C4,7D2 ACTZ1024 1/015 I/04S 7C2 CLK0/I0 1036
ENSCROLL LRDTXFR
2C2 ENSCROLL. CLK0/I0 I/04E 2C2,7B7 L R D T X F F O CLK1/I1 17
CLK17 0 D 2
CLK3/I< 7C2 12
7C2
/CLK170D2 23 S N P C N T O
2B77CLK170D2 >- CLK1/I1 16 .SNPCNTO 7C2
ACTRSTAD
7D2 A C T R S T A D >-— 1/016 CLK2/13 13 CLK3/15 2C2,7B7
S E T I C A D SNP_VIDADDO
7D2|SETICAD>- 1/017 1/047 1012 CLK2/I4 7C2
I/OIS 1/046 1013 1035
ENORAD_ZM" 27 A T D A T 1 4
7B2 1/019 1/045 1014 1034
SNPIDATE9
7B2 I/O20 1/044 1015 1033
VIDEN Z SNPIDATE8
2B7,7B7 1/021 1/043 1016 103 2
DISPVID_Z SNP_VIDADD7 SNP IDATE7
2B7,7A7 D I S P V I D _ Z >— 1/022 1/042 1017 103 1
VIDEN170 SNP_VIDADD3 I I I I I I I I I I I I
2B7,4D7,7B7 V I D E N 1 7 0 >-— 1/023 1/041
I/O40 SMP_VIDADD2 O O O O O O O OOOOO
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
8 9 0 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O MACH220-15JC
2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 MACH435-15JC
SNAP DATA
Hill SNAP ADDRESS
SNP_VIDApD5
SNP_VIDADD6
SNPIDATE6
SNP IDATE5
S N PIDATE4
SNPIDATE 3
DISPVID170 SNP_VIDADD8 SNPIDATE2
2B7,4C7,7A7 DISPVID17 0
DISPVID343 SNP_VIDADD1 SNPIDATE1
2C7,4D7,7C7 DISPVID343
SNP_VIDADD4 SNPIDATEO
7B2 LORADDS >
SNP v i D A n n r o .
| S M P _ V I D A D D t 6 ." 1 1 > 9 D 8
T i t l e
SNAP ADDRESSING £ DATA
S i z e Docun e n t Number REV
C SNPADD.SCH
Date Mav 5, 19 9 5 | s h e e t S o f 10
8 D 2 < S N P I D A T E [ 0 . .9 Q S N P T D A T F [ 0 . .9 1
8A5|SNP VIDADD[0. . 8 ~
U24
SNP VIDADDO
AO Dca
SNP_VIDADD1 9 S K P I D A
A l DQ2
SNP_VIDADD2 10 SKPIDA
A2 DQ3
SNP..VIDADD3 1 1 S?:= I D A
A3 DQ4
SNP_VIDADD4 31 SX?ILTAT-4 /
A4 DQ5
SNP_VIDADD5
A5 DQ6
SNP_VIDADD6
A6 DQ7
SNP VIDADD7 34 5 ^ ~ I D A
A7 DQ8
SNP_VIDADD8
A8
3 S?r? ESDQ SNP ESDO 23 V3 10 /
SQl
7D2r7TR_.OE0 TR/OE SQ2
SNP ESDI 22 V3 11 /
/SNPWEO SNP_ESD2 21 V3 12 /
7C2| /SNPWEO
SNP ESD3 20 V3I3 /
/SNPRAS0 SQ4
/SNPRAS0 SNP ESD4 1 9 V3I4 /
RAS. SQ5
/SNPCASO /SNPCASO SNP ESD5 18 V3I5 /
S0J>— CAS SQ6
SQ7
SNP_ESD6 17 V3I6 /
8B5[7SNPSE" S N P .SSD7 16 V3I7 /
SE SQ8
7B2[SNPSC0 >— SC
SNP. E S D 8 15 V3 18 /
QSF
SNP ESD9 14 V3 19 /
DSF
/SHP_.EOUT0
7C2f7~SNP E O U T O >-
CLK170D2
2 A 7 | C D K 1 7 0 D 2 >=—
UPD482234LE-70
IDT74FCT8 21ASO
U2 5
SNP. VIDADD0
AO DQ1
SNP VIDADD1 9 S;.—I D A T E ? /
A l DQ2
SNP VIDADD2
A2 DQ3
SNP VIDADD3
A3 DQ4
SNP VIDADD4
A4 DQ5
SNP VIDADD5
A5 DQ6
SNP VIDADD6
A6 DQ7
SNP VIDADD7
A7 DQS
SNP VIDADD8
AS
SQl
TR/pE SQ2
ME/WE SQ3
SQ4
/SNPRAS0
RAS SQ5
/SNPCASO
CAS SQ6
SQ7 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SE SQ8
SC
QSF
DSF
UPD482234LE-70
8C2<TSNPIDATQ[0 . .9]
_S£?
SNP_VIDADDO
DQ1
8 s; P I C A "-QO
A
A
SNP VIDADD1 9 s: PIDA" C 1
DQ2
SNP.VIDADD2 10 s» = IDA" /
DQ3
A
SNP.. V I D A D D 3 1 1 s^ 5 I C A " C .'•
DQ4
7 A
SNP_VIDADD4 3 1 s>
DQ5
S N P.. V I D A D D 5 32 s; 7 IIDDAA""-. ;. /
DQ6
A
SNP VIDADD6 33 s> ~P I D A
DQ7
SNP VIDADD7
DQS
34 s> ? I ZA ;
SNP_VIDADD8
/TR_OEl
7D2r7~TR O E l V
7C2r7~SNPWEl /SNPWB1
/SNPRAS1 /SNPRAS1
7 D2[~7"SN P R A S 1
/SNPCAS1 /SNPCAS1
7D2r7sNPCAS "
7B2fSN"PSCl >-
U P D 4 S 2 23 4 L E - 7 0
IDT7 4FCT821ASO
U27
SNP..VIDADDQ
AO DQ1
SNP_VIDADD1
A l DQ2 s;;?rcATQ5
SNP_VIDADD2
A2 DQ3
SNP VIDADD3
A3 DQ4
SNP VIDADD4
A4 DQ5
SNP_VIDADD5
A5 DQ6
SNP VIDADD6
A6 DQ7
SNP_VIDADD7
A7 DQS
SNP VIDADD8
A3
SQl
TR/OE SQ2
ME/WE SQ3
SQ4
/SNPRAS1
RAS SQ5
CAS SQ6
SQ7
SE SQ8
SC
QSF
DSF
UPD482234LE-70
SNAP BUFFER
t-eric Number
SNPBUF2.SCH
ar.ua r y 19, 1995jsheet:
VCC + sv
1 1 1 1 1 1[
I 1
~T~
o. o.
== C5 — i — C 1
- J
-I- - i - t-L*
uF 0 . l u F J 0.luF 0 . luF 0.luF J 0.luF [~~ 0.luF ~~j~~ O.luF 0 . luF 1 0.luF
r o.IUF
0 . l u F 0 . luF 0 . l u F
IUF V IUF T • "
i :
T ' r 0.luF ~~r~
1¬ =L= 1 =L +- L 1¬ =L =~ CIS
T °- T" •
=j= C34 C30 OCT C27 C26 ~T~~ C2 2 r ~ c20 c i 9
uF 0.luF 0 . l u F + ¬0 . l u F 0 . luF 0 . l u F Z±Z C29
0 . l u F
+ - 0 - l u F I 0.luF 0 , luF 0 . luF 0 . l u F + •» 0 . luF
0 . luF
0 - luF
O.luF
; rjr zrjr c3 8 1 =L 1¬ =L 1 ==
j 1„ 1 =~ C50 Z~ZZ C 5 1 =~ CS2 i C53
T ••
C37 C4 0 C42 C4 6 C48
0 . l u F 0 . luF 0 . luF 0 . luF 0 . luF
LuF 0.luF 0 . luF =p C3 9 0 . luF 0 . luF Z—Z C4 4 Z±Z C4 5 O.luF 0 . luF =p C4 9 O.luF
0 . luF " 0 .l u F 0.luF 0 . l u F
— —2—i—i—i—i—r
ceo
T
rrr:c 6 i =±z c 6 2 rr= c59 rr= e s s irtr. c57 r r zc56 =z=
t — i — i — r
— _ C73 — C 6 4 C65 —•- C 6 6 —-— C 6 7 _ _ vôo _,_
I C69
1
—.— C 7 0
_,— ^ / ^ —,— w.*
0.IuF 0.luF 0.luF 0.luF 0.luF 0.luF 0.luF 0.IuF 0.IuF 0.IuF 0.IuF 0 -l u F 0. I u F 0.IuF 0 . IuF 0 . l u
POWER SUPPLY DECOUPLING

Number
DPWR.SCH
ry 20, I995|Sheec 10 o f 10
D I M E N S I O N S IN I N C H E S
4.500
4.100 4.250
y> 3
T > 3
4C7 , 9B1IMX2SC0 >

4C7 , 9B1|MX2SC1 >
I Q C 2 < T D A T D A T [~0
4 D 3 < T v 2 O - [ 0 . . 9 1 |- • f0
I 4J i
4D3<~V3O[0 . . 9 ] ~
v 3 0 f o
- 9 1
VIDEN3 43
V T D E N 3 43~>—
DISPVID343
/HSYNC34 3
/ H S Y M C 3 4 3 > -
4 C 7 , 9B1|
IHM X3
3 SC~
O y—
4C7 , 9B1|
|MMX
X33S
5CCI
" y—
ACTZ1024
j A C T 2 1 0 24~> 3D4 , SB
IOCHRDY_D
jIOCHRDY,D y 9AS
VIDEH170
VftQ f o . .91
AVBO[0..91 > VXDENl/Toy—
D I S P V I P 1 7 0 y~
DISPVID170
/HSYNC170
/ H S Y N C 1 7 0 y—
FIELD170
FIELD170 >-
A 3C1 V I DEN Z > -
VIDEN_2
DISPVID..Z
3D1 D I S P V I D _ Z >
/CSYNC_17Q..Z
3C1 /CSYNC 170 Z >—
/BRDRES
4C7,5DS,9D1
/CLK170D2
3Al|7cLK170D2 >-
_A
A~
CLK170D1
3D5|CLK17 0 D l " ^
/CLKI70D1
3D5|7cLK17 0 D l ^ > -
CLK3 4 3 D
3D5jCLK343D>
CLK170D2
3D5|CLK17 0D2~>—
E :
GND
MCONNECT.SCH
BOARD TO BQARD INTERCONNECT

S- ; s i l T c o j a e n c Number |REV
f- | 1.0
- ^ : May 5, 19951 S h e e t 2 of
*5V
L_gL 0 .OluFj^
U3 0 GND
VCC OA1
3 CLK343D
CLK343 5C-4 . 7 S 5
OA2 C L K 3 4 3 ± " > 2A-I
_ru~Lri_n_ DUT CLK40.23MHz
OA3
4
e
CLK343B
CLK343A
OA4
END OA5
7
19
CLK343C
/CLK170
CLK3 4 3 C > €C =
OBI
18 /CLK170D1
OB 2
osc 17 /CLK170D2 i j g 17 0_Z
OB3 /CBLANK 170 Z > 7B5
40 . 23MHz 15
OB4 v
DISPVID. Z > 2 B 4
OSC 14 *
OB 5 D I S P V I D 170 Z > 5 B 8
V I D E N _ 1 7 0_Z > 5 A 4
13 x
DISPVID170 > 2B4
MON
VIDEN17 0 > 2B4
IDT4 9FCT8 0 5ASO
OA1 I 1 I I I I I I I
OA2 / / / / / / / / /
OOOOO o o o o
OA3
4 3 2 3 0 3 3 2 2
OA4 10 9 8
OAS - | C L K 1 7 0"~> 4 B 7 , 5 B 4 , 7 B 5 1/05 1/027
OBI 1/06 1/026
CLK170D1
OB2 1/07 1/025
CLK17QD2 ACTZ1024
OB3 /U U Z
fCl7K170D2 > ; 2CI|ACTZ1024 >— 1/024
/C S Y N C 1 7 0
OB4 II CLK1/I5
OB5 -jCLK170A> 7A5
2 B 4 , 4 C 7 , 5 D 8 , 9 D l | / 3 R D R E S >— CLK0/I2
MON I/OS
1/09
IDT4 9FCT8 0 6ASO I/O10
I / O l l
R67 1 I I 1
Wy
/ / / /
OOOO
1 1 1 1
2 3 4 5
MACH210-15..TC
Z1024 VIDEO
/CSYNC17 0
22 /BDRES /CSYNC 170 Z>2B4,7B5
\/B D R E Q ?Z
FIELD17 0
V I D E N _ Z > 2B4
/BDHSYNC /HSYNC17 0
/VSYNC17 0
17 /CBLANK17 0
DISPVID
/3DHSYNC /BDVSYNC
7BCBLANK
BDISPVID
^> 2A2.4C7
U7 5
VB3S 23 V3I0
DO Y0
VB3 3 /
Dl Y l
D2 Y2
D3 Y3
D4 Y4 -j / K B L A N K 3 4 3 > 2 C 7 , 5 C 8
D5 Y5 -j V I D E N 3 4 3 > 2 C 7 , 5 C 3
D6 Y6
D7 Y7
D8 Y8
D9 Y9
OC
)CP
1 1 1 1 1 I I I I
/ / / / / / / / /
o o o o c OO OO
4 3 2 1 0 3 3 2 2
T
/HSLA1. K3 4 3 10 9 8
1/05 1/027
GND GND 2 V3I0 / 1/06 1/026
3 V3 I 1 / 1/07 1/025
V3 VIDEO IN/OUT VB3 2 '1 V3I2 /
/ ;.'.RiJr-.:-:s 10 1/024
\ VB3 3 S V 3 13 / CLK1/15
<> II
V3I4 /
7 V3 15 / CLK0/12 14
8 V3I6 / I/OS 13
9 V3I7 / 1/09 1/023
10 V3 18 / I/O10 1/022
1 1 V3 19
/ I / O l l 1/021
T i l l I I I I I
- 1 /VB3XMT / / / / / / / / /
13 /CLK170 OOOO OOOOO
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
2 3 4 5 67 8 9 0
2D2 [7yB3RCV>—
12
/VB3XMT
2D2r7v"B3XMT>
~M VIDEO
V 1 T
'°- 9 1 Z> 4 B 7
E=-:-SC3 4 3
-j / H S Y N C 3 4 3 > 2 C 7
—1 / C S Y N C 3 4 3 > 6 C 8
-j /CBLANK343'"> 6C8
.^LA>rv3 4 3
\ V I 14 /VB LANK 3 43 > 5D8
-| D I S P V I D 3 4 3 > 2C7
:R23 R69
- 182 182
CLK343C.
-|FIELDlT0~> 2B4, 5A4
—\ / H S Y N C 1 7 0 > 2 B 4
I R24
-243
•J/VSYNC170 > 4B7
VIDTMG.SCH
TitZ.*
H V 2 I [0. .9 ] > 4 B 7 VIDEO TIMING
=-^n-^nt Number REV
1. 0
Da: m May 5 , 1995 [Sheet 3 o f 1 1
H V 2 Q [0 • .9 ] > 2D7
7777777
4V1Q [ 0 . . 9J > 7D8
M V 3 Q [0 . .9 J > 2D7
0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
I I I I I I I I
////////
I I I
5 / /
I
/
I
/
I
/
I
/
I
/
I
/
1
OOOOOOOO OO O O O O O O
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 6 6 6 6 5 5 5 5
3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6
I/OS
1/09 1/055
I/O10 1/054
I /Ol 1 1/053
1/012 1/052
2A2 , 3C5|V3I [0 . •9 ] > =

1/013
I/Ol 4
1/015
1/051
I/O50
1/049
I.
CLKO/IO 1/048
65 CLK170
CLK3/I4
7B5 CLK1/II
2B4,5D8,9D1 /BRDRES 62 /VSYNC17 O
1/016 CLK2/13
2C7,9B1 1/017 1/047
2C7,9B1 1/018 1/046
2D7,9B1 I/019 1/045
2D7,9B1 I/O20 1/044
9B1 1/021 1/043
9B1 1/022 1/042
1/023 1/041
//////// ////////
OOO OOOOO OOOOOOOO
2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MACH130-15JC
3 B 7 r v T l [ 0 . • 9] v i i r o - - 9 1
3A6fV2I [0 . .9 ]~ YSIf n 0 1
3All/VSYNC170-^ /VSYNC17 0
3D5|CLK170~~> CBK170
VMUX1.SCH
VIDEO INPUT
Date: January 18, 1995|sheet. 4 o f 11

FIELD170
/OVCASA
AOVA r
7D8, 10A2rATADD[0 . .f s T ^ ^ ^ B C f O ^ A J J
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
O OOOOO OOOOOO
5 4 3 2 10 4 4 4 4 4 4
7 6 5 4 3 2
1/07 1/041
ATADD15
1/08 I/O40
1/09 1/039 7 C 8 , 8 C 8 , 10D2<TATDAT t 0 . .7]
A T n f i T F 0
-
I/O10 I/038
I / O l l 1/037
2 B 4 , 4 C 7 , 9D1I / B R D R E S > IOCHRDY A
CLKO/10 1/036 -I I O C H R D Y _ A > 9B5
/VBLANK 3 4 3
3A1 /VBLANK3 4 3 >— CLK1/I1 17
=
9 D l | / M E M W R Z>— -— 12
U5 9
-< C L K 3 4 3 ~ | 3D5
/HBLANK3 4 3 16 AO DQ1
2C7, 3c i i :r.-- .-; 3 >— 13 CLK3/IS A l DQ2
1/012 CLK2/I4 A2 DQ3
1/013 1/035 _y A3 DQ4
1/014 1/034 A4 DQ5
2C7 ,3Cl|VIDEN343 >— A T D A T '3 /
1/015 1/033 H O V 3 4 3 s"c> 7B5 AS DQ6
1/016 1/032 DQ7
ATDAT6 / OV1SD [0. .7 : > 7C8
A6
I/017I I I I II I I I I I I H/031 A7 DQS
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / A8
I
OOOOOO OOOOOO
112 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 SQl
8 9 0 12 3 OVTROEA
4 5 6 7 8 9 TR/OE SQ2
ME/WE SQ3
SQ4
MACH220-15JC RAS SQ5
CAS SQ
OVERLAY ACC A
WAKEUP SQ7
2 C 4 < WAKEUP " SE SQ8
OV3 4 3SC
SC
QSF
DSF
UPD482234LE-70
ATADD11
9D1IUADD17 >
9D1 OVLU2
9DljUADD16 >— U60
8 ATDAT 0 /
AO DQ1
OVTROEA 9 ATDAT1 /
A l DQ2
9 B l f T M E M R D >- 10 ATDAT2 y
A2 DQ3
9B1 O V L U O 5-— 11 ATDAT3 /
A3 DQ4
9BlloVLUl > — 31 ATDAT4 /
A4 DQS
32 ATDAT5 /
/BRDRES A5 DQ6
33 ATDAT6 / Q
AS DQ7 ^ Y ? . f i r ? l f l . .71 | o v 2 S D t O . ~ 7 T ^ > 7 A 8
/
34 ATDAT7 /
A7 DQ8
I
AS
3 OV2SD0
SQl
4 OV2SD1 /
xM El /
/ oW Ei SQ2
SQ3
5 OV2SD2 /
6 OV2SD3 /
SQ4
36 OV2SD4 /
RAS SQ =
37 OV2SD5 /
CAS
38 OV2SD6 /
SQ7
39 OV2SD7 /
SE SQ8
ATADD10 SC
26 K
ATADD11 QSF
DSF
UPD482234LE-70
U61
AO DQ1
ATDAT1 /
A l DQ2
ATDAT2 /
A2 DQ3
ATDAT3 /
A3 DQ4
I I I I I I I I I I I I A4 DQ5
/ / / / / / / / / / / / A5 DQ6
O OO OOO OOOOOO
5 4 3 2 10 4 4 4 4 4 4 A6 DQ7 , g Y i S B H n 7 1 lov3sDro. .-Ti->7A8
7 6 5 4 3 2 A7 DQS
1/07 1/041 AS
1/08 I/O40 SQl
/OVTROEB /OVTROEB
1/09 1/039 XE/£H SQ2
I/O10 1/038 M E /VIE SQ3
I / O l l 1/037 SQ4
DISPVID 170 2 IS IOCHRDY
3 D i r D T s P V I D _ 1 7 0 _ . Z >- CLKO/10 1/036 •\ I O C H R D Y _ . B > 9A5 RAS SQ5
17 OV3SD5 /
CLK1/I1 CAS SQ6
OV3SD6 /
12 SQ7
SK SQ8
16 SC
2CirACTZ1024 >-
ACTZ102 4
13 CLK3/15 —< C L K 1 7 0 | 3D5 QSF
1/012 CLK2/14 DSF
ATADD12
1/013 :1/03 5
A T A D D 13 1/034
1/014
1/033 FIELD170 UPD432234LE-70
1/015
1/032 VIDEN_170 Z
1/016 - < V I D E N _ 1 7 0_Z~~| 3 D 1
I/017I I I I II I I I I I I II/031
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
OOOOOO OOOOOO
112 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
MACH220-15JC 8 9 0 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1111
OVERLAY ACC
FIELD17 0
2B4, 3A1|FIELD170 >
X
OV17 0SC
-|OVI7QSC> 7 B 5
/OVTROEB
OVLMEM.SCH

C 1 . 0
D a t e :' May 5, 1995|sheet 5 o f 11
4D3|VT"o [ 0 . . 9 J
5 D 8 , 1 0A2} A T A D D [ 1 . .TTT
5 D 3 , 1 0 D 2 f A ? F D A T [ 0 . .9] ;> ^^-^

g
r
= J Q • •91
=
5Bir5"v~3SD [ 0
FROM OVERLAY BUFF3
LUT17 0.SCH
RS-170 VIDEO OUTPUT

:nent Number
Date: February 20, 1995|sh.eet 7 of 11

7C 5fLU2 A D [ 1 0 . .13 ] >
2B6|A7B"Q [ 0 . . 9 ]"
5 D 8 , 7 D 8 , 1 0 A 2 j A T A D D [ 1 - . 1 0 ] >«wfi3EflfifillMJiSL
\ VBOO 23 \_ VBOC 23
\ VBOl 24 k VBOl 24
23 VBOO / \ VB02 25 X VB02 25
22 VBOl • \ VB03 26 X VB03 26
21 VB02 / \ VB04 27 |\ VB04 27
2 0 VBG-3 / \ VBOS 1 k VB05 1
19 VB04 / V VB06 2 k VB06 2
18 VB05 / \ VB07 3 k VB07 3
17 VB06 / \ VBOS 4 X VBOS 4
A8 A8
16 VB07 / X VBOS 5 X VB09 5
A9 A9
\ ATADD9 15 VB08 / \ LU2AD10 6
A10
LU2AD10 6
A10
\ ATADD10 14 VB0 9 \ LU2AD11 7
A l l \ LU2AP11 7
A l l
\ LU2AD12 8
A12 s LU2AP12 8
A12
2C4 ,7B5|LUSL2Q > LUSL20
4 c
\ LU2AD13 9
A13 \ LU2AP13 9
A13
ATDAT8 10
10 10
J
ATDAT9 11
1DT7 4FCT82 7ASO
13
CE1
OE
CE2
WE
CY7B162-10VC CY7B162-10VC
9D1|/LU2WE~LT> /LU2WE_L
iBPAT[0..9] >6D8
5D3 , 1 0 D 2 [ A T b A T [ 0 . j 9 ] >Â £ i£I&**^

T A
9Dl|/LU2WE_H >— /LU2WE_H
7 B 5 | L U 1 A D [ 1 0 . .13 1 ^ B M t t • 1 fH
2 B 6 [ V A O [ 0 . . 9 ]~~>=
. VAO I C • ^gJ„
VAO0 23
k VAOl 24
VAO 2 25
\ ATADD1 2 23 VAO0 / j\ VAO 3 26
\ ATADD2 3 2 2 VAOl / VAO 4 27
\ ATADD3 4 2 1 VAO 2 / !\ VAO 5 1
\ ATADD4 5 20 VAO 3 A K VAO 6 2
\ ATADD5 6 1 9 VAO 4 / [\ VAO 7 3
\ ATADD6 7 18 VAO 5 / t\ VAO 8 4
AS AS AS
\ ATADD7 8 17 VAO 6 / \ VAO 9 5
A9 A9 A9
\ .ATADD a 9 16 VAO 7 / LU1AD10 \ LU1AD10 6
A10 A10 A10
\ ATADD9 10 15 VAO 8 / \ LU1AD11 7
A l l
\ ATADD10 A l l A l l
11 14 VAO 9 r X LU1AP12 \ LU1AD12 8
A12 A12 A12
A13 A13 \ LU1AD13 9
A13
2C4 ,7C5|LUSL1Q >— 1,
T 10 10
1 3
C 10
APAT5~\,
IDT7 4FCT8 27ASO 13 13 13
CE1 CE1 CE1

OE OE OE
CE2 CE2 CE2
WE WE WE
CY7B162-10VC CY7B162-10VC CY7B162-10VC
CY7B162
g D l f / L u l W E ^ L >r- /LU1WE L
/LU1WE_H /LU1WE..H
9D1| / L U 1 W E _ H >
LUT.SCH
RS-343 LOOK UP TABLE

S i z e Poc merit Number R E V
1 . 0
199 5 [ S h e e t
./BRDRES> 2B4 , 3C4 , 4C7 , 5 D 8 , 7E
/LU1WE_L
/ L U 1 W E ..H
7 LU1VJ'E_.L .
/LU2HE L
/ L U 2 W E H
/ L U 3 W E L
/LU3VJE_H
/LU3'a'E TT> 7 C 8
LWRTXFpT>2C4
E N P A N L S B
E W P M L S B > 2 C 4
E M O U T M U X
E N Q U T M U X > 2 C 4
'^~^SUS , 7B5
E N S N P R E G
E N S N P R E G > 2 C 4
10C6|"SA[0 . . 9] ENSCFOl.L
ENSCROL7L~> 2 C 4
/ D A T A E N L
/ D A T A E N L ~ > 1 0 D 5
O V L U 2 > " 5 C S , 7 B 8
U A D D 1 6 ~ > 5 C 8
/ D A T A E N H 1 6 2 >s
T6>
/ D A T A E N H
/ D A T A E N L 1 6
1 0C 5
1 0 D 6 r S D [ 0 . .71 y ^ T O .
0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
/ / / / / / / / 5 / / / / / / / /
O O O O O O O O OO O O O O O O
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 6 6 6 6 5 5 5 5
/ L U 3 W E L 3 2 1 0 9 R 7 6
I/OS
/ L U 2 W E H
1/09 1 / 0 5 5
/ L U 2 W E L
I/O10 1/054
/ L U 1 W E H
I / O l l 1 / 0 5 3
. L U 1 V 7 E I,
1/012 1/052
1 / 0 1 3 1 / 0 5 1
1/014 I / O 5 0
3 C 5 [ 7 B D R E S ">— 1/015 1/049
lODSfRESET > — CLKO/10 1 / 0 4 8
C L K 3 / I 4
C L K 1 / I 1
1 / 0 1 6 C L K 2 / I 3
I/D17 1/047
I/OIS 1 / 0 4 6
1 0 D6| B A L E >— 1/019 1/045 L R D T X F R :
/ M E M B D S L
I/O20 1 / 0 4 4
1/021 1/043
1 / 0 2 2 1 / 0 4 2
1/023 1 / 0 4 1
I I I I I I I I r i 1 / 0 4 0
/ / / / / / / / / /
OOOOOOOO
2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1
4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 9
M A C H 4 3 5 - 1 5 U C
10B5
10D6 / SMEMW'~>-
10B5 / SBHE
10D6 / S H E M R ~ > -
10B5 /HEMR >—
/IOBDSL
lODef/IOWR >—
O V L U 1 > 5 C 8 , 7 B 8
/ M E M C S 1 6
/ M E M C S 1 6 ~ > 1 0 B 8
/ D A T A E N H
/ D A T A E N H > 1 0 C 5
/MEMRD > 5 C 8
O V L U 0 > 5 c
M M 7 4 F S 2 1 W M
D5
/ M E M O U T > 1 0 D
? K 1 S C 0 3 > "3C7
/IOBDSL
5D4|lOCHRDY-A-> IOCHRDY A 1
— T T O C H R D Y Z> 1 0 C 6
SW DIP-5
5 B 4 r T Q C H R D Y ,B~>
QO
Ql
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
QG
Q7 2C1| I O C H R D Y _ D > 1OCHRDY_D 9
M M 7 4 F 5 2 1 W M
ATINTF.SCH
T i t l
AT INTERFACE
C 1 . 0
Dane : February 20, 1995lsheet 9 o f 11
^ A T D A T f P
;ATDAT[0..9] >5D3,7C8,8C8
BALE > 9C5

/IOWR > 9 B 5
/SMEMR ~ > 9 C 5
/ SMEMW"> 9 C 5
SD6
RESET > 9C5
\ SD7
; S D [ 0 . ,"7~r> 9 D 7
/DATAENL
9D1ITDATAENL, >—
/MEMQUT
9 B l | / M E M Q U T >-
DM7 4 L S 2 4 5M
GND -IOCHK
RESET SD7
+ 5V SD6
IRQ9 SD5
-5V SD4
DRQ2 SD3 9B3[ I O C H R D Y
-12V SD2
-SRDY SD1
+ 12V SDO
A10 IOCHRDY
GND IOCHRDY
A l l AEN
-SMEMW AEN
-SMEMR SA19 ( S A [ Q . . 1 5 ] > 9D7
-IOW SA18
-IOR SA17 A H : /DATAENH
9BlfTDATAENH >—
A l ?
-DACK3 SA16
A16 SA15
DRQ3 SA15
A17 SA14
-DACK1 SA14 DM7 4 L S 2 4 5 M
DROl A18 SA13
SA13
RFRSH SA12 P A T J A . T J J J .,151 ^ DATDAT [0. .15] > 2D5
A2 0 SA11
BCLK SA11
A21 SA10
IRQ7 SA10
A22 SA9
IRQ6 SA9
A23 SAS
IRQ5 SA8
A24 SA7
1RQ4 SA7
A2 5 SA6
IRQ3 SA6
A2 6 SA5
-DACK2 SA5
A27 SA4
TC SA4
A2 8 SA3
BALE SA3
A2 9 SA2
+ 5V SA2
A3 0 SA1
OSC SA1
A31 SAO /DATAENL16
SAO 9D if/DAT AENL 16~^>-
CON AT62C
DM74LS245M
DATDAT15
DATDAT14
DATDAT13
DATDAT12
DA T D A T 1 1 /
DATDAT10 /
9D1| / D A T A E N H l " 6 ~ ~ > — /DATAENH16

/MEMQUT
DM74LS245M
"7> 9 C S
iLA[17..23] 2> 9B8
/MEMCS16
9B1| / M E M C S 1 6 > -MEMCS16 -SBHE
-IOCS16 LA2 3
IRQ10 LA2 2
IRQ11 LA2 1
IRQ12 LA2 0
IRQ15 LAI9
S D f 8. . 1 5 1
IRQ14 LAIS
-DACKO LA17 > 5D8,7D8, 8D8
DRQO -MEMR
CIO /HEI-r.v
-DACK5 -MEMW
C l l SD8
DRQ5 SD8
C12 SD9
-DACK6 SD9
C13 SD10
DRQ6 SD10
C14 SD11
-DACK7 SD11
C15 SD12
DRQ7 SD12
C16 SDI3
+ 5V SD13
C17 SD14
-MASTER SD14
GND SD15
CON A T 3 6C
ATADD[8..15]>5D8,7D8,8D8
DM74LS244M
ATCONN.SCH
AT INTERFACE
nt Number
January 2 6, I995|Sheet
POWER INDICATOR LAMPS
+ 5V
RBI R57
280 976
3E >a R E D
^ RED
^3
i — i — i — r
—I— >_ j. a*i —|— t—L03
— —O /-.toe
— . — i_ x a o
O^. Tl au e
— , — i_ x » / T
—.—
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
I
1
f~
O . il auAF
1
.luF F — O.luF - C189 =p C190 =Z= C191 r±Z C192 Z±= C 1 93 = p C194 Z±Z C195 =±" C196 ZTfZ C197 =±= C 1 9 8 =±= C 1 9 9 =p C200 =p C2
0 . IuF 0 . IuF 0 . IuF 0 . IuF 0 . IuF 0 . IuF 0 . IuF 0 . IuF 0 . IuF 0 . IuF 0 . IuF 0 . IuF 0 .
_r i i—i—r -£ j T j 2 T j T J — r T X
X x
—p- C213 —p- C 2 1 2 — C 2 1 1 —,— C 2 1 0 Z±Z C209 ZZp C 2 0 8 Z = C207 Z±Z C 2 0 6 Z±= C 2 0 5 =Z=
_,_ C218 Z±Z C217 Z±l C216 =J= C 2 1 5 ZZ= 0.IuF 0.IuF 0.IuF 0.IuF 0.IuF 0.IuF 0.IuF 0.IuF 0.IuF
0.IuF 0.IuF 0.IuF 0.IuF
i i X X X X X X X X X X T—r
L I —
X X X X —r-
X X X X JAl X T °- " T lu! x_
1 i — i — i — i — i — i — r X X T X
T _
0.IuF
1 l-ZDU
0. I u F
. l_iiOi
0. I u F
1 L i D i
0.IuF
.— L i D J
0. I u F
, L z Ot
0. I u F
1—
0.IuF
1—
0. I u F
1 l_Z O /
0.IuF
, Z
0.
UPSPWR.SCH
T i t l e
UPSCAN POWER & DECOUPLING
C 1.0
Date : January 26, 1995lSheet 11 o f 11
SECTION 8.3
RTE2000 SCHEMATICS
DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
K 10.475-
•10.150 •51
RTE HIS061295
4N
if D LAYER 1
4.500
4.300 4.250
St S2
CM UK U29 WO
iZZZJ- 1.250^ ^
,30u
n
DISPVID
Jl
6 C 4 , 7B5I/MEMW >— /CNVOE > 3C6
3 12
O O O O O
6C4,7B5 105 1027 /CNVLD > 3C6

/LUTSEL 102 6 CNVHLD > 3C6
6C1 106
/CMVSELl
6C1 /CNVSEL 107 102 5 /CNVCS~> 3C6
/CNVSEL2 CNVEALU
6C1 /CNVSEL2 1024 CNVEALU> 3C6
/MRESET CK1/I5<
6 C 1 / M R E S E T >—
/CLK170"> 5A5 14
13
1023
1022 LUTv-'E "> 4 A 7
1021 / L A D D E N > 4B7
/LUTOUT
OUT>
DISPVIDLY
DISPVIDLY > 5B8
-Wv- -1 C L K 17 0~~> 3CG , 4 A 7 3B6

/ F F R E N ~ > 3B6,
C L K 1 7 OA
CLK170A> 5A5
/BDRES > 6C4
H DISPVID> 5B8
- I > 3D6
V 3 T f 0 q i
5cirv2TTo"
V2 VIDEO OUT
V3 VIDEO IN
VBINT.SCH
VIDEO BUS INTERFACE

1 . 0
June 13, 1 9 9 5 | s h . •••• ~
T.UTADDIO. . 1 7 !
6C1 | L U T A D D [ 0 . . 1 7 ]~> 4 A 7
6C1
6C1
6C1
LUTADD6 /
CLK TO DATA OUT 16ns
72 CNVDO y
71 CNVD1 /
70 CNVD2 A
68 CNVD3 /
67 CNVD4 /
66 CNVD5 /
4C7 , 7 D 2 < T A T D A T [ 0 65 CNVD6 /
6A CNVD7 /
62 CNVD8 /
60 CNVD9 / 39 LUTADD3 /
59 CHVD10/ I O S 1027
38 LUTADD2 /
58 106 102 6
CNVD11 / \CNVD3 9 37 LUTADD1 /
107 102 5
57 CNVD12/ \CNVD4 10
10 36 LUTADD0 /
102 4
I I CK1/I5
35 CLK17 0
55
J
CNVD14/
>CK0/I2 14
33 „
52 CNVD16/ \CNVD7 14 32 y
51 IOS 13
CNVD17/ \CNVD8 15 31 *
109 102 3
50
49
CNVD18/
CNVD19/
\CNVD9 16
.CNVD1017
IO10 1022 c•
IOll 102 1 ~T9~^
81
80 *
79 *
78 *
77 r*
75 f
74 :
73 *
6 C 1| L T C H O F F H >
U7
DO QO
16 LUTADD8 A
17
Dl Ql LUTADD9 A
IS
D2 Q2 LUTADD10 A
i 9
D3 Q3 LUTADD11 A
20
D4 Q4 LUTADD12 A.
21
D5 Q5 LUTADD13 A
22
D6 Q6 LUTADD14 A
23 LUTADD15 /
D7 Q7
24 LUTADD16 /
D8 Q8
14
RENl EF
^15~^
REN 2 FF
3*
RCLK PAE
PAF
WEN1
WEN2/LD
WCLK
RS
OE
IDT72231-25
LUTADD17
DO Q0
Dl Ql
D2 Q2
D3 Q3
D4
D5 OS
D6
D7
Q'
D8 Q8
RENl EF
REN2 FF
RCLK PAE
PAF
WEN1
WEN2/LD
WCLK
RS
OE
IDT72231-25
CONV2.SCH
CONVOLVER
Size Document Number
Date June 13, 1995|Sheet 3 o f 8

LUTDATfO..91
3> 5D8
23 RSDATO/
AO DQ1
22 RSDAT1/
Al DQ2
2 1 RSDAT2/
A2 DQ3
A3 DQ4 :•: RSDAT3/
19 RSDAT4/
A4
18 RSDAT5/
A5
17 R S D A T 6/
A6
16 RSDAT7/
A7
15 RSDAT8/
AS
LUTADD? 14 "GDAT"/
A9
/LUTADD10
A10
/LUTADD11
A l l
/LUTADD12
3D8,7D2<TATDAT[0 A12
LUTADD13
A13
LUTADD14 74FCT821
A14
A15
A16
/LUTADD17
A17
ci
OE
WE
MCM6229A-25
7 B 2 f A T A D D [ 1 . . 15 ] ^^ff^Bfli^*^^
L U T ADDO
DQ1
LUTDAT5 /
DQ2
LUTADD2
DQ3
LUTADD3 1 9 LUTDAT7 /
DQ4
LUTADD4
LUTADD5
LUTADD7
LUTADD8
LUTADD9
/LUTADD10
A10
LUTADD11
A l l
LUTADD12
A12
LUTADD13
A13
LUTADD14
A14
74FCT827 LUTADD15
A15
LUTADD16
A16
LUTADD17
A17
WE
MCM6229A-25
ATADD11 LUTADD10 LUTADDQ LUTDAT8/

DQ1
\ ATADD12 LUTADD11S LUTADD1
DQ2
ATADD13 LUTADD12 LUTADD2
DQ3
ATADD14 LUTADD13 LUTADD3
DQ4
LUTADD14
LUTADD15
6C4| U A D D 16
LUTADD16 /LUTADD6
6C4 UADD17
LUTADD17
6C4|UADDI8
AS
LUTADD9
A9
LUTADD10
AID
/LUTADD1I
A l l
LUTADD12
2 C 1 | / L A D D E N >- A12
LUTADD13
A13
LUTADD14
A14
74FCT827 LUTADD15
A15
LUTADD16
A16
LUTADD17
A17
OE
3 Dl["LUTADD [ 0 . .17 ] LUTADDr Q . .17 1 r
-:E
MCM6229A-25
2C1| / L U T W E >—
2C5rCLK17Q >-
LOOKUP TABLE
S i z e Do t~it Number REV
1 . 0
June 7 , 19 9 5 1-Sheet
ONE SECTION ONLY.
4 C U R S D A T [ 0 . . 9~j 3
U24
23 V2I0
DO YO
22 V 2 f l ~ V
Dl Y l
21 V2T2~\
D2 Y2
2 0 V2"l3~\
D3 Y3
19 V2"l4~~\
D4 Y4
15 V2T5~N
D5 Y5
17 V2~I6~N
D6 Y6
16 V2i7~\
D7 Y7
15 V2"l8~^
DS Y8
14 V2T9~\
D9 Y9
s
OC
> CP
74FCT821
2 3 V2I0
22 V2TT~\
21 V2I2~\
2 0 V2I3 >
19 V2I4~\
IS V2"l5^\
17 V 2 I 6 A
1 6 V2I7~N
15 V2IS~N
14 V2I9~\
L ^ ^ f i m * * £ i ^ y 2 I [ 0 ..9 F > 2A4
2C1
2B5
2B5 IHSYNC
2B5 FIELD
2B5 DISPVID;
2C1 DISPVIDL
2B5 VI DEN ~>-
RSBUF.SCH
RE-SYNC BUFFER
1 . 0
19 9 5 | S h e e t
- 7 T U T S E L > 2C4
/CNVSEL2
-/CNVSEL2 >2C4
/CNVSEL1
- / C W V S E ' l i " > 2C4
• F N C O > 3D4
- F N C 1 > 3D4
- FNC2 > 3D4
- F N C 3 > 3D4
LTCHOK FI,
LTCHOFFH
I I I I I I
J OOOOO
3 4 4 4 4 4
7 6 5 4 3 2
/HRESET
1041 H / M R E 5 E T > 2 C 4 , 3C8 , 5A5
IO40
1039
103 8
1037
103 6
17
CLK3/ 15
CLK2/14
103 5
1034
1033 -I / DATOUT> 7C5
1032 •j i DT E N L > 7C5
IQ31
1 I I I
DOOO
2 2 2 2
5 7 8 9
MACH220-15
IODRTE.PDS
ATINTF.SCH
T i t l e
AT INTERFACE
C 1 . 0
Date: June 7, 1595lsheet 6 o f 8
8 I I? 1 C A T D A T [ 0 - - 9] > 3D8,4C7
=| A T A D D [ Q . . 7 ) > 3C6 , 4C7
6C4I/MEMCS16
8 1 1 1
----? - 5 = ^ ATADD [ 8 . • 1 5 1 > 3C6, 4C7
ATCONN.SCH
T i t l e
AT INTERFACE
S i z e Docun e n t Number- REV
C 1 . 0
Date June 13, 1995|Sheet 7 of 8
POWER INDICATOR LAMPS
R14
230
•ii RED
T
X
X
X
RTEPWR.SCH
RTE POWER & DECOUPLING

1 . 0
June 13, 1995|Shee~
SECTION 8.5
SECTION 8.4
RESERVED
80486 Deep Green Motherboard, Version 1.7
Configuration for the EMS Imaging Systems.
INTRODUCTION
IMS imaging systemsrequirea very fast andreliablemotherboard and high speed C P U

processor and must conform to all standard IBM bus timing and A T protocols. The 80486
Deep Green Motherboard, Version 1.7 meets these requirements and is compatible with all
hardware and software operations of the IMS imaging systems. Note: The IMS 2760
Imaging system with the CINE option is the only system that requires a Pentium type
motherboard, please refer to Pentium Motherboard documentation for system operating
parameters.
The 80486 Deep Green Motherboard, Version 1.7 controls all image processing functions
of the IMS imaging systems. The motherboard has seven ISA 16-bit I/O bus card slots
and three V E S A slots. The board was introduced into production September 16,1996.
The 80486 Deep Green Motherboard, Version 1.7 can be used in all of the DIS-300, DIS-
O
400, IMS 2000, and IMS 2760 (except IMS 2760 CINE option) imaging systems.
INSTALLATION
When the motherboard is first installed it is important to check the BIOS settings as well
as the Hardware Jumper configuration.
Be careful when physically installing the motherboard into the imaging system computer
case that the mounting hardware matches the mounting hole layout on the motherboard.
MOTHERBOARD CONFIGURATION
The motherboards BIOS setup and Hardware Jumpers must be configured to match the
particular imaging system parameters it istobe used in. The BIOS should be checked if
the on-board battery has failed or if new hardware has been installed into the motherboard.
DIS/IMS Imaging Systems Section 8.5

International Medical Systems 80486 Deep Green Motherboard, Ver 1.7
HARDWARE JUMPER CONFIGURATION
Refer to Section 8.5.1 for jumper location on the motherboard.
1.) JP1, 2-3

2.) JP2, 2-3
3.) Enhanced 100MHz A M D DX4 processor:
a.) JP27, 1-2 & 3-4
b.) JP28, 1-2 & 4-5
c.) JP29, 1-2 & 4-5
d.) JP30, 3-4 & 5-6
e.) JP32, 1-2
f.) JP33, 1-2 & 3-4
4.) C P U clock setting:
a.) DIS 300 and DIS 400 systems:
JP6 - OFF, JP7 - OFF, JP8 - O N
b.) IMS 2000 and IMS 2760 systems:
JP6 - O N , JP7 - O N , JP8 - O N
5.) JP31, O F F
( J 6
) OFF
7.) C P U Power selectors:
a.) JP24, 1-2
b.) JP25, 1-2
c ) JP26, 1-2
d.) JP35, O N
8.) JP16, O F F
9.) JP17, O N
10.) JP 20, used on IMS 2760 systems only.
11.) Jumpers N O T U S E D : JP15, JP19, JP22, JP23.
C
DIS/IMS Imaging Systems Section 8.5
BIOS CONFIGURATION
Refer to Section 8.5.1 for BIOS setting options.
BIOS settings:
1.) S E T U P :
- STANDARD:
a.) Date/Time.
b.) Floppy A : (1.44 MB)
c. ) Floppy B: (not installed)
d.) Hard Disk C : (use auto detect utility in UTILITY window)
e.) Hard Disk D : (use auto detect utility in UTILITY window)
-ADVANCED:
a.) Typematic Rate: Disabled
b.) System Keyboard: Absent
c.) Primary Display: Mono
d.) Above 1MB Memory Test: Enabled
c.) Memory Test Tick Sound: Enabled
d.) Hit "Del" Message Display: Disabled
o e.) Extended R O M R A M area:

f.) Wait for T T " if any error
g.) System Boot-up Num Lock:
0:300
Disabled
Off
b_) Floppy Drive Seek at Boot:
Enabled: (DIS 300 and DIS 400 system)
Disabled: (IMS 2000 and 2760 system)
L) System Boot-Up sequence:
A - C : (DIS 300 and DIS 400 system)
C : - A : (IMS 2000 and 2760 system)
j.) System Boot Up C P U Speed: High
k.) External Cache: Disabled
1.) Internal Cache: Disabled
m.) Internal Cache W B or WT: Disabled
n.) Password Qiecking: Setup
o.) A l l Shadow settings: Disabled
p.) IDE Multi Sector Transfer, Auto
q.) Primary 32 Bit Transfer Mode: Disabled
r.) Primary Block Mode: Disabled
s.) Primary IDE L B A Mode: Master
t.) Secondary IDE Present: None
u.) Secondary 32 Bit Transfer Mode Disabled
v.) Secondary Block Mode: Disabled
w.) Secondary IDE L B A Mode: Disabled
O
B I S S M S IfiaagHtg Systems Section 8.5

International M e d i c a l Systems 80486 Deep Green Motherboard, V e r 1.7
-CHIPSET:
a.) Auto config Function: Disabled
b.) Cache Read Hit Wait State: 3-1-1-1
c.) Cache Write Hit Wait State: OWS
d.) D R A M Wait State Select: OWS
e.) D R A M Page Mode: Fast
f.) Keyboard Clock Select: 7.2 MHz
g.) A T Clock Select:
-16 (DIS 300 and DIS 400 systems)
-15 (IMS 2000 and IMS 2760 systems)
b_) Local Ready Delay Setting: No Delay
L) C P U ADS# Delay Lt or Not: No Delay
j.) Alt Bit in Tag S R A M 8+0 Bits
k.) Signal LDEV# Sample Time: in T5
L) ISA Bus refresh disable Bit: Fast
m.) D R A M Refresh Method: R A S only
n.) Divider for Refresh: 1/1
o.) Video R O M Cache C000,32K: Disabled
p.) System R O M Cache F000,64K: Disabled
q.) LOWA2O0 Select: Chipset
r.) R C Reset Select: Chipset
s.) IO Recovery Time Select: 5BLCK
-Power Mgmt: Do N O T use this option
2.) U T I L I T Y
- I D E Setup: By selecting the IDE Setup the nKjtherboard will automatically detect any
hard drives connected to the IDE controller card.
-Color Set: Not used
3.) SECTJRLTY
-Password: Do N O T use the password function on the motherboard.
- Anti-Virus: Do N O T use the anti-virus function on the motlierboard.
4. ) D E F A U L T
-Original: Do N O T use the Original default settings.
-Optimal: Do N O T use the Optimal default settings.
DIS/LMS Imaging Systems Section 8.5

DIS/IMS Imaging Systems
Section 8.5.1
International Medical Systems 10/01/96
8 0 4 8 6 Deep Green Motherboard, V e r 1.7
R P V 1 -1
CAUTION
1. Please short pins 2-3 o n j u m p e r JP1 before u s i n g
this system mainboard.
2. In G R E E N C P U inactive m o d e , the system w i l l stop

the D O S timer. To update the D O S timer, please
use Microsoft P O W E R . E X E to p u t the f o l l o w i n g
line i n y o u r config.sys file:
The information presented i n this p u b l i c a t i o n has been

carefully checked for r e l i a b i l i t y ; h o w e v e r , n o
r e s p o n s i b i l i t y is a s s u m e d for inaccuracies.
Specifications are subject to change w i t h o u t notice.
Trademarks
I B M , P C / A T , a n d P C / X T are trademarks of
International Business Machines C o r p o r a t i o n .
O Intel is a trademark of Intel C o r p o r a t i o n .
A M D is a trademark of A d v a n c e d M i c r o Devices Inc.
C y r i x is a trademark of C y r i x C o r p o r a t i o n .
U M C is a trademark of U n i t e d Microelectronics
Corporation.
A M I is a registered trademark of A m e r i c a n Megatrends

Inc.
TI is a trademark of Texas Instruments C o r p o r a t i o n .

Section 8.5.1
80486 Deep Green Motherboard, Ver 1.7
• •
jj
Contents
C h a p t e r 1: I n t r o d u c t i o n 1
K e y Features 1
U n p a c k i n g the M a i n b o a r d 3
M a i n b o a r d C o m p o n e n t Locations 4
C h a p t e r 2: H a r d w a r e C o n f i g u r a t i o n 5
P o w e r Precautions 5
Jumper S w i t c h Settings 5
JP3 - F l a s h R O M V P P Supply Selector 6
JP27-JP30, JP32, JP33 - C P U Type Jumpers 6
JP6-JP8 - C P U C l o c k Setting 8
JP31 - Intel 80486DX4 C P U Clock M u l t i p l i e r Jumper 9
JP34 - A M D 80486DX4 C P U C l o c k M u l t i p l i e r Jumper 9
JP21-JP24, JP35 - C P U Power Selectors 9
JP16 - V E S A C l o c k Selector 9
JP17 - V E S A W a i t State 10
M e m o r y Configuration 10
C h a p t e r 3: M a i n b o a r d Installation 11
j Connectors 11
J l - K e y b o a r d Connector 11
J9 - P o w e r S u p p l y Connectors 11
J18 - Speaker Connector 12
JP1 - External Battery 12
JP15 - K e y l o c k & Power L E D Connector : 13
JP19 - T u r b o L E D Connector 13
JP20 - Reset S w i t c h Connector 13
JP22 - T u r b o S w i t c h Connector 14
JP23 - S u s p e n d Switch Connector 14
System A s s e m b l y O v e r v i e w 15
C h a p t e r 4: B I O S Setup 16
A M I W i n B I O S Setup 17
W i n B I O S Setup M a i n M e n u '. 18
Setup W i n d o w : 19
Utility W i n d o w 24
Security W i n d o w 25
} Default W i n d o w 27
E x i t i n g W i n B I O S Setup 28
DIS/IMS Imaging Systems Section 8.5.1 10/01/96

International Medical Systems 80486 Deep Green Motherboard, Ver 1.7 Rev. 1 - 3
Chapter 1
Introduction
T h e 80486 Deep G r e e n m a i n b o a r d is a 32-bit h i g h -
performance system board. This mainboard is not o n l y
compatible w i t h I B M A T systems, b u t i t also provides
p o w e r - s a v i n g features that a l l o w the user to p r o g r a m
the timer.
The 80486 Deep G r e e n m a i n b o a r d features on-board

p o w e r management that a l l o w s the user to assign
system clock rates, h a r d disk p o w e r s a v i n g a n d d i s p l a y
p o w e r s a v i n g w h e n entering d o z e m o d e , s u s p e n d
m o d e o r inactive mode.
O Key Features
A d v a n c e d features of the 80486 Deep G r e e n m a i n b o a r d
include:
• Supports C P U s n i n n i n g at
25/33/40/50/66/75/80/100/120 M H z :
— Intel P24T
— Intel P24D
— Intel 80486DX4 (P24C)
— Intel 8 0 4 8 6 D X 2 / D X / S X - S L
— Intel 8 0 4 8 6 D X 2 / D X / S X
— Cyrix CX486DX2/DX/S
— C y r i x 5X86
— A M D AM486DX4 / D X 2 / D X
— UMCU5
o
DIS/IMS Imaging Systems Section 8.5.1
L I w r i t e back or write through cache
• L2 w r i t e back policy for h i g h performance
• Flexible cache R A M size 64/128/256/512/1024 K B

i n t w o banks or one bank w i t h 16 bytes line size
• D R A M auto-detection / b a n k i n g
• Four banks of D R A M w i t h m e m o r y size to 64 M B

u s i n g combinations of 256K, 1 M , 2 M , 4 M , 8 M , 1 6 M ,
32M, 64M S I M M
• Provides green P C power management
• L e v e l 2 cache p o w e r saving
• Supports four p o w e r management modes for S M M

r-\ (System Management M o d e ) C P U s : O n , S t a n d b y ,
w
Inactive, Off.
• Seven 16 bit I / O slots i n c l u d i n g three 32-bit V L - B u s

master slots
• O n - b o a r d CR2032 3.0 Volt l i t h i u m battery
• 237-pin Z I F socket
• Provides flash R O M support
• F u l l y supports Microsoft A P M (advanced power

management)
• Supports 3.3 / 4.0 Volts for l o w voltage C P U
O
Introduction
Unpacking the Mainboard

The m a i n b o a r d comes packed i n a sturdy c a r d b o a r d
s h i p p i n g carton. T h e carton contains:
• The 80486 M a i n b o a r d
• This User's G u i d e
Note: Do not remove the mainboard from its original

packing until you are ready to install it.
The m a i n b o a r d is easily damaged b y static electricity.

Observe the f o l l o w i n g precautions w h i l e u n p a c k i n g
o and installing the m a i n b o a r d .
1. T o u c h a n u n p a i n t e d area of the system chassis

before h a n d l i n g the mainboard o r any component.
D o i n g so discharges the static charge y o u r b o d y
may have built.
2. Remove the m a i n b o a r d f r o m its anti-static

w r a p p i n g a n d place it o n a g r o u n d e d surface,
component side u p .
3. Inspect the m a i n b o a r d for damage. S h i p p i n g m a y

have loosened integrated circuits from their
sockets. If any integrated circuit appears loose,
press carefully to seat it f i r m l y i n its socket.
D o n o t a p p l y p o w e r if the m a i n b o a r d a p p e a r s
damaged. If there is damage to the board, o r items are
missing, contact y o u r dealer immediately.
o
Internationa! Medical Systems 80486 D e e p Green Motherboard, V e r 1.7
4 Chapter 1
Mainboard Component Locations
Figure 1-1. Mainboard Component Locations
D I S / M S Imaging Systems
Section 8.5.1
International Medical Systems 10/01/96
80486 Deep Green Motherboard, Ver 1.7 Rev. 1 - 7
Chapter 2
Hardware Configuration
Before y o u install the 80486 mainboard into the system
chassis, y o u m a y f i n d it convenient to first configure
the mainboard's hardware. This chapter describes h o w
to set jumpers and install m e m o r y modules, a n d where
to attach components.
Power Precautions
Before y o u begin c o n f i g u r a t i o n , make sure y o u are
working with an unplugged mainboard. M a n y
components are p o w e r e d b y low-voltage current, b u t
there still m a y be a dangerous electric current c o m i n g
f r o m the leads a n d power s u p p l y . Take the f o l l o w i n g
O precautions:
• T u r n off the p o w e r supply, a n d u n p l u g the p o w e r

cord before y o u begin.
• U n p l u g all cables that connect the mainboard to

a n y external devices.
Jumper Switch Settings

Y o u can configure hardware options b y setting j u m p e r
switches o n the m a i n b o a r d . See Figure 1-1 for j u m p e r
locations. Set a jumper switch as follows:
• Short a jumper b y placing the plastic jumper cap

over two pins of the jumper.
• Open the pins of a jumper b y r e m o v i n g the jumper
B I S / M S Imaging Systems Section 8.5.1

\
I
6 Chapter 2
Note: When you open the jumper, attach the plastic jumper
cap to one of the pins so you won't lose it.
F o r setting 3-pin jumpers, the symbols b e l o w are used:

1- 2 Pins 1 a n d 2 are Shorted w i t h a j u m p e r cap.
2-3 Pins 2 a n d 3 are Shorted w i t h a j u m p e r cap.
F o r setting 2-pin j u m p e r s , the f o l l o w i n g symbols are

used:
ON The jumper is Shorted ( O N ) w h e n the jumper
cap is placed over the t w o pins of the jumper.
OFF The jumper is O p e n (OFF) w h e n the jumper cap

is taken off of the jumper.
Q
JP3 - Flash ROM VPP Supply Selector
JP3 is the Flash R O M P r o g r a m Voltage selector.
Description JP3
5 volt 1-2
12 v o l t 2-3
JP27-JP30, JP32, JP33 - CPU Type

Jumpers
Set j u m p e r s J P 2 7 - J P 3 0 , JP32,and JP33 so that the
m a i n b o a r d recognizes the type of C P U i n s t a l l e d . Set
C P U type as below.
\ Note: A wrong setting may cause the system to hang up.

Hardware Configuration
Intel 486SX
JP27 o o o oo
JP28 o e Qo o o
JP29 o o o oo o O O O O
JP32
JP30 o o o oo o o e 9o JP33
Intel/AMD 486DX/DX2 (None Green)
JP27 o o o o o
JP28 o e 9p o o
JP29 o o o o o o e O H M JP32
JP30 o o o o o o JP33
e 9 e 9
1
O Intel 486DX2/DX4 SL
e 9 O O O O
e 9 O O O O
o o JP32
o o o o CO JP33
Intel P24D
Enhanced AMD DX4
Cyrix 5X86
1
JP27 e o c 0 0
JP28 e o 0 c o o
JP29 C O 0 C 9 o o o JP32
JP30 l l° C 9 9
Q JP33

Section 8.5.1 10/01/96
80486 Deep Green Motherboard, Ver 1.7 Rev. 1 -10
8 Chapter 2
\ Intel P24T
JP27 e o •• 0
JP28 e oo o o o
9 9o o o o
••
JP29
JP30 0 oo o
Cyrix M7
1
JP27 'WC 9BMH
JP28 9 9 e 9 9 9
JP29 9 9 9 9 9 9 o o JP32
JP30 09 9 9 90 JP33
o UMC U5
JP27 o oo o o
JP28 o g o o o
JP29 p o o
JP30 o o o o
JP6-JP8 - CPU Clock Setting

C P U Clock JP6 JP7 JP8
25 M H z OFF OFF ON
33 MHz ON ON ON
40 M H z OFF ON ON
50 M H z ON OFF OFF

Hardware Configuration 9
JP31 - Intel 80486DX4 CPU Clock Multiplier

Jumper
Clock Multiplier JP31
3X OFF
2.5 X 1-2
2X 2-3
JP34 - AMD 80486DX4 CPU Clock

Multiplier Jumper
Clock Multiplier JP34
3X OFF
2X ON
JP21-JP24, JP35 - CPU Power Selectors

C P U Power JP24 JP25 JP26 JP35
5 Volts 2-3 2-3 2-3 OFF

3.3 V o l t 1-2 1-2 1-2 ON
4 Volts 1-2 1-2 1-2 OFF
JP16 - VESA Clock Selector

W h e n the C P U clock is less than o r e q u a l to 33 M H z
take the j u m p e r O F F of JP16. W h e n the C P U clock is
greater than 33 M H z p u t a jumper O N JP16.
Description JP16
< = 33 M H z OFF
O > 33 M H z ON

10 Chapter!
JP17-VESA Wait State

JP17 sets the V E S A wait state.
Description JP16
OWS OFF
1WS ON
Memory Configuration
The D R A M sub-system contains 4 b a n k s . F o u r 3 0 - p i n
S I M M sockets U 8 - U 1 1 are b a n k 2; t w o 72-pin S I M M
sockets U 1 7 is bank 1 a n d 3; U18 is b a n k 0 a n d 2.
o Y o u can not install 30-pin S I M M i f y o u use 2-bank type

D R A M i n U 1 8 , but y o u can install 3 0 - p i n S I M M i f y o u
use 1-bank type D R A M i n U18.
U8-U11 U18 U17

BANK 2 B A N K 0,2 B A N K 1,3
Installed 1-bank type D R A M 2-bank type D R A M
or or
None 1-bank type D R A M
or
None
. None 2-bank type D R A M 2-bank type D R A M
or or
1-bank type D R A M 1-bank type D R A M
or or
None None
O
International Medical Systems 80486 Deep Green Motherboard, Ver 1.7 Rev. 1 -13
Chapter 3
Mainboard Installation
Connectors
J1 - Keyboard Connector
A standard f i v e - p i n female D I N keyboard connector is
located at the rear of the board (Jl). P l u g the jack o n the
keyboard cable into this connector.
Pin Description
1 Keyboard Clock
2 Keyboard Data
3 Ground
O 4 Ground
5 +5VDC
J9 - Power Supply Connectors

T h e p o w e r s u p p l y connector has t w o s i x - p i n m a l e
header connectors. P l u g the d u a l connectors f r o m the
p o w e r directly onto the board connectors.
Pin Description Pin Description
12 +5VDC 6 Ground
11 +5VDC 5 Ground
10 +5VDC 4 -12V D C
9 -5VDC 3 +12V D C
8 Ground 2 +5VDC
7 Ground 1 Power Good
O

12 Chapter!
J18 - Speaker Connector

A t t a c h the system speaker to connector J18.
Pin Description
1 Data O u t
2 Not Used
3 Ground
4 +5V
JP1 - External Battery

T h e 80486 m a i n b o a r d has a non-rechargeable l i t h i u m
battery o n - b o a r d ; h o w e v e r , y o u can also attach a n
external battery to connector JP1. U s i n g a n external
battery helps y o u conserve the on-board battery.
Description JP1
External Battery 1-4
Internal Battery 2-3
Clear C M O S 3-4
Note 1: The factory default setting has a jumper cap on pins

3-4 to avoid losing battery power during shipping.
For an installed internal battery, place a jumper cap
on pins 2-3. When you install an external battery,
remove this jumper cap.
Note 2: To clear the CMOS configuration, place a jumper

cap on pins 3-4 and then place the cap back on pins
2-3 for normal operation.
o
JP15 - Keylock & Power LED Connector
JP15 is a k e y l o c k connector that enables a n d disables
the keyboard a n d the P o w e r - L E D o n the case.
Pin Description
1 L E D power
2 Not Used
3 Ground
4 Keyboard lhhibiter
5 Ground
JP19-Turbo LED Connector

o JP19 is u s u a l l y connected to a T u r b o L E D o n front of
the system case. If the system b o a r d select is i n T u r b o
mode, the indicator lights d u r i n g high-speed operation.
Pin Description
1 +Anode
2 -Cathode
JP20 - Reset Switch Connector

A t t a c h the Reset s w i t c h cable to this connector. T h e
Setting Description
Short Reset
Open N o t Reset

J4 • Chapter 2
JP22-Turbo Switch Connector

JP22 connects to the T u r b o s w i t c h , w h i c h is used to
select the mainboard's clock speed.
Setting Description
Open Turbo M o d e
Short L o w speed M o d e
In a d d i t i o n to s w i t c h i n g clock speed u s i n g h a r d w a r e
control v i a the turbo s w i t c h , y o u can also s w i t c h the
c l o c k s p e e d u s i n g software c o n t r o l v i a k e y b o a r d
commands.
The keyboard commands are as follows:

kJ C T R L , A L T , [+]: Press these three keys
simultaneously to select T u r b o
Mode.
C T R L , A L T , [-1: Press these three keys
simultaneously to select L o w
Speed M o d e .
N o t e that h a r d w a r e control a n d software control are

alternately activated. Before y o u can activate software
c o n t r o l f r o m h a r d w a r e c o n t r o l , a n d v i c e versa, the
system must be i n H i g h Speed M o d e .
JP23 - Suspend Switch Connector

A p u s h button attached to this connector lets y o u force
the system to enter suspend mode.
O
System Assembly Overview

A f t e r y o u have installed and connected the mainboard,
assemble components i n the f o l l o w i n g order:
1. Power S u p p l y : Place the p o w e r s u p p l y so that it
fits the raised tongues o n the chassis floor. Insert
and fasten the t w o screws o n the back panel of the
chassis. Connect the power s u p p l y to the power
supply connectors, J9.
2. D i s k D r i v e s : Slide the disk drives into the chassis.

Connect a w i d e 34-wire r i b b o n cable to each disk
drive; this cable w i l l attach to a n adapter card. The
power s u p p l y has four cables, each w i t h four wires.
Connect these cables to the d i s k drives.
O 3. A d a p t e r C a r d s : Insert each adapter card — D i s k
Controller cards, V i d e o card, Serial/Parallel
Interface card, etc. — according to the configuration
instructions that come w i t h the card. Connect the
disk drives to the F l o p p y D i s k a n d H a r d D i s k
Controller cards.
4. K e y b o a r d : Connect the keyboard to its connector,
5. D i s p l a y : Connect the d i s p l a y cable to the V i d e o

C a r d , a n d the display's p o w e r cord into a power
outlet.
6. Case: Slide o n the case cover and fasten its screws.
Connect the p o w e r cord to the p o w e r s u p p l y and p l u g
it into a w a l l outlet. P u t y o u r boot d i s k into d r i v e A :
a n d turn o n the p o w e r . Y o u w i l l then need to r u n the
o BIOS setup p r o g r a m .

International Medical Systems 80486 Deep Green Motherboard, Ver 1.7 Rev. 1-18
Chapter 4
BIOS Setup
This chapter explains h o w to configure the mainboard's
BIOS setup program. The setup p r o g r a m p r o v i d e d w i t h
the m a i n b o a r d is the A M I W i n B I O S f r o m A m e r i c a n
Megatrends Inc.
A f t e r y o u have c o n f i g u r e d the m a i n b o a r d , a n d have

a s s e m b l e d the c o m p o n e n t s , y o u c a n t u r n o n the
c o m p l e t e d system. A t this point, r u n the software setup
jQ to ensure that the system information is correct.
T h e s o f t w a r e setup of the system b o a r d is a c h i e v e d

through Basic Input-Output System (BIOS)
p r o g r a i n m i n g . Y o u use the BIOS setup p r o g r a m to tell
the o p e r a t i n g s y s t e m w h a t t y p e of d e v i c e s are
connected to y o u r system board.
T h e system setup is also called C M O S setup. N o r m a l l y ,

y o u n e e d to r u n system setup if either the h a r d w a r e is
n o t i d e n t i c a l w i t h information contained i n the C M O S
R A M , o r if the C M O S R A M has lost p o w e r .

BIOS Setup 17
AMI WinBIOS Setup
T o enter the W i n B I O S Setup p r o g r a m :
1. T u r n o n o r reboot the system. A screen appears

w i t h a series of diagnostic checks.
2. W h e n " H i t < D E L > if y o u w a n t to r u n S E T U P ' '

appears, press the < D E L > k e y to enter the B I O S
setup p r o g r a m . The f o l l o w i n g screen appears:
C$SfflM'Xv*-H-V
Standard Adrancad Chlpaat IDE Satup Color Sat
/
Powar MjjMt
ef
Pa••word Anti-Virua Original Optimal
Sat Data, Tiaa, Floppy, Hard Disk
3. C h o o s e o p t i o n s w i t h the k e y b o a r d o r mouse.
M o d i f y settings to reflect s y s t e m o p t i o n s . Press A l t -
H for H e l p .
O
WinBIOS Setup Main Menu
The W i n B I O S Setup m a i n m e n u has four w i n d o w s : the
Setup, Utilities, Security and Default w i n d o w s .
•x-v-v •:•<•>:••- S e t u p
Standard Adrancad Chlpaat ZDZ Satup Color Sat
Powar Most
Paaaword
<2>
Antl-Virua
•
Original
B
Optimal
O Sat Data, Tiaa, Floppy, Eard Diak
Setup
The Setup w i n d o w has five icons that let y o u set system
c o n f i g u r a t i o n options such as date, t i m e , h a r d d i s k
type, f l o p p y type, a n d many others.
Utilities
T h i s w i n d o w has f o u r icons that p e r f o r m system
functions.
Security
This w i n d o w ' s t w o icons control W i n B I O S security
features.
Default
o This w i n d o w ' s three icons let y o u select default settings
for a l l W i n B I O S Setup options. Choose the O p t i m a l
settings for best performance characteristics.
BIOS Setup 19
Setup Window
The Setup w i n d o w has four icons that allow y o u to set
system configuration options.
m if*
Standard Advanced Chipset
S
Power Mgmt
Standard Setup
o D o u b l e - c l i c k o n the S t a n d a r d icon a n d the Standard
Setup screen appears:
Standard Seiu
I — B l
I—Bl
Date/Time Floppy A Floppy B
Hard Disk C Hard Disk D
DIS/TMS Imaging Systems Section 8.5.1 10/01/96

International Medical Systems 80486 Deep Green Motherboard, Ver 1.7 Rev 1 - 77
Select the i c o n of the items y o u w i s h to change, a n d
m o d i f y them u s i n g the keyboard or mouse.
1
Date/Time C u r r e n t values are displayed. Enter n e w

values u s i n g the keyboard.
HardDisk C: A screen listing a l l v a l i d d i s k types appears.
HardDisk D: Select the correct type a n d press <Enter>. If
the h a r d disk is an I D E d r i v e , go to the U t i l i t y
w i n d o w of the m a i n m e n u a n d select Detect
C : or Detect D : The W i n B I O S auto-detects the
I D E d r i v e parameters, w h i c h appear o n the
screen a n d then places them i n the D r i v e
T y p e fields i n the Standard Setup.
Floppy Drive A : Select the f l o p p y type w i t h the T4 keys.
Floppy Drive B: Settings are:
360 KB 5-1/4 inch
1.2 MB 5-1/4 inch
o 720 KB 3-1/2 inch

1.44 MB 3-1/2 inch
2.88 MB 3-1/2 inch
Advanced Setup
Double-click o n the A d v a n c e d i c o n a n d the A d v a n c e d
Setup screen appears, d i s p l a y i n g the items b e l o w .
Select items y o u w i s h to change, a n d m o d i f y t h e m
u s i n g the keyboard or mouse.
T y p e m a t i c Rate Typematic Rate sets the rate at w h i c h the
(Chars/Sec) characters o n the screen repeat w h e n a key is
pressed a n d h e l d d o w n . The settings are 15,20,
24, a n d 30 characters per second.
S y s t e m K e y b o a r d This i t e m specifies if error messages are
displayed w h e n a k e y b o a r d is not attached.
This o p t i o n lets y o u configure workstations
O that d o not have keyboards.
D I S / M S Imaging Systems Section 8.5.1

BIOS Setup 21
Primary Display Select this icon to configure the type of monitor
attached to the computer.
Above 1 M Enabled uses the W i n B I O S m e m o r y test o n a l l
M e m o r y Test system memory. Disabled o n l y uses the
m e m o r y test o n first 1 M B of system memory.
M e m o r y Test This i t e m enables or disables the ticking s o u n d
Tick Sound d u r i n g the memory test.
Hit " D e l " D i s a b l i n g this option prevents H i t < D E L > i f
Message Display y o u w a n t to r u n Setup f r o m appearing w h e n
the system boots.
Extended R O M This option specifies if h a r d d i s k data is stored
R A M Area i n the top 1KB of the system p r o g r a m m i n g
area, starting at 639K or 0:300 i n the system
BIOS area l o w memory.
Wait f o r " F l " I f If this option is enabled, W i n B I O S waits for the
A n y Error user to press <F1> before continuing.
o System Boot U p
N u m Lock
W h e n O N , this option turns off N u m L o c k
w h e n the system is powered o n .
Floppy Drive W h e n this option is enabled, W i n B I O S
S e e k at Boot performs a seek command o n f l o p p y drive A :
before booting the system.
S y s t e m Boot U p This option sets the sequence of boot drive that
C P U Speed W i n B I O S attempts to boot f r o m after P O S T
completes.
E x t e r n a l Cache Enables/disables secondary cache memory.
I n t e r n a l Cache Enables/disables C P U internal cache memory.
Internal Cache This item sets internal cache to w r i t e through
WB orWT or w r i t e back.
Password This option enables the p a s s w o r d check o p t i o n
Checking every time the system boots or the end user
runs Setup. If A l w a y s is chosen, a user
password prompt appears every time the
computer is turned on. If Setup is chosen, the
password prompt appears w h e n Setup is r u n .

22 Chapter 3
S h a d o w setting Enables/disables the Shadow function.
P r i m a r y 32 B i t This i t e m enables/disables the P r i m a r y I D E 32
Transfers M o d e bit transfer function.
Primary Block This i t e m enables/disables the P r i m a r y I D E
Mode Block m o d e function.
Primary I D E L B A This i t e m enables/disables P r i m a r y I D E L B A
Mode mode function.
Secondary I D E This i t e m selects the number of I D E o n
Present secondary controller to 1,2, or N o n e .
Secondary 32 B i t This i t e m enables/disables the Secondary I D E
Transfers M o d e 32 bit transfer function.
Secondary Block This i t e m enables/disables the Secondary I D E
Mode Block m o d e function.
Secondary I D E This i t e m enables/disables Secondary I D E
LBA Mode L B A m o d e function.
W h e n y o u f i n i s h w i t h the A d v a n c e d S e t u p , press
Q <ESC> o r c l i c k the exit b o x to r e t u r n to the Setup
Window.
Chipset Setup
Select the C h i p s e t i c o n a n d the C h i p s e t Setup screen
appears, d i s p l a y i n g the items below.
Select the items y o u w i s h to change, a n d m o d i f y them

u s i n g the keyboard o r mouse.
Base M e m o r y This o p t i o n sets the size of the base system
Size memory. T h e settings are 512KB or 640 K B .
Auto Config If the A u t o C o n f i g is enabled, W i n B I O S
Function loads A u t o Table to configure the system.
Local Ready Set L o c a l R e a d y signal N o Delay, IT, 2T, or
D e l a y Setting 3T.
0 Signal LDEV# Set L D E V # to be sampled at T2, T3, T4, T5.
Sample Time

BIOS Setup 23_
C P U ADS# Delay Set A D S # delay or N o t
I T or N o t
R O M Cacheable Select a range of cacheable R O M addresses.
L O W A 2 0 # Select Select L O W A 2 0 # signal generated b y
Chipset or K B controller.
W h e n y o u f i n i s h w i t h the Chipset S e t u p , press <ESC>
or click the exit box to return to the Setup W i n d o w .
Power Management Setup

Select the P o w e r M a n a g e m e n t i c o n a n d the P o w e r
M a n a g e m e n t screen appears, d i s p l a y i n g the items
b e l o w . Select items y o u w i s h to change, a n d m o d i f y
them w i t h the keyboard or mouse.
I D E Standby This o p t i o n specifies the length of time of
Power D o w n h a r d d i s k d r i v e inactivity that m u s t expire
o Mode before the I D E hard disk d r i v e is placed i n

I D E Standby Power M o d e .
Power Manager This i t e m enables/disables the P o w e r
M o d e Select M a n a g e r function.
Standby Timer This o p t i o n specifies the length of time of
Value the F u l l O n mode to Standby m o d e .
Inactive T i m e r This o p t i o n specifies the length of time of
Value Standby mode to Inactive m o d e .
M o n i t o r *** This o p t i o n enables W i n B I O S to monitor
Activity activity of different events.
Suspend/Resume This o p t i o n enables or disables the external
Switch S u s p e n d / R e s u m e switch. Use this s w i t c h to
enter Inactive mode directly.
Clock Out on This o p t i o n sets the C P U clock to Standby
Standby M o d e mode
V G A Power W h e n this option is N o r m a l , D P M S , or
Control S M A R T , the display is clear i n Inactive
Mode.
D I S / I M S Imaging Systems
Section 8.5.1 10/01/96
International M e d i c a l Systems
80486 Deep Green Motherboard, V e r 1.7 R e v . 1 - 26
24 Chapter 3
IDE Power W h e n this o p t i o n is enabled, the h a r d d i s k
Control w i l l " S p i n d o w n " i n inactive mode.
W h e n y o u finish w i t h the P o w e r M a n a g e m e n t S e t u p ,
press <ESC> or click the exit box to return to the Setup
Window.
Utility Window
The U t i l i t y w i n d o w has three icons that a l l o w y o u to
set f o l l o w i n g options.
O
?
IDE Setup C o l o r Set
Detect Master: and Detect Slave:

If D r i v e C : o r D r i v e D : is an I D E d r i v e , the B I O S
automatically detects the h a r d d i s k d r i v e parameters,
w h i c h appear i n this screen, a l l o w i n g y o u to configure
the drive.
Color Set
T h i s u t i l i t y lets y o u set the W i n B I O S Setup screen
colors.
O
BIOS Setup 25
Security Window
T h e Security w i n d o w has two icons w i t h security
functions.
{faux ^^^^m
Password Anti-Virus
Password
1. Select this icon a n d the Password keyboard
appears.
Q
2. Enter a 1~6 character password using either a
mouse or pen stylus, or typing y o u r keyboard. The
p a s s w o r d does not appear on the screen w h e n
typed..
If y o u d o not type any characters, and just press the

" E n t e r " key twice, the password is disabled.
3. The BIOS prompts y o u to re-enter the password to

confirm.
4. M a k e sure " P a s s w o r d C h e c k i n g " i n the A d v a n c e d

Setup is configured for " A l w a y s " or " S e t u p . " See
the section above o n " A d v a n c e d Setup."
3
Anti-Virus
Double-click this icon a n d a list box appears, a l l o w i n g
y o u to enable or disable the V i r u s Protection feature.
W h e n Enabled the BIOS issues a w a r n i n g w h e n any
p r o g r a m or v i r u s sends a D i s k F o r m a t c o m m a n d or
tries to write to the boot sector of a h a r d d i s k drive.
Formatting the Hard Disk Drive

Y o u s h o u l d not enable a n t i - v i r u s p r o t e c t i o n when
formatting a h a r d disk d r i v e .
The D O S h a r d d i s k Format utility does not use I N T 13h

f u n c t i o n A H = 0 5 h to f o r m a t the h a r d d i s k . It o n l y
verifies the h a r d disk u s i n g the I N T 13h V e r i f y function
(AH=04h). The v i r u s w a r n i n g message is n o t displayed
° d u r i n g D O S h a r d d i s k d r i v e forrnatting.
If the anti-virus feature is enabled, a v i r u s w a r n i n g

message is d i s p l a y e d w h e n y o u attempt to format the
h a r d disk drive.
If y o u select Continue, forrnatting proceeds as n o r m a l . If

y o u do not want to continue formatting, y o u m a y have
to press N several times ( d e p e n d i n g o n h o w m a n y
retries are p e r f o r m e d b y the u p p e r - l e v e l software).
D O S , for example, does at least five retries before the
Format utility is actually aborted.
O
D I S / I M S Imaging Systems Section 8.5.1
BIOS Setup 27
Default Window
The Default w i n d o w has three BIOS default settings.
Original Optimal
Original
Select this i c o n to r e t u r n to the system c o n f i g u r a t i o n
values present i n the W i n B I O S Setup w h e n y o u first
began this W i n B I O S Setup session.
o Optimal
Select this i c o n f o r settings that p r o v i d e the best
p e r f o r m a n c e c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s . If C M O S R A M is
c o r r u p t e d , t h e O p t i m a l settings a r e l o a d e d
automatically.

28 Chapter 3
Exiting WinBIOS Setup

T o exit the W i n B I O S Setup p r o g r a m :
1. Press <ESO> w i t h the k e y b o a r d u n t i l the Exit Setup

w i n d o w appears, or use the mouse to click the exit
box i n the screen's u p p e r left corner.
2. W h e n the Exit Setup w i n d o w appears, choose one

of the f o l l o w i n g :
"Save Changes a n d E x i t " saves y o u r changes a n d

reboots the s y s t e m
" D o not save changes a n d e x i t " ignores y o u r

changes a n d exits the p r o g r a m
" C o n t i n u e " continues w i t h the C M O S Setup.

SECTION 8.6
DIO-48 I/O
INPUT/OUTPUT
INTERFACE BOARD
IMS2000
DIO-48 INPUT I OUTPUT BOARD - II O
DIO-48 Universal TTL and I/O Interface Board for IMS2760 Image System
Introduction
The DIO-48 board is a half size 8bit I B M bus controlled input and output board. The board has 2 82C55A
Programmable Peripheral Interface Chips. These I.C.'s are used to send and receive T T L logic levels.
This is a high performance C M O S device offering 3 major modes of operation. Bus hold circuitry on all I / O ports
together w i t h T T L compatibility.
Purpose
The DIO-48 board has three main functions on the DIS image System.
1. DIO-48 board controls the C - A r m Exposure functions, and C - A r m control panel selection of
image system operations.
2. DIO-48 board scans the monitor control keyboard for key press.
3. DIO-48 board controls V i d e o relay switching for monitor displays
DIO-48 board controls the C - A r m signals for Exposure, Snapshot, Pulsed Fluoro, Image Store, Transfer and
C - A r m control panel blocking when image system is i n D S A , A V E , R D M modes. The I / O board also scans the
monitor keyboard for keys pressed to control the image system.
DIO-48 board JO connector controls the V C I board for video relays, monitor sync timing and control signals.
The DIO-48 board bus address must not be changed as software can only find the board on the A T bus if the
correct address is selected on each board. See Figure 8.6 - 1 for address switch settings.
N O T E : I / O interrupt request Jumper must be IRQ7 for system interrupt or keyboard w i l l not be recognized and
system w i l l fail to operate, (see Fig. 8.6 -1).
N O T E : The keyboard is no longer interrupt driven form software IMS2760 .Ola version or greater.
Therefore no attachment of the Jumper for IRQ7 is required.
M a k e sure the Jumper is removed form the board to prevent unwanted interrupt signals.
Functional Description
The DIO-48 is a general purpose T T L interface for the I B M P C / X T and A T Computers (and true compatibles).
The 48 lines are grouped into 6 ports of 8 lines each. Seven 8255 PPI chips supply these digital I / O lines.
Channels may be configured by software as inputs or outputs, i n groups of 8 lines. Also, on board are two 8253
Counter chips w h i c h supply (6), 16-bit counter/timers. A l m h z T T L Oscillator is on board to provide a time
base for the 8253.
(See Figure 8.6 - 2 for block diagram of DIO-48).
Exposcop 7000 / 2760 Section 8.6 04/05/96

International Medical Systems DIO-48 Board Rev. 2 -1
I/O Connectors
The pinouts are identical for each connector (JO and J l ). Each connector has 24 I / O lines (3 ports ), 5 volts and
ground. The individual ports are designated A , B, C . Port A has the lowest address. See figure 8.6 - 1 for p i n
orientation.
Connectors J O and J l Connectors J2 and J3
Pin# Legend Pin# Legend

1 PA4 1 GATE 1
2 +5V 2 +5V
3 PA5 3 N/C
4 PA2 4 OUT1
5 PA6 5 GATE 2
6 PA3 6 CLOCK 1
7 PA7 7 CLOCK2
8 PA1 8 OUT 2
9 PC7 9 N/C
10 PAO 10 N/C
11 PC5 11 CLOCK 0
12 PC6 12 N/C
13 PCO 13 GATEO
14 PC4 14 OUT0
15 PC2 15 N/C
16 PCI 16 GND
17 PC3
18 PB7
19 PBO
20 PB6
21 PB1
22 PBS
23 PB2
24 PB4
25 PB3
26 GND
IBM Connectors on the next page.

International Medical Systems DIO-48 Board Rev. 2 - 3
48 Channel I/O I/O PINOUTS
CONNECTORS
This board is used to scan the image system Keyboard control
J2 A N D J3
and the C-Arm / Video Interface board and provide interface of
C-Arm control signals for Fluoro Rad request and Release to
Exposcop 7000
N O T E : IRQ7 Should be removed with Software IMS2760

version . O l a .
I/O PINOUTS
CONNECTORS
JO A N D J l
PA4 1 2 +5V
PA5 3 4 PA2
PA6 5 6 PA3
PA7 7 8 PA1
PC7 9 10 PAO
PC5 11 12 PC6
PCO 13 14 PC4
PC2 15 16 PCI
PC 3 17 18 PB7
PBO 19 20 PB6
PB1 21 22 PB5
PB2 23 24 PB4
PB3 25 26 GND
Enable OSC-ClkO
Enable OSC-Clkl
Enable OSC-Clk2
not used
A4(16)-i Base
A5 (32) Address Select
A6 (64) 640 (280 Hex)
A7 (128)
A8 (256) Default
A9 (512H(0FF = TRUE)
I/O Address
Figure 8.6- 1

Internationa] Medical Systems DIO-48 Board Rev. 2 - 5
SECTION8.7
IDE/ATA HARD DRIVE

INTERFACE
IMS2000
IMS2760 IDE/ATA HARD DRIVE
INTERFACE CONTROLLER
INTRODUCTION
The IMS2760 Digital System " F R O M 03/28/96 serial 2016 C - A R M " includes the industrial standard Intelligent
D r i v e Electronics ( I D E / A T A ) digital disk interface. I M S only uses the I D E / A T A hard drive, a n d floppy
interfaces as of this date. W i t h some configurations a drive controller Vesa Local Bus w i l l be needed.
The IDE interface includes a 16 or 32 bit, bi-directional buffer. The floppy disk drive controller interface
supports the 1.44M 3 1 / 2 " micro floppy disk, which is used for service troubleshooting and c o p p i n g images to a
" B M P " file format.
NOTE: IDE/ATA drives are pre-formatted at the factory. Do not attempt to use AT diagnostics to perform a
low-level format, it cannot provide 1:1 interleave, and some IDE drives do not support low level format within
diagnostics. If you find it necessary to perform a low-level format due to image or data return failures, return
the drive to IMS for repair or reformatting.
We may use several types of controllers i n the IMS2760 Digital system. H o w e v e r it is important w h i c h type is
in our system. It must support a high speed main bus C L K of grater than 10 M h z and be fully I D E / A T A , M o d e 4 ,
PCI compatible.
N O T E : The I D E controller is located on the m a i n C P U board w i t h IMS2760 D S A / C I N E system. The I D E

controller is a P C I bus device and is directly l i n k e d w i t h the Pentium processor therefore the need for a sperate
controller is not needed. A l l systems w i t h a pentium processor w i l l require the B I O S set to I D E mode 4
operation.
Note: When Replacing the Hard Drive all Patient data files and image files will be lost and can not be
retrieved as they are part of the Drive that has been removed.
Note: Although offset/gain values are set at the factory, adjustment may be required due to subseqttent field
adjustments, user preferences, etc.
System Hard Drive information:
The I D E / A T A drive used i n the IMS2760 Digital system is listed below w i t h storage capabilities, type, sector
values, heads, etc for the drive. This information is necessary for reconfiguration of the C P U BIOS
Configuration tables.
SEGATE DECATHLON ST5850A 1656 CYL 16 HEADS 63 SECTORS. 800 MB
NOTE: FOR SYSTEM OPERATION UNDER CONTROL OF THE IMS2760 5000 MB IS USED IF DSA, CINE
4F/SEC OPTION WAS NOT PURCHASED
This drives are h i g h G shock rated, w i t h retractable self locking read write heads. The r u n shock rating is
> lOG's. Power off rating is > 60 to 70G's.
E x p o s c o p 7000 / IMS2760 Section 8.7 04/04/96

International M e d i c a l Systems I D E / A T A Drive Rev. 2 - 1
DATETIME.DAT I M A G E D A T E A N D TIME STORED FOR A L L I M A G E S O N T H E SYSTEM.
( D O N O T C H A N G E A N Y OF THESE V A L U E S OR SYSTEM WILL N O T
OPERATE CORRECTLY).
IMAGES.DAT I M A G E S . D A T IS A FILE O F I M A G E L O C A T I O N S , e.g. where on the image

disk are the patient images by sector and track.
CINE.DAT PROVIDES T H E I M A G E SYSTEM W I T H I N F O R M A T I O N A B O U T E A C H

CINE R U N STORED TO W H I C H PATIENT.
DSALUT T H E S E FILES A R E U S E D T O C O N T R O L T H E I M A G E C A P T U R E OF
MSALUT P I X E L I N T E N S I T Y F O R S U B T R A C T E D I M A G E S . T H E S E FILES S H O U L D
RSALUT N O T BE T A M P E R E D W I T H A S S Y S T E M O P E R A T I O N W I L L C E A S E
W I T H O U T T H E FILES.
DOS4GW.EXE DOS SYSTEM O P E R A T I O N FOR USE W I T H E X T E N D E D M E M O R Y A N D

A L L O C A T I O N F O R 32 BIT M O D E . ( D O N O T D E L E T E O R S Y S T E M W I L L
N O T OPERATE).
FNT8X12.IFN T E X T F O N T S T Y L E A N D SIZE. ( D O N O T D E L E T E O R S Y S T E M W I L L N O T
OPERATE CORRECTLY).
NOTE:
THE PATIENTS.DAT, CINE.DAT, IMAGES.DAT, DATETIME.DAT, AND SYSVARS.DAT FILES ARE
CREATED BY THE PROGRAM IF THEY ARE NOT DETECTED IN THE IMS2000 DIRECTORY OF THE HARD
DRIVE. HOWEVER IF THE SYSTEM FAILS TO READ THESE AND CREATES NEW FILES THE PATIENTS
PREVIOUS IMAGES WILL BE LOST.
T H E PMS2760 D I G I T A L S Y S T E M H A S O N L Y A 10MB A R E A O N T H E DISK F O R D O S R E L A T E D FILES,

P R O G R A M SOFTWARE, A N D PATIENT RECORDS A N D I M A G E INFORMATION. THE R E M A I N I N G A R E A
IS F O R I M A G E S T O R A G E BY S E C T O R A N D T R A C K .
H A R D DRIVE TYPES
Drive M o d e l Type Cylin Heads W-Pcomp L-Zone Sector Capacity

S E G A T E ST5850A 47 1656 16 65535 1656 63 800 M B '
System BIOS C M O S configuration w i l l require this information to properly control the hard drive.
Partition information:
The H a r d Drive for theIMS2760 Digital System w i l l only have a 10 Megabyte D O S partition. The 10MB area
is also formatted to allow the system to boot w i t h the PMS2760 software. C : drive must have an active
partition for self booting of the hard drive.
Flowchart
The image storage area is addressed by cylinder, sector, and track. This allows for controlled image storage and
lower overhead i n the store times needed for Image Page Display (16 images on monitor at once). See Example 2
Exposcop 7000 / IMS2760 Section 8.7 04/04/96

Protected File
Protected File Protected File Area Temopary D: Drive O N E
Protective File
Area Buffer Area N S P store area Chole size
Area Buffer
< 2F/Sec 250Img
.5 Megabyte IFS \ > 4F/Sec 500Img
Image File Storage Service Image

001-320.Img Area 4 M B
240 Megabytes
IPD
Image Page Dislay
C: DOS PARTITION Storage
IMS2000 <DIR>Data 28.5 Megabytes.
files Patients Data etc.
10 Megabytes Only.
IMS2000 H A R D D R I V E M E M O R Y A L L O C A T I O N
E X A M P L E - 2

Top
34
33
Spares •• • |• •• •
mm O
N O T E : A L L other pins
One Drive only
••
O O
• • are reserved.
Drive is master
Slave is present DO NOT USE THEM
Drive is slave l : J 8 Jumper Block
Remote L E D
connection
1
9(-) 10(+)
Mounting Rear Cable Mount for I D E / A T A H a r d Drive.

Mounting
bracket
bracket
ST5850A Top
H / D C o n t r o l l e r cable connector
40 J4 2 4 3 2 1
Power 1 = +12V
2 = +12 return
3 = +5 return
4 = +5 V
40 P i n H / D I D E
Cable
Figure 8 . 7 - 2
C o p y r i g h t 1995 b y IMS C o r p o r a t i o n . A l l rights reserved. R e p r o d u c t i o n o r issue to third parties i n any f o r m is not permitted without
express written authority o f IMS C o r p o r a t i o n . A l l other products are either trademarks or copyrights o f their respective owners.

International Medical Systems I D E / A T A Drive Rev. 2 - 7
SECTION 8.8
MGP DISPLAY
CARD ADAPTER
IMS2000
MGP /PCI VGA DISPLAY CARDS
PURPOSE MGP
The M G P card displays system information for service by means of a T T L monitor port C N 1 .
D u r i n g system operation a T T L monitor interfaced w i t h this board allows the service engineer to see the
actual functions and modes being used i n the software.i.e., Top of the fluoro loop. This statement tells
y o u the system is i n the fluoro mode waiting for the fluoro start command, Snapshot, or pulse fluoro
command to start acquiring images. There are many different modes and functions i n the system but by
watching the T T L monitor screen while testing the system y o u can determine what mode or function are
causing system failures.
The Parallel Printer Port is not used.
The M G P card is a monochrome graphics adapter plus printer interface and works under a high speed
data bus system, such as the A T and 386,486 or Pentium machines.
N O T E : The M G P mono display card is not used w i t h systems having the RDC2000 board. Please see
V G A display card information for use w i t h RDC2000 board.
It has the following features i n one adapter:

1. I B M Monochrome Display Adapter compatible
2. Hercules Graphics C a r d compatible
- Text mode 80H x 25V
- Graphics mode 720H x 384V
3. Support direct-Drive Monochrome monitors (TTL).
4. Parallel Printer Port is not used at this time.
Example of two different types of M G P display adapters.
The M G P display card can not be repaired in the field. Replacement of the card recommended
if the board fails.
CNl CNl
Direct Drive Direct Drive
Monochrome Monochrome
Monitor Monitor
•
D B 9 Connecter D B 9 Connecter
CN2 CN2
Printer Printer
Output Output
_TL
MGP Figure 8.8-1 MGP Figure 8.8 -2
I B M PC, P C - X T , P C - A T are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.

Hercules Graphics is a registered trademark of Hercules Computer Technology
Exposcop 7000 / IMS2760 Section 8.8 04/04/%.

International Medical Systems M G P / P C I V G A Display Cards Rev. 2 -1
PCI Series Graphic/ Video display cards
PURPOSE PCI VGA
The PCI display card provides the necessary interface to display the BIOS configuration information
and for software upgrades and service related diagnostics.
The IMS2760 Digital image system when used with the RDC2000 DSA/CINE board makes it necessary
to use a P Q series VGA video display card. The PCI requirements of the RDC2000 board also make the
selection of this video display card critical.
Removal and replacement of this board with a new board is critical. The base timing and memory
allocation and PCI interrupts can cause the VIP,UPS, and RDC2000 boards to not function properly.
Therefore you must only install new PCI VGA video display card that are provided form I M S to ensure
the best possible performance and operation of the image system.
The boards complies with the PCI Specification 2.0: Zero wait State Burst Mode, and Device auto
configuration.
The board Supports VGA resolutions from 1280 X1024 with 16 colors to 640 X 480 with 16.7 million
colors. The board requires the use of a VGA monitor mono or color. Color is preferred as later revisions of
software will take advantage of the color display in service functions in conjunction with the C-Arm.
IMPORTANT:
The PCI VGA boards use the same 15-pin (DB15) cable available from monitor manufactures to
interface with the IBM PS/2 computers. Using an incorrect cable may result in damage to the monitor
and/or adapter.
To replace the PCI VGA card please read the following.
1) Turn of all power.

2) Disconnect the monitor cable form the DB15 connector at the bottom or rear of the image
system if service monitor is attached.
3) Remove cover from computer case.
4) Remove hold down screw located at the outside edge of the board near the bottom of the
case.
5) Remove with caution do not force or bend the board when removing this may cause damage to
the P Q bus adapter on the CPU mother board.
6) Install the new board in the same place as the pervious board and make sure you do not force
the board or damage the PCI bus adapter.
7) Replace the holding screw.
8) Reinstall the computer cover
9) Reinstall the VGA monitor cable to the rear of the board and secure if needed for service.
10) turn on power when all cable and covers are reinstalled.

International M e d i c a l Systems M G P / P C 3 V G A Display Cards Rev. 2 - 2
Direct Drive video Display connector (Utao-S)
PIN# SIGNAL N A M E /
DESCRIPTION
1 Red
2 Green
3 Blue
4 M o n i t o r I D bit 2
5 Not USed
6 Ground
7 Ground
8 Ground
o
•
9 Not Used
10 Ground
11 Monitor I D bit 0
12 Monitor I D bit 1
13 H o r i z o n t a l Sync C
DB15
14 Vertical Sync Cable
15 M o n i t o r I D bit 3 Connector
PCI Local Bus Connector
I B M P C , P C - X T , P C - A T are registered trademarks of Internationa] Business Machines Corporation.

Hercules Graphics is a registered trademark of Hercules Computer Technology and any other names or trademarks are
propeny of their respective owners.

International M e d i c a l Systems M G P / P C I V G A D i s p l a y Cards Rev. 2 - 3
SECTION 8.9
SERVICE GUIDES
C-ARM IIMS2000
(
S E R V I C E GUIDES - SERVICE MENUS AND FLOWCHARTS
PURPOSE:
This section was prepared to assist the service engineer i n setting system default values, operational
parameters, a n d localizing problems to a sub-system, board or major component part.
Figure 8.10 - 1 Flowchart is used to localize a problem w i t h the keyboard interface

board, keyboard matrix, or possible I / O w h e n a repeated key activation of approximately
once per second is encountered from the C P U control. This might occur if a key were
stuck, bad ribbon cable connection or the I / O had a bad bus interface IC as an example.
Flowchart for keyboard interface is not valid for use with DSAJCINE system or with system
using version .Ola software or higher. The software version does not use the IRQ 7 PC bus
interrupt sig. Therefore the system will not use the sigform U2 pin 8 for keyboard operations.
Figure 8 . 1 0 - 2 Service Software Setup Display M e n u s . This flowchart w i l l help the service
engineer to enter the different menu screens and describe what they are used for.
NOTE: THESE ARE ONLY HELP GUIDES AND ARE NOT INTENDED TO BE THE SOLE
MEANS OF TROUBLESHOOTING THE C-ARM AND IMS2760 DIGITAL SYSTEM.

International Medical Systems Service Guides REV. 1 - 1
PRESS
SERVICE SOFTWARE SETUP DISPLAY MENUS SHIFT-EDGE A T THE SAME
TIME TO ENTER THE SERVCIE MODE
Gain and Offset

r Service M e n u
Gain Offset
Win -3 1400 3320 1) WNDW: Gain and Offset
Win-2 1425 3300
2) Nosie Reduction, LIH
Win - 1 1500 3240
Win Off 1600 3200 3) Defaults page #1
Win -1 1875 3185 4) Defaults page #2
Win-2 2050 3160
Win -3 2869 3070 5) Test Patterns
6) DSA Look Up Table
Use WNDW key to select 1-Off 7) MSA Look Up Table

Use arrow keys ro adjust gain & offset
8) RSA Look Up Table
Press ESC to exit. Enter to save Values
9) Update System Software
Ver IMS2760.0U. April 4,1996:
r Noise Reduction
Press ESC to exit
1) Fluoro Realtime filter Low 5

2) Fluoro Realtime filter Med 8
3) Fluoro Realtime filter High 16
4) Fluoro LIH filter Low 5
5) Fluoro LIH filter Med 7
6) Fluoro LIH filter High 16
7) Snapshot LIH filter 16
8) Pulse Fluoro LIH filter 8
9) Noise min 3
.Press Esc to exit, Enter to save Values

V /
Defaults page #1 Defaults page #2 Test Patterns
1) Text Circle radius 221 1) Auto clear Text during Fluoro 1) Grid
2) Auto window circle radius 120 2) DSA alert on 2) Circle
3) Screen Center X 518 3) Display Dose: kV,mA,Time
4) Screen Center Y 256 3) Gray scale
5) Radiation alert On 4) Pulse off time 249 4) Step wedge
6) Live monitor transfer 5) Resolution
7) Auto Select Contrast/rec 6) Test Partem
8) Sharp Low 25 7) Live video input
9) Sharp High 50 8) Freeze video input
0) Menu time out 1000
9) Copy BMP file to floppy
Press Esc to exit. Enter to save values Press Esc to exit, Enter to save values
Press ESC to exit
SERVICE SOFTWARE SETUP DISPLAY MENUS

International Medical Systems Service Guides Rev. 1-2
PURPOSE OF SERVICE SOFTWARE:
The service software is used for setting the system operational parameters and user preference items. The
software is broken u p into five parts as listed below.
1) W N D W G a i n and Offset
2) Noise Reduction, LIH
3) Defaults
4) Test Patterns
DESCRIPTION OF SERVICE SOFTWARE:
1) G A I N and OFFSET
The gain and offset functions of the image processor provide the necessary calibration to match the
analog to digital converter's range to the amplitude and level of the video input.
The Offset adjustment is used to set the A / D converter's lower range to the black level i n the video
signal. A n y signal below this level w i l l result i n a l l pixel values being converted to black until the
video signal rises above the offset value.
The G a i n is used to match the m a x i m u m signal amplitude (white level) to the A / D ' s m a x i m u m
conversion capacity ( i . e . 10 bit = 1024 gray scale).

The following steps 1-12 must be performed on the IMS 2000 / 2760 Imaging System prior to adjusting
the GAIN / OFFSET and ANALOG TV CAMERA.
UPS 2000 Output Levels:
WARNING
Exercise extreme caution when measuring on the VIP2000 and UPS2000 boards. Make sure power is off
before attaching meter and scopes to the board sets as permanent damage will occur if components are
inadvertently shorted.
1. Energize system.
2. Enter the Service M e n u b y h o l d i n g d o w n the Shift K e y while pressing the "Edge K e y " .
3. F r o m the Service M e n u , select item number 4 (Test Patterns).
4. F r o m Test Patterns, select item number 4 (Step Wedge).
5. Press the Escape K e y twice to return to n o r m a l operation mode and press the M O N / L - R key to transfer
the image to the right side monitor. The Step Wedge image should n o w appear on both monitors (left
and right).
Connect oscilloscope to the video output of the left monitor, leaving the 75 o h m termination switch
"on". A step wedge going u p o n both sides of the oscilloscope w i l l be seen.
7. Adjust potentiometer R43 o n U P 2000 board for a signal of 1.02 V p - p .
8. Connect oscilloscope to the video output of the right monitor, leaving the 75 o h m termination switch
"on". A step wedge going u p on both sides of the oscilloscope w i l l be seen.
9. Adjust potentiometer R40 on UPS2000 board for a signal of 1.02 V p - p .
10. Adjust potentiometer R45 to the m i n i m u m value ~ 1.2V at J16 terminated.
Left & Right Video BNC output Level

Monitor level „ „
VIP 2000 D.C. Offset and Gain

International Medical Systems Service Guides Rev. 1 - 4
WARNING
Exercise extreme caution when measuring on the VIP2000 and UPS2000 boards . Make sure power is off
11. O n the VTP2000 board, connect D C voltmeter between W6 (gnd) and W22 (DC gain).
(Reference F i g . 2 )
Adjust R l 12 for a reading of 0.54 V d c
12. O n the VLP2000 board, connect D C voltmeter between W6 (gnd) and W19 (offset).
(Reference Fig. 2 )
- Adjust R92 for a reading of 2.64 V d c
NOTE:
The following steps 1-6 must be performed on the IMS 2000 image system after the camera tube or
major image adjustments have been made to the T V camera.
Please see analog camera adjusting instructions for details of camera adjustments as this set of
instructions o n l y refer to the image system and assume camera is correctly calibrated.
IMS 2000 Video Signal O F F S E T and GAIN Matching to A/D ANALOG CAMERA
WARNING
Exercise extreme caution when measuring on the VIP2000 and UPS2000 boards . Make sure power is off
•
1. O n the monitor cart:
a. Connect oscilloscope channel 1 to the VTP2000 Board W 2 (video input) and ground, W 6 .
b. Connect oscilloscope channel 2 to the left monitor video output.
c. Leave the 75ohm termination switch on.
2. Enter the Service M e n u by h o l d i n g d o w n the Shift K e y w h i l e pressing the "Edge Key",
a Select item number 1 (window offset and gain)
b. U s i n g the W i n d o w K e y , select w i n d o w off.
NOTE:
The amplitude of the input signal at W2 should be measured from the reference level to the white peak
(Reference Fig. 8). The amplitude of the output signal at the left monitor video out, should be measured from
the pedestal to the white peak (Reference Fig. 9).
3. Place a l u m i n u m step wedge i n image field so that it appears horizontally across the image. Use

blade collimator to block raw radiation at the sides.Steps should range f r o m raw radiation (step 0)
to black (step 11). M a k e sure step wedge is located far enough away f r o m the LI. to f i l l the video
display f r o m side to side w i t h one step of raw radiation for a total of 11 steps.
STEP W E D G E O R I E N T A T I O N
4. The video level excluding the

sync pulse at W 2 of the V1P2000
board should be approximately
750mV at peak.
5. Set the oscilloscope o n channel 2 (.2v/div 20us)

-
a. W i t h fluoro on, observe channel 2 (video output), and adjust software offset value u p , using arrow
keys, u n t i l the pedestal just begins to separate from its reference level.
Adjust the
value back
d o w n to where
it just begins to
settle.

c. Record this numerical value. It should be approximately 3200-3300.
6. Connect the oscilloscope channel 1 to the junction of D4 and D 5 , input to A / D converter ( . 5 v / d i v 20us).
a. Remove the step wedge from the field and open the coLlimator completely.
b. Place a lead blocker i n the field so that it covers 2 / 3 of the image, leaving 1/3 u n b l o c k e d .
c. W i t h fluoro on, adjust the software gain value to set the white peak value to 3.45V - 3 5 5 V . D o not
exceed 3.6V.
d. Record this numerical value. It should be approximately 1400-1600.
7. Reconnect the oscilloscope channel 1 to W 2 .
e. Replace the step wedge i n the field as previously described.
f. Record the input levels (channel 1) of steps 0, 2,4, 8 and 11.
g. Record the output levels (channel 2) of steps 0 , 2 , 4 , 8 and 11.
h. Calculate the percent difference between the input and output of each step.
Percent difference = ((input - output) / input) x 100
This value should be less than 16%.
If the percent difference is greater than 16%, then the camera white peak or black level m a y require
subsequent adjustment. If the video level is too high, return to U 9 Board Adjustments a n d adjust white
peak a n d white clipping accordingly.
Exposcop 7000 / LMS2760 Section 8.9 04/05/96

2) LIVE NOISE REDUCTION
The system incorporates weighted frame averaging to help reduce noise in the live and last image
hold. The system employs an averaging technique termed "exponential averaging". This type of
averaging will reduce from 50 % to 87% of the noise in the live video image depending on the selected
value, i.e. 2,3,4,5,6,7,8 or 16 frames. Therefore the service software allows the service engineer to
select the value of noise reduction best suited for the customer as a default setting when the system turns
on. The selection of the image noise reduction is accomplished by selecting "2" from the main service
menu
The operator is allowed to select form the control keyboard LOW, MED, HIGH noise reduction which
in turn is a value set by the service engineer in the service menu. The value for LOW, MED, or HIGH can
be set to any value from 2 to 16 frames. The best results are given below for a new system.
LOW = 2 MED = 4 HIGH = 16 These values are set at the factory when the system is shipped.
SETTING THE NEW VALUE:
Select the number form list on the screen by pressing the corresponding number select function
LOW,MED,HIGH. Then enter value for noise reduction by pressing the numerical keys for number
of video frames to be averaged, i.e. 2,3,4,5, -16 needed then press the ENTER key to save the new value
for noise reduction.
NOTE: Selection 9 provides a base level of image noise reduction for system even if operator select no
NR reduction. This base value should be 2 to 3 frames but no less than 2. This will Limit all settings of
noise reduction NR, and LIH from going below the minimum set by this selection.
NOTE: When all entries are complete press ENTER to save the screen and it's new values to digital
disk
LAST IMAGE HOLD NOISE REDUCTION
LIH NOISE:
Refers to the function used a the end of a fluoroscopy when the radiation hand/footswitch is
released and the processing system averages images to reduce noise in the image to provide better
image quality.
The LAST IMAGE HOLD feature of noise reduction allows the operator to select a different value
of noise reduction when the Dr. releases the fluoroscopic footswitch this type of noise reduction is called
a finite impulse response filter . The system averages image together with a fixed pre-set number of
video image frames.
EXAMPLE : LIH set for four (4) image. The DR. releases the footswitch, C-Arm sends a signal to the
LMS2760 digital system to start the LLH mode. The image processor sets the value of image to the 4
images preselected then accumulates them in the image buffers and applies the LIH algorithm to the
images in the buffer. The results are then displayed on the process monitor and image system sends
signal to the C-Arm to stop the fluoroscopic radiation . The length of hold on of radiation is determined
by the number of images selected for last image hold rule of thumb is 8 frames of integration takes about
300 to 400ms.

3. Defaults Page # 1
The File is used by service to set the system parameters and operators preferences for certain
operations. The following list shows the default setting i n the service program.
Defaults Settings
1) Text Circle radius 221 (This value sets the operating text insert range of operation).
2) A u t o w i n d o w circle radius 120 (Sets operational range of auto post w i n d o w operation)
3) Screen Center X 518 ( Sets the center of all text a n d graphic operations w i t h i n the video
display output horizontally)
4) Screen Center Y 256 ( Sets the center of all text and graphic operations w i t h i n the video
display output vertical)
5) Radiation alert On (sets the speaker of the LMS2760 digital to beep approx. once per
second when radiation is on)
6) L i v e monitor transfer (Sets image system for simple left to right monitor transfer of image
or to live image transfer of video image form left monitor to right
monitor for A P / L A T views. Default setting from factory " L I V E
7) A u t o Select Contrast/rec (Sets use of contrast keys o n C - A r m control to be used to control the
following)
a) Adjust Contrast on monitors from C - A r m ± 3 Steps
b) Patient image recall from C - A r m image F W D / R E V
c) A u t o select contrast. This is used w i t h D S A function on C - A r m . This setting allows the

contrast keys to adjust contrast on the monitors w h e n normal fluoroscopy is being used.
However w h e n y o u select D S A then the keys allow the user to step the image d u r i n g
replay forward and reverse, as w e l l as change the frame rate by pressing both contrast
keys at together . Pressing them again at the same time w i l l return the step mode of
image recall back to full replay speed.
To Change the setting just press number 7 key to toggle the selection.
8) Sharp L o w 15 (sets the post image enhancement value for L O W sharp filter. Value
is a percent of 100% possible)
9) Sharp H i g h 30 (sets the post image enhancement value for H I G H sharp filter. Value
set is a percent of 100% possible)
0) M e n u time out 1000 (Sets the time limit on the new patient display before it returns to
normal ready for Fluoro)
After y o u have changed the values y o u must press E N T E R key to save new values and then press
E N T E R again to save the new screen and exit, pressing E S C key exit the screen and w i l l not save
n e w values.

International Medical Systems Service Guides Rev.l-9
WARNING:
D O N O T C H A N G E S E T T I N G S F O R N U M B E R 1, 2,3,4 U N L E S S Y O U U N D E R S T A N D A N D H A V E
G O O D R E A S O N TO C H A N G E T H E VALUES. C H A N G I N G THESE SETTING C A N C A U S E
SYSTEM OPERATION T O BE IMPAIRED.
Defaults Page # 2
The File is used b y service to set the system parameters and operators preferences for certain
operations. The f o l l o w i n g list shows the default setting i n the service program.
Defaults Settings
1) A u t o clear Text during fluoro (This sets the operating text to bo removed form the screen w h e n
fluoroscopy radiation is released.)
M a n u a l l y turn off Text (This sets the operating text to be removed form the screen w h e n
manually selected by operator)
To activate press the number 1 key to toggle the setting from one selection to the other.
2) D S A alert on or D S A alert off. (Sets audible alert w h e n d o i n g D S A subtraction to alert D r . to start

injection operation)
To activate press the number 2 key to toggle the setting f r o m one selection to the other.
3) D i s p l a y Dose: (Sets system to store and display o n hard copy a n d reference monitor one of the
f o l l o w i n g four selections)
1) A l l off
2) k V , m A , Time
3) c G y C m Dose value from optional dose measurement system

2
4) kV, mA, cGyCm2
To activate press the number 3 key to toggle the setting from one selection to the other.
5) Pulsed off time 249 (Sets me tune between each pulse before next pulse can start.
Recommend not using less than 249 ms. The system m a y not operate
properly w i t h less time than this.)
To activate press 4 then type i n the number of the setting f r o m numerical keys from 249 to 9 9 9 m s .
n o w press enter to save value
TEST PATTERNS
The test patterns are used for setting the monitor alignment and system testing.
Select the number "5 TEST P A T T E R N S " from the menu. Then one of the following

International Medical Systems Service Guides Rev. 1 -10
1) G r i d ( Provides a grid pattern to adjust the monitor l i n e a r l y )
2) Circle Provides a circle that should be adjusted to 24.5 c m V / H for proper

image size o n the monitor. The large circle size should be set w i t h monitor
adjustments for correct size and linearly then the V i d e o Camera of the C - A r m
should be adjusted for size / linearly. The camera image circle size s h o u l d be
the same as the circle of the test pattern. T o check v i d e o image size press " 7 " on
the key board a n d live video w h e n footswitch is pressed w i l l is d i s p l a y e d o n the
Left monitor. To adjust right monitor reverse video cables form left a n d right
monitors.
3) G r a y scale (Provides a continues B L K to W H T gradient)
4) Step wedge (Provides a uniform step wedge of a value from B L K to W H T of 11 steps. This
is used to set the video output level of the UPS2000 board)
5) Resolution (Provides a resolution test for monitor and hard copy camera)
6) Test Pattern (Provides a combination of gray scale, resolution, and grid pattern for setting
monitors and hard copy camera images)
7) L i v e video input ( Provides a live image under the circle and grid patterns for adjustment of
the monitors.)
8) Freeze video input (Provides the service engineer the ability to freeze the image f o r v i e w i n g
without keeping fluoroscopic radiation on. Press the " 8 " key w h e n y o u need
to freeze an image for viewing)
SPECIAL SELECTION:
9) C o p y B M P file to floppy ( Provides the operator w i t h the ability to save images to a floppy
disk, 4 can be stored on empty I B M formatted floppy disk)
C o p y B I N A R Y file to floppy ( U S E D F O R S E R V I C E O N L Y T O S E N D I M A G E S O F F U L L
I M A G E G R A Y SCALE TO T H E FACTORY FOR
E V A L U A T I O N OF I M A G E QUALITY)
C o p y B I N A R Y file to hard disk ( U S E D F O R S E R V I C E O N L Y T O C O P Y I M A G E F I L E

F R O M T H E D I G I T A L DISK T O A S L A V E D R I V E F O R
SYSTEM EVALUATION)
NOTE: WITH SELECTION NUMBER "9" PRESS THE "9" KEY REPEATEDLY UNTIL THE
PROPER SELECTION IS DISPLAYED ON THE MONITOR THEN PRESS ENTER TO SAVE.
ALWAYS LEAVE THE SYSTEM FOR NORMAL OPERATION SET WLTH "BMP" FILE COPY
SELECTED.
To exit the test pattern mode press ESC the key to exit back to the service menu.

6 DSA Look Up tables (allows service engineer to adjust the L U T curve to enhance the difference in
the low black levels of the subtracted image to clearly see the injection
contrast media over bone)
7 M S A Look Up tables (allows service engineer to adjust the L U T curve to enhance the difference in
8. RSA Look Up tables (allows service engineer to adjust the L U T curve to enhance the difference in
To adjust the curve values press the UP/Down key to raise or lower a values on the curve. Use the
RIGHT/ L E F T arrow keys to move the point on the curve to raise or lower.
Press the WNDW key to adjust the monitor brightness /contrast level. Use UP/DOWN arrow keys to
adjust brightness (OFFSET). Use The RIGHT/LEFT arrow keys to adjust Contrast (GAIN).
Press Escape to exit without saving the new values.
Press Enter to save new values.
Press the fluoroscopy footswitch to view image on the left monitor for adjustment.
NOTE: You must select Noise reduction and edge enhancement before you enter service program
to be able to view the process values in the DSA, M S A , RSA service adjustment procedures.
9 Update System Software (Future use to allow system software upgrades and version releases)

SECTION 8.11
INTERCONNECTION
DIAGRAMS FOR
IMS2000 DIGITAL IMAGE SYSTEM
INTERCONNECTING AND VIDEO HARNESS
BLOCK DIAGRAMS IMS2760
PURPOSE:
The following pages of block diagrams provide a quick and efficient w a y of finding the
varied and sometimes hard to locate interconnections between system boards, cable connections and controls
of the image system.
I M S 2000 D I G I T A L I M A G E SYSTEM W I T H D Y N A M I C I M A G E S T O R A G E
The I M S 2760 image System was released for operation M a r c h 28,1996 w i t h software IMS2760_01a
Software revision IMS2760_01a w i l l perform all basic Fluoroscopic operations, hard copy images, Image
Processing, Real Time Edge Enhancement, and Cholangiogram 2F/Sec, D S A Digital Subtracted Vascular
image operations w i t h Dynamic Image acquisitions at 4F/Sec.
- IMS2760 image system comes standard w i t h 16 frame storage.
- Optional expanded digital package w i t h 320 image storage, Image Processing Cholangiogram 2 F/Sec.
- Optional vascular image package with D S A , Cine 4 f / s and extended image store of > than 500 images
as special order.
Software Version IMS2760_01a requires the V i d e o C - A r m Interface (VCI2000) board #40-201-D10

and the VH2000 V i d e o Harness assembly # 40-620-D10 and new Keyboard Overlay # 40-601-D10 to
40 -603-D10.
See Figure 8.11 -1 for Image system Interface block Diagram. See Figure 8.11-2 for V i d e o Harness
connection.
See Section VCI2000 modification instructions and diagrams.
Exposcop Plus DMS2000 Section 8.11 02/01/96

International Medical System Interface / Video Block Diagrams Rev. 2 - 1
Exposcop Plus BMS2000 Section 8.11 02/01/96
SECTION 8.12
MONITOR KEYBOARD
CONTROL AND INTERFACE
IMS2000
IMS2000 DIGITAL
MOBILE MONITOR CART KEYBOARD
w E R T Y U I o\ 1 ] j
*•
p / 1 2
3
A ! S? D ~ H * 3% Kt L ]
hi I 5 6
TEXT
F +
G " INSERT
SHIFl
KEY X * c' V B N M 1 I 7 8 9 0
o •
ACQMSfnQN
o o
MSA FRAME IMAGE MON MON AUTO IMAGE MAG SHUT
Mu-Op RATE PAGE L"*- R STORE CROP WNDW MASK
EM PAT ONE CINE ONE WNDW

Road SHARP
M.p FILE EDIT RECALL STORE LEVEL
O H
TEXT j f t IHS
LIH CINE INV IMAGE
NOISE ON/OFF RESET 2 O c
VIDEO STORE
«ONl SHIFT
KEY
w
rm * W O I - D K > Rtv 7
I Figure 8.12 -1
Purpose:
Control all image system operations (i.e., text, image recall, image store, DSA, Cine,
post processing, image transfer etc.).
Description:
The keyboard is constructed of Touch Dome switch contacts sealed from liquids. There
are 81 keys and 7 L E D displays. The overlay is constructed of high quality chemical
resistant material designed for years of use.
The key board is a matrix of rows and columns read by the computer system by means
of a scanning software routine through an I/O board. The scan routine allows the
computer to determine which key is pressed. The keyboard interface board "KLB2000"
is located directly under the keyboard assembly and is attached by four nuts.
The KLB2000 board is attached by several cables to the computer I/O board which cares
all necessary information and signals for scanning the keyboard and other system
operations controlled by the keyboard.
Please read the keyboard and KLB2000 board description of function in this section of
the manual for more details and see figure 8.12-3 for keyboard diagram.
Exposcop Plus LMS2000 Digital Section 8.12 02/01/96

Intpmatinnsl Medical Svstems Kevboard/KIB2000 Interface Rev. 2 - 1
KIB2000 K E Y B O A R D I N T E R F A C E B O A R D
PURPOSE:
1. Interface keyboard to image processor control C P U .
2. Interface C - A r m control signal to image processor C P U control.
3. Interface power-on switch from keyboard to U l l l board.
4. Interface image processor C P U to video relay control.
5. Interface hardcopy camera to keyboard and C P U control.
MS2000 DIGITAL KIB2000/KEYBOARD INTERFACE BLOCK DIAGRAM
f KEYBOARD MONITOR
CASSETTE
I CART CONTROL JfTTI
SENSING
swrrcH
L KEYBOARD
KTB2000 X 4 INTERFACE
X7 BOARD
VM4433 VM4433 EXT

1
BNC
X2
Ulll
Paper POWER
•
Printer ON/OFF
V/OUT Jl 32 JO
COPY rr aJ
U108 X2 [ I/0#1 INPUT/OUTPUT
CAMERA
V/IN
UP-2000
IMAGE XC XB AT-BUS
BOARD XD PROCESSOR
VTDEO BUS Ii VC1-2000 CPU
VTP-2000 BOARD
y j d e o / Qtmjpiafta
486DX2100
2000 sszhi
2000
VIDEO VIDEO IN
J8
A,
PROCESSOR
C-ARM CONTROL
, .SIGNALS
C-ARM
CONTROL X3
BOARD
IXI U109 BOARD
C-ARM I.L VIDEO
CAMERA SYSTEM
f MONITOR
CART PLUG
Figure 8.12 - 2

T_. 1 \MÂi^*>1 Ceramc Kevboard/KJB2000 Interface Rev. 2 - 2
DESCRIPTION O FK E Y B O A R D FUNCTIONS
T h e k e y b o a r d has a matrix o f 6 rows a n d 14 columns, plus 4 special k e y functions

separated f r o m the rest o f the keyboard.
E a c h intersection o f rows and columns has a unique software code defined f o r that
intersection w h i c h is dependent o n the system configuration (i.e. 16 frame, Post
Processing, Cholangiography, etc.).
T h e k e y b o a r d has a single plug which is attached to X 4 of the keyboard interface b o a r d .

F r o m X 4 all rows and columns are then routed to X 3 which goes to J l and J 2 o f the I/O
Board.
There are f o u r special keys o n the keyboard which are separate f r o m the k e y b o a r d
matrix. T h e first two keys are the O N A N D O F F keys. T h e O n a n d O F F keys are
connected directly to the connector X 4 then to X 5 o f the interface b o a r d a n d finally to
the U l 11 power o n board o f the m o n i t o r cart.
T h e second two keys are the shift keys. These are used to extend the use o f the other
keys o n the keyboard (i.e. Z#). W h e n y o u press shift " Z " , y o u will get the code f o r the
number sign ("#").
T h e shift keys are grounded o n one side f r o m X 2 plug o f the interface b o a r d , and the
other lead goes to X 3 then to J l o f the I/O B o a r d .
Interrupt T.ine
T h e interrupt line comes f r o m U 2 p i n 8 which goes to X 3 p i n 26 to J2.13 o f the I / O

B o a r d . T h i s interrupt is used to alert the C P U that a keyboard "key" has been pushed.
I M S 2 0 0 0 w i t h C i n e / D S A software R e v . 10B or higher, the interrupt is no longer needed.
T h e C P U continually scans t h keyboard and w i l l detect key pressed.
Note: With Cine/DSA in loop capture orreplay operation, must holdkey for
longertimeto allow CPU to detect key pressed.
Exposcop Plus IMS2000 Digital Section 8.12 02/01/96

International Medical Systems Keyboara7KJB2000 Interface Rev. 2-3
Functional Description of Keyboard Matrix and Interrupt
A t standby, the I/O card outputs lows on Port B0-C5 which goes to J l of the I/O B o a r d .
Then to X3 of the interface board and finally to X4 connector and the keyboard. This
makes all columns 1-14 low. The rows are at standby, with no signal present. Inputs
of U2 on interface board are seen as a high. Output of U2 is therefore a low. T h e
computer does not see an interrupt therefore no action is taken by the computer.
Keyboard Key Pressed " Q "
When " Q " is pressed on the keyboard, the low signal that is present at Column 1 pin 2
of X 4 is then sent out on Row 1 pin 17 of X4. This signal is then sent to pin 1 o f U2
which makes pin 8 of U2 go high +5V. The high signal is sent to J2 Pin 13 o f the I/O
Board from X3 pin 26 of the interface board. This high signal at J2 pin 13 o f the I/O
Board sends an interrupt IRQ7 to the P C bus where it is processed. At this moment
Rows 1-6 are sequentially scanned with a low signal and the columns are now changed
from output ports to input ports, and the C P U through the I/O polls columns 1-14 to
fmd the low scanned pulse of the rows to determine which key has been pressed on the
keyboard. As soon as the key has been determined, the system returns to standby
awaiting another key press.
Note: If you continually press a key, you will get a repeat of the key approximately
every 2 to 1 second as the system goes around in a loop from standby to interrupt to
standby again and again.
This only valid with software Rev. <10B. Above revision >10 software, no interrupt
is needed as C P U continually scans keyboard.

International Medical Systems Keyboard/KJB2000 Interface Rev. 2-4
KEYBOARD INTERFACE COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
LED DISPLAYS:
The L E D s for the keyboard display are as follows:
LED 1 signal pin 9 X I connector } Post processing mode
LED 2 signal Pin 1 X I connector } Minify mode
LED 3 signal pin 12 X I connector } Zoom mode
LED 4 signal pin 3,4 X5 connector } Power On

signal pin 7,8 X5 connector
L E D 5,6 not used
LED 7 signal pin 5 X6 connector } Cassette inserted in

signal pin 6 X6 connector Image #1
LED 8 signal pin 7 X6 connector } Cassette inserted in

signal pin 8 X6 connector Image #2
LED 9 signal pin 11 X6 connector } Lights when hardcopy

signal pin 12 X6 connector camera makes exposure
blink 2 or 3 times per second.
U2 GATE. Only with software version lower than Rev. 10.
The Interface Board also sends the interrupt to the I/O Board. The U 2 gate chip
controls the interrupt signal.
U2 pin 1,2,3,4,5,6 are inputs.

U2 pin 8 is the output.
When you have a high on pin 8, this will cause an interrupt on the C P U to look at the
keyboard.
Exposcop Plus LMS200O Digital Section 8.12 02/01/96

International Medical Systems Keyboard/KIB2000 Interface Rev. 2-5
RELA Y FUNCTIONS.
K l is the hardcopy start relay. K l is controlled by a high signal from X I pin 14

connector to U l invertor pin 9. Pin 8 sends a low to K l relay which turns the relay on.
The low signal will only be present for 250 ms.
K 2 is the video printer relay. When the software option is present, the operator pushes
the keyboard " S H I F T H A R D C O P Y " and the C P U will send a high signal from the I/O
Board through XI pin 24 to U l pin 11. This causes pin 10 to go low and turn relay K 2
on. This low will only be present for 250 ms. K 2 supplies a dry contact to jumper
selection JPR2 1,2,3.
Jumper 1 and 2 for a normally open contact.
Jumper point JPR2 is connected to X2 pin 12. K2 pin 1 is connected to X 2 pin 9.

X8 connector is used to trigger video printer. Pin 6 and pin 10 of K 5 empty relay
position is used to connect X8 to normal open contacts of K2.
K 3 is for future use.
RESISTORS.
R l is a pull-up resistor for pin 8 of U2.
R 2 , R 3 , R 4 are used to Urnit L E D current for L E D 1 - L E D 3 respectively.
DIODES
D l . Blocking diode.
D 2 , D 3 , D 4 are used to suppress any spike from the relay coil when turned off.
CAPACITORS.
C I , C 2 . Power filter caps.
Ul INVERTOR.
Signal Invertor to Drive K l , K2, K 3 relays.

Signal Invertor to Drive L E D 1, L E D 2, L E D 3.

International Medical Systems KcyboardT<JB2000 Interface Rev. 2-6
1XJ\ XJvXJ\ X\( X)\\( X\()\ X/\\f X\(\( X\f X~X( X\fx\(t Xfxxbfx?
KEYBOARD MATRIX
IMS2000 Keyboard Q,
\ / \
POWER
A
/\ \(
( \(
J\ \( ( \( ON PFF
\( \f St\ (\e \ t \(
J\ \f V
J\
J\ \f ) \ fXfX\ t fXfx fx \ t fx fX7
SHIFT SHIFT
\f
V )\ K I t 7% J\ \ / JL _ L
\( \( \( )\
\e )\ \t \ (t \( \\(t 7KX X \ t 7X7
( / \ /\ )\ \( /\
V 7X
\f fx \ t \7
\ (fx
26 25 19 20 21
17 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 7 8 10 ii 12 13 14
to
3
i
a,
w
o
H
a
c
X3 I io
26
19 21 23 25 24 22 18 13 20 16 15 17 14 12 X2 26 X5 1/2 7/8 9/10
Jl io
I/O BOARD 19 21 23 25 24 22 13 20 16 15 17 14 12
6 6 6
t t f t t M t t f M M M t f t t XR
• Y t t t • • • ••I M H H M M C-ARM
Interface
X
Power/On
2 U 1 U
I/O PORT AO A l A2 A3 A4 A5 Board

BO Bl B2 B3 B4 B5 B7 CO B6 CI C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
I/O J2 Pin 13 6 LRQ7 Interrupt
IMS2000 KEYBOARD INTERFACE TO 1/0-48 BOARD
Figure 8 . 1 2 - 3
NOTE: IRQ7 is used only with IMS2000 image systems with software < R E V 10
with R E V 10 software and higher the C P U scans the keyborad without the
in tempt signal.
EXOOSCOD Plus LMS2000 Digital Section 8.12 02/01/96

KEYBOARD INTERFACE DIAGRAM
CPU INTERFACE
I/O P O R T Jl BOARD X3 X4 KEYBOARD
PAO 10 < - > 10 17 ROW 1

PA1 8 < - > 8 26 ROW 2
PA2 4 < - > 4 25 ROW 3
PA3 6 < - > 6 19 ROW 4
PA4 1 < -> 1 20 ROW 5
PA5 3 < - > 3 21 ROW 6
PA6 5 < -> N.C.
PA7 7 < -> N.C.
PBO 19 < — -> 19 1 COL. 1

PB1 21 < — -> 21 2 COL. 2
PB2 23 < —
.-> 23 3 COL. 3
PB3 25 < — -> 25 4 COL. 4
PB4 24 < — --> 24 5 COL. 5
PB5 22 < — --> 22 6 COL. 6 Figure 8.12-4
PB7 18 < — --> 18 7 COL. 7
PCO 13 < — --> 13 8 COL. 8
PB6 20 < — --> 20 9 COL. 9

PCI 16 < — - - > 16 10 C O L . 10
PC2 15 < — - - > 15 11 C O L . 11
PC3 17 < — - - > 17 12 C O L . 12
PC4 14 < — - - > 14 13 C O L . 13
PC5 11 < — - - > 11 14 C O L . 14
PC6 12 < —
-> 12 15 SHIFT
PC7 9 < — — > 9 N.C.
+5V 2 < — --> 2 +5V T O I N T E R F A C E B O A R D
ONLY
IRQ7 J2 X3 U2PIN8
INTERRUPT INTERFACE BOARD.

CPU 13 < - — --> 26 INTERRUPT SIGNAL

International Medical Systems KxyboaraVKIB2000 Interface Rev. 2-8
T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G G U I D E IMS2000 K E Y B O A R D INTERFACE
C O N T I N U E D K E Y INTERUPT R A T E 1 PER S E C O N D APPROX.
YES
YES
K E Y PRESSED RELEASE KEY
NO
PHYSI C A L YES
DAMA
K E Y B ( DARD
KEY
h NO
INTERUPT
STOPS SYSTEM
YES ,
yon PIN 13
& R E P L A C E I/O OPERATIONAL
LO W
STILL KEY
INTERUPT INTERUPJ
NO
STOPS
SYSTEM
REPLACE CPU N OPERATIONAL
STILL
INTERUPT
C A L L IMS
KEY
X 3 P EN 26
INTERUF]
O N I N IE R F A C E
YES STOPS
BOAR D L O W REPLACE SYSTEM
CABLE X3-J1 OPERATIONAL
NO
L_
YES C H E C K CIRCUIT P A T H
U 2 PIN 8 L O W
ON INTERFACE U 2 PIN 8 T O X 3 P I N 26
I
BOARD
BAD
INTERUPT
NO STOPS
REPLACE SYSTEM
INTERFACE BOARD OPERATIONAL
A N Y INPUT T O
U2 LOW YES
USE OHM METER T O CHECK KEYBOARD
ON INTERFACE YES REPLACE
MATRIX FOR STUCK K E Y OR D A M A G E D
BOARD
I
KEYBOARD
C O N N E C T O R X4
NO
INTERUPT
STOPS
REPLACE KEYBOARD!
INTERUPT STOPED
INTERFACE BOARD SYSTEM
O R IC U 2 OPERATIONAL
DfTERUPT COmTNUES
F I G U R E 8.12 - 5
C A L L IMS
VALID ONLY WITH SOFTWARE REVISION < 10

Do,, i a
KEYBOARD INTERFACE COMPONENT LAYOUT REV-F
a® •
*
LU
£>
f\ KIB2000 VERSION OF T H E
B O A R D REV F JULY, 1995
X
o Modifications Are listed below
1) Add X8 connector for paper

video printer remote signal.
i®
® g §® 2) Jumper from JPR2 pin 1 to pin 2
®
LU
3) Install relay K2 for trigger
®
_l <
signal to video printer
CO
X
7T
D i-0 o
s
X
4) Install L E D 7 for #1 image
position hard copy camera
For all modifications see

figure 8.12-7
CO
X
rr rr rx cc
i- |Ol
DC lol
CM
CC 3K *
~3 IOI -3 M |2£
X8
s o
eg
i
H n
•—1
W172DIP-1
W172DIP-1
UL LnJ
F I G U R E 8.12-6

S 5
0 ' ? S ? S 5 S < D S D 5 8 3 U U C E £ S = 1SSSE6 K 3 ? 3 S 3 5 5 < C S C 5 5 1 Ci G 0 E 8 S s 2 S a S §
£til.
>S>>5>C>M>x5.XI<><><XXX!<><)<)<XJ(S
TtoB
•A 1
ii t aaas
1f
yvyvYvYYYYYTTYmn M I S55S-. i i—
hi %
SECTION 8.13
FLOPPY DISK
INTERFACE
IMS2000-FDI FLOPPY DISK INTERFACE
PURPOSE:
The FLOPPY DISK INTERFACE provides the operator the ability to copy images from memory
to a std IBM formatted 1.44 M B floppy disk 4 images in a BMP file format for review of images
with all patient information on a std IBM V G A display monitor. The images can be used for
teaching, etc..
LOCATION:
The floppy is mounted with a bracket to the monitor brightness control box located directly under
the display monitors. The front of the control box is cut to allow easy access to the floppy drive.
The floppy controller is located in the Computer case and is attached to the controller with a 34 pin
ribbon cable. The power is connected from the internal power supply to the floppy by a 4 pin
connector.
OPERATION:
The Floppy is set as a non bootable drive in the BIOS configuration of the mother board. The
BIOS is set for A: floppy but is turned off for direct booting. C: drive or the hard drive is selected
as the boot disk. Therefore the floppy is only able to read and store under direct commands to do
so. The service software under selection 4 allows the service engineer to select the drive when an
update to the software has been sent to the filed. They select insert the disk in the floppy drive then
select service menu, select item 4, then press item 5 to start the software update procedure.
The system will read the floppy disk and determine if the disk is correctly set up and security
correct then it will execute the file command on the disk.
The second use of the floppy drive is for image transfer form memory. The system will allow the
operator to copy an image form memory to the floppy disk by inserting a disk in the drive then
selecting the patient file key from the monitor control keyboard. Once the patients files are
displayed the operator press the right arrow key of the keyboard to highlight the copy menu
selection. Then the operator selects any image form the patient files and presses the ENTER key to
copy the image to the floppy drive. The copy routine will take approximately 20 sec.
NOTE: The operator must use only new IBM formatted floppy disks formatted for 1.44 MB.
The images copied to the floppy disk are 8 bit BMP file format. This means the images are fully
compatible with most graphic image software programs for DOSAVTNDOWS applications, i.e.
Corel Draw, Paint, Word for Windows, WordPerfect, etc. The BMP file format refers to a BIT-
MAPPED-GRAPHIC image. The original image was 10 bits but was converted and normalized for
the B M P file format and will retain good image quality.
The diagrams in this section show the bracket and cable connections for the floppy drive. See
section 7 for location of floppy drive.

International Medical Systems Floppy Drive Interface Rev. 1 - 1
Floppy Drive
Bottom
View
HDD CON
CN2
34 pin Ribbon cable FDD CON
38 to 40" Computer
ATA
'4 conductor H/D
Power cable Floppy
+12Vdc and +5Vdc Controller
CPU
Power Supply
230 Watts
Cable connection for Floppy Drive
Fig 8.13-1
09/06/95
Section 8.13
Exposcop Plus IMS2000 Rev. 1 - 2
Floppy Drive Interface
Medical Svstems
o o

lnti»matir\nal MeHiral Svctpnr; F I O D D V Drive Interface Rev. 1 - 5
SECTION 8.14
VCI BOARD
VIDEO C-ARM INTERFACE
CONTROL BOARD
IMS2000
VCI 2000 Board
PURPOSE:
The VCI2000 interface board controls video routing to and from Video Image Processor and the
UPS2000 high line rate display board. The C-arm Radiation Request and Release Radiation
signals to and form the Image Processor C P U pass through this board. Radiation is blocked by
relay RL7 mounted on the interface board. Description of function is included with this section.
The following pages provide block diagrams and information on signals for radiation request and
release.
Video interconnection is provided in block diagram and wire interface diagram.

International Medical System. VCI2000 Board Rev. 2 - 1
International Medical System. VC12000 Board Rev. 2 - 3
i 1 W „ J : « « I c..„.a,
V m n O f l Rnani Rev. 2 - 4
DESCRIPTION OF FUNCTION- VCI2000 BOARD
RELAY CONTROL LOGIC

I N P U T U l IC. P I N
15 14 13
A B c
0 0 0 = FLUOROSCOPY
0 0 1 = NAJ
0 1 0 = N/U
0 1 1 = NAJ
1 0 0 = N/U
1 0 1 = N/U
1 1 0 = N/U
1 1 1 = D C A M SETS O U T P U T F O R M C A M E R A T O R I G H T M O N I T O R
FUNCTION RLl RL5

LED 1 LED 5
DCAM 0 0
FLUOROSCOPY 1 1
R E L A Y F U N C T I O N LIST
RL 1 High Frequency relay used to switch the video signals.
RL 7 This relay is used to block radiation if the memory system is busy

(i.e. storing image, image transfers and to provide delay to acquire
images at end of hand switch release)

Tntpmntinnal Medical Svstern VCI2000 Board Rev. 2 - 5
CONNECTOR FUNCTIONS
XA This cable connects the VCI2000 board to the U361 board connector
X 4 . The radiation request, release and hard copy camera busy sig are
found in this connector
XB This cable connects the VCI2000 board to the DIO 48 I/O board J l .
This cable carries the C - A r m control, and relay control signals.
XC Not used with Vm4433 monitor.
XD This is a 15 pin " D " connector. It carries the video signal for the
system.
MISCELLANEOUS DESCRIPTION
U l (IC1) This is a B C D to decimal decoder, and in conjunction with diodes

DPI,and D 9 is used to turn on or off a combination of
relays, depending on the system operation, (see relay sequence
diagram).
U2(IC2) This IC is used as a line driver for signal from the X B connector.
T l , T7 These transistors are used to turn on the relays R L l , and R17

respectfully.
CI Power supply capacitor.

International Medical Svstem. VCI2000 Board Rev. 2 - 6
I/O X B C O N N E C T O R (JO)
PIN# SIGNAL DIRECTION SIGNAL NAME
10 PAO N/C
8 PA1 N/C
4 PA2 > FLUORO
6 PA3 >
1 PA4 H A R D C O P Y C A M E R A B U S Y SIG.
3 PA5 >
5 PA6 A C Q U I R E I M A G E S ( R A D I A T I O N IS ON)
7 PA7
19 PBO < N.C.
21 PB1 <
23 PB2 <
25 PB3 < SYSTEM BUSY(RADIATION BLOCKED)
24 PB4 < P A P E R P R I N T E R S T A R T ( R E L A Y K2)
22 PB5 < A }
20 PB6 < B } RELAY CONTROL
18 PB7 < C }
13 PCO > RADIATION RELEASE REQUEST

(FOR A U T O I M A G E T R A N S F E R )
16 PCI > N/A

15 PCI > N/A
17 PC2 > N/A
14 PC4 < R E L A Y K l ( H A R D C O P Y C A M E R A EXP)

11 PC5 < L.E.D. # 2 I M A G E P A G E DISPLAY
12 PC6 < L.E.D. # 3 PATIENT FILE
9 PC7 < L . E . D . #1 C I N E
2 + 5 V D C F R O M I/O C A R D
26 0 V D C F O R M I/O C A R D

International Medical Svstem. VCI2000 Board Rev. 2 - 7
XA CONNECTOR TO XB
PIN# DIRECTION SIGNAL NAME
1 N/C
2 N/C
3 > NOT USED
4 > NOT USED
5 > NOT USED
6 < NOT USED
7 < NOT USED
8 > NOT USED
9 > NOT USED
10 > NOT USED
11 > H A R D C O P Y C A M E R A IS E X P O S I N G
F I L M ( H A R D C O P Y B U S Y SIG)
12 > RADIATION REQUEST B Y C - A R M
13 < RADIATION RELEASED B Y IMAGE
SYSTEM. ( K7 R E L A Y )
14 NOT USED
15 > NOT USED
16 — > NOT USED
17 < + 5 VDC FORM IMAGE SYSTEM
18 NOT USED
19 NOT USED
20 > ACQUIRE VIDEO SIGNAL
21 NOT USED
22 > NOT USED
23 > R A D I A T I O N R E L E A S E IS R E Q U E S T E D
BY THE C-ARM.
24 NOT USED
5 < > IMAGE SYSTEM GROUND
26 0V

XD CONNECTOR
PIN# DIRECTION SIGNAL NAME
1 > VIDEO F R O M T V C A M E R A X P O
2 < C A M E R A V I D E O T O VIP2000 J8
3 > NOT USED
4 .. > UPS2000 R I G H T M O N I T O R V I D E O
OUTPUT Jl5
5 <- —- 525 C A M E R A O R UPS2000 V I D E O
OUTPUT
6 > N / U (NOT U S E D )
7 > N/U
8 > N/U
9 < > }
10 < > }
11 < > } VIDEO GROUND

12 < > }
13 < N/U
14 < N/U
15 < N/U
XC CONNECTOR
PIN# DIRECTION FUNCTION
N O T U S E D WITH VM4433 MONITORS
Exposcop 70O0/IMS2760 Secrion 8.14 04/05/96

Internationa! Medical System. VCI2000 Board Rev. 2 - 9
5
tyi
5
Q
s
as
OC
03
CO >
DC
I-
Z
> o
LU LU
CO
LU ^ £
LU O
s £ sy
o
< 03 5 <
O O
I CO E
I
Q
Ii S o z.
CO LU
£§
cr I
< 5
co 2
LU 52 £
^> CO co O
_J
< o
io o *
CD CO
f c
5 2.
X LU 5 ,J:
O £0 o £2
LU ^
co g 5
LU cr.
> 11 CO LU
5 CC
I
International Medical System. VCI2000 Board Rev. 2 - 1 0
Exposcop 70O0/IMS2760 Section 8.14 04/05/96
I—* 1 \A Jir.„\
a C,;n 0
v r n n n n RnarH Rev. 2-11
International Medical System. VC12000 Board Rev. 2 - 1 2
SECTION 8.15
VIDEO LINE
ISOLATOR
VIDEO LINE ISOLA TOR FOR IMA GE SYSTEM
INTRODUCTION
The Digital Image system is isolated off ground to avoid interference in the video system
caused by ground loops. Ground loops will occur when different A C / D C power supply line
ground potentials develop. With isolation of the image system and only having one ground
point in the T V camera, we eliminate the potential for a ground loop from the C P U power
supply. However, when the V C R option is installed in the DIS image system, the V C R will
cause a ground loop through its power cord assembly. Thus, we must install a device to
isolate the T V camera from this second ground. •
PURPOSE
The Video Line Isolator is a unique "opto-coupled" video-line isolator which provides a safe
and effective method of eliminating interference in video systems caused by ground loops.
By isolating the input ground and the output ground, problems caused by different A C
power line ground potentials are elirninated. The front panel lamp indicates the existence
of a potential shock hazard. (Internal gain and tilt adjustments provide frequency
compensation for long cable runs not used by the DIS system).
INPUT PARAMETERS
Video Impedance: 75 ohm ± 2%

Video Level: 0.05 Volts to 2.0 Volts peak-to-peak
Audio Impedance: 600 ohm + 2% balanced
Audio Level: + 25dbm maximum (40 Volts p-p, line-to-line)
Audio input common internally connected to video input ground
OUTPUT PARAMETERS
Video Impedance: 75 ohm ± 5%

Video Level: Internally adjustable to 1 Volt peak-to-peak
Audio Impedance: 600 ohm ± 3% balanced
Audio Level: + 19dbm maximum into 600 ohm load
(20 Volts peak-to-peak, line-to-line)
Audio output common internally connected to video output ground
Exposcop Plus-IMS2O00 Section 8.15 09/06/95

T 1
—' r*_._. \;: A~,-. T IcÛi^. 1 1
OTHER PARAMETERS
Frequency Response: Video: 2Hz to 2 0 M H Z ± 3db

Audio: 4Hz to 50KHz ± 3db
Isolation: Can withstand up to 1500 Volts between input, output, and/or
A C ground.
Hazard Indicator: Lights when potential between input and output ground is
above 24 Volts (nominal).
2 3/8'
VIDEO LINE
ISOLATOR
USE ISOLATOR AS
TEMPLATE.
MAKE SURE YOU

PLACE THE ISOLATOR
NEXT TO THE SUPPORT
BRACE.
U117
VTDEO LINE ISOLATOR
TEMPLATE #1
MONITOR CART
Hazard Indicator
BNC Video Input Lamp v
y __
VIDEO LINE
ISOLATOR
T
A
BNC video Output Power ON/Test
Switch
Power Cord
Exposcop Plus-IMS2000 Section 8.15 09/06/95

SECTION 8.16
GROUND ISOLATION
IMS2000
PURPOSE:
The digital image system is isolated off ground to avoid interference in the video system caused by
ground loops. Ground loops will occur when different A C / D C power supply line ground
potentials develop. With isolation of the image system and only having one ground point in the T V
camera we ehminate the potential for a ground loop from the CPU power supply. Care must be
taken when working on the image system not to short the case of the Image system or the video
ground to the chassis ground.
See Block Diagram Figure 8.16-1 page 2.

T_. 1 1 1 . J : . , . ] c....... Video Ground Isolation Rev. 1 - 1
VIDEO GROUND ISOLATION BLOCK DIAGRAM FOR IMS2000
Isolated Video Output
Near X P O Monitor Over-Voltage Protectors
Video Ground
E
C>! Video Monitor i Video Monitor
Chassis J ^"*
-
Base Board ' Base Board
Ground •
|;,
r mfm mm.
i.i'i.T...
Only
Used With
V C R Option
Video
Ground
H Video Ground
VCR
Power Ground
X D Video
Interface Connector
HOVac Input
60Hz Hum Filter
Hard Copy Camera

Hard Copy
-----r-L^p- Over- Voltage
Protector
X2 VIP2000 X2 | XI Isolated
Analog Ground U_ — Analog Ground Power Supply
» 1
1 220Vac
* - - • 4 Digital Ground Ground
f - J Digital
UPS2000 Board
Bus Connectors •
Analog Ground C P U Chassis

Over- Voltage
Protector 220VAC INPUT
• J Digital Ground
C P U Mother Board Figure 8.16 - 1
Exposcop Plus IMS20O0 Section 8.16 08/23/95

SECTION 8.17
OVER-VOLTAGE
PROTECTION
IMS2000
OVER-VOLTAGE PROTECTION IMS2000 DIGITAL
GROUND ISOLATION
The Digital Image System is isolated from ground to avoid any ground loops in the video signal. This
eliminates unwanted interference in the video image but has the potential to allow high voltage to be
present on the Computer case if the camera chassis ground opens. For this reason the installation of an
Over-Voltage Protector was made. The over-voltage protector assembly consists of two diodes back to
back mounted on a metal bracket. This arrangement will cause the power supply fuses to blow if any
voltage over .6V is detected above ground. See Fig. 8.17 -1, 8.17 - 2 below.
D A N G E R ; Do not remove the Over-Voltage protection assembly under any
circumstances.
Note: The Ground connection must be checked at least twice a year

for corrosion, or loose connections.
Bracket holds
V C I 2 0 0 0 board MONITOR C A R T
and Protection Dioes
FLOPPY DIRIVE
INTERFACE BOARD
HARD DRIVE
B A Y 1 -3 A T A
FAN
U116
POWER
109
CONTROL
VCI-2000
DIODES
IMS2000
BRACKET
Figure 8 . 1 7 - 2
CART/CHASSIS
GND
Figure 8 . 1 7 - 1
DIODE CONFIGURATION
Exposcop Plus Section 8.17 08/23/95

International Medical System Over-Voltage Protector Rev. 1 - 1
SECTION 8.18
DOCUMENTATION
MONITOR INTERFACE
IMS2000
MODIFICATION FOR VIDEO RASTER LINE SUPPRESSION OF
DOCUMENTATION MONITOR.
INTRODUCTION
The D O C U M E N T A T I O N MONITOR or Hardcopy Camera is a high quality, small CRT display tube and
electronics for the express purpose of exposing a film for long term image archiving. The Hardcopy
Camera system displays a standard RSI70a monochrome video image when it comes from the factory and
as such will show the retrace or video raster lines on the exposed film.
PURPOSE
To eliminate the raster lines from the film, the display video signal that goes to the hardcopy camera when
the hardcopy key is pressed is modified to a new vertical timing. The video signal measured will be four
times as long in the vertical timing pulse than with a standard RSI70a video signal. The horizontal timing
does not change during this time. The new video time is 66.4 ms from vertical pulse to vertical pulse. The
display when viewed by the naked eye seems to flash or roll but the film will integrate this and thus
ehminate the raster lines from the image and give sharp, clean films for archiving without annoying black
lines across the image.
Z1024 HIGH LINE RATE VIDEO DISPLAY FOR DOCUMENTATION MONITOR
The IMS2000 Video Image Processor has special produce video output sync timing required for the
documentation monitor to suppress video raster tines. In addition to the Image Processor board, special
software routines are needed for control of the Image Processor board.
DOCUMENTATION MONITOR MODIFICATION
This modification consists of the replacement of the capacitor C42 with a new value of 1.8 nF on power
supply +V deflection board. This will cause the monitor Vertical deflection timing to change.
The +V Deflection board is located in the documentation monitor case assembly mounted on the left side of
the C R T chassis.
Figure 8.18-3 shows the location of components in the Documentation monitor system.
Figure 8.18-4 shows the physical location of the capacitor C42 on the -(-Vertical Deflection board.
Figure 8.18-5 shows Power supply +V Deflection adjustment potentiometers.
Figure 8.18-6 shows Power Supply +V Deflection board schematic and circuit location of C42.
FUNCTIONAL CONTROL SIGNAL DESCRIPTION

When you insert a cassette into the hardcopy camera, the cassette sensing switch connected to X7 on
keyboard interface board is activated, IC7 on U108 board is reset and ready light for video image camera is
lit(field indication L E D # 40) on monitor cart keyboard. Push record button 39 on monitor cart keyboard
(see figure 8.18-1).

40 47 39
•A
OO
1 2
o HARD
COPY
When you press the record button, the C P U scans the keyboard matrix and decodes the hardcopy record
button. This sends a high signal from connector JO pin 14 of the I/O board to pin 9 of U l via Keyboard
interface connector X I pin 14. Pin 8 of U l then gives a low to K l relay. This turns K l relay on. This low
is a 250 ms pulse from the I/O card. The normally open contact of K l closes shorting X 6 pins 15,16 on
the keyboard interface board. This cable from X 6 goes to U108 board X 2 connector on the side of the
hardcopy camera. The momentary closure of K l sets IC14 to a count of "16". A s soon as the contact
opens with the next V pulse, IC14 counts down 16 V-pulses (16 x 66.4 ms = 1062.4 ms), the C R T
monitor is unblanked, "monitor on". A t the same time, IC12 and IC13 clock inputs are cleared.
When the counters IC12and IC13 have counted down to zero, exposure ends, monitor is blanked and IC7
blocks the input of the exposure button to prevent a further exposure. T o reset the counter IC7, the cassette
has to be removed and reinserted. A t the end of the exposure, a signal is sent out on X 5 pin 1 and pin 2.
The cable connected between X 5 of U108 and X 6 of U109 is polarity sensitive. Pin 1 of X 5 must go to
pin 1 of X 6 . This cable connects the hardcopy camera timeout to U109 board to allow the computer to
sense the end of exposure by hardcopy camera. Failure to have this cable connected will cause premature
termination of the hardcopy printing cycle. The result could be horizontal sync lines or a faint image
appearing on the film.
EXAMPLE OF VIDEO OUTPUT ON THE DOCUMENTATION

MONITOR CRT
NOTE: IMAGE WILL APPEAR AS 1/4 OF THE SCREEN AT TOP EDGE OF CRT IF CAMERA
PLUG IS PULLED OUT ,THIS IS NORMAL. (SEE FIG. 8.18 - 2 for display and figure 8.18
- 3 Item #8 for camera plug location) ONLY WHEN HARDCOPY CAMERA SWITCH IS
PRESSED (#39) ON THE KEYBOARD, WILL THE IMAGE FILL THE CRT. TO ALLOW LONG
VIEWING OF IMAGE, PRESS TIMER SWITCH (#9 ) ON SIDE OF HARDCOPY CAMERA TO 9.
NOW INSTALL CAMERA PLUG. PRESS #39 ON KEYBOARD AND VIDEO IMAGE WILL BE
VISIBLE FOR APPROXIMATELY 10 -12 SECONDS ON THE CRT OF THE HARDCOPY CAMERA.
A FLICKERING IMAGE IS NORMAL DURING THIS OPERATION.
NOTE: Video timing is 66.4 ms between vertical sync pulses during hardcopy operation.
Horizontal timing is not altered.

HARD COPY CAMERA CRT DISPLAY
#020
Vertical time Hosp Name
* 66.4 ms
*i CRT Display when Cam plug

is removed from VM1721
When you press the hard
button on the keyboard th
Vertical Video sync time of the Z1024 and VIP ouput Video Timing CRT Screen ouput will no*
ouput mode from the VIP board is 66.4 ms. is normal. Image, will be to full scale. Video outpu
seen as 1/4 of normal captured on film will be a
Normal video vertical time is 16.6ms. Vertical Size. 4 X 512 line image.
Figure 8.18-2
Note: A small two-wire connector must be installed between U109 X6 pin 1 and 2 to U108 X5 pin I and
2. X6 pin I must go to pin 1 ofX5. If this wire is not present or connected reversed, system will fail to
give proper exposures.
Exposcop Plus 1MS2000 Section 8.18 08/23/95

International Medical Systems Hardcopy Camera Modification. Rev. 1 - 3
Cassette Sensing Switch Film Cassette Exposure Slot
Vertical
ED
Position
Vertical Freq
V - D Y N Focus
I \ V-C-Lin.
P10)
E>
1
' V-Apml.
V-Anml
V-S-Lin
NOTE: Single camera will L7

MP12
not have the motor P6
+0.25V Vertical
Solenodis and Shutters fo H - Lin
MPlOn i MP9 Size
(3
film exposure. +4V " '+7V
©
L6
Single image camera will © Vertical
have only one lens and
Position |P12 | H - Ampl.
will allow one exposure
ED
before blocking hard copy
image to CRT.
£ £ H Phase
+ *v H - D Y N Focus/"
(3 ED
*v I^ + ^ |
^ LU till , Aperture Plate for two frame image. QMP2

MP6
T h i s aperture must be installed and ajusted
O ID
/ y/0UT A to provide the proper seperation and size
©0 0
for images on document film media.
MP5
T h i s aperture is o n l y to be used with two 1MP3
frame documentation monitor and is for
Remove 100Q resistor. MP7 r
use only with the I M S D I S image system. MP4
Install 2.2uf capacitor 25V."" + 12V L
I. Power O N L E D
Line Deflection Board 3 2 1 3 2 1
5. Contrast Adjustment
© © © © © © SYNC
6. Brightness Adjustment
v
Anode Voltage F i g u r e 8.18 - 9

8. Cam Plug. Sync Signal Figure 8.18-8
For Blanking of C R T
9. Power Plug C O M P O N E N T SIDE O F V D E F L E C T I O N B O A R D C O M P O N E N T SIDE OF LINE D E F L E C T I O N B O A R D
10. Power Selection Switch
II. Video B N C IN Connector
^JL
12. Video B N C O U T Connector
( Netzteil )
13. Video 75Q Termination Swi:,
Ul 17 Power
18. Fuse Holders Negative Image
Supply Outside C i r c l e
Jumper setting EXPOSURE 1
U108 Board '
Iaside C i r c l e
1.8 mf C42 Capacitor Installed
for Z1024 Line Display
Power Supply +V Deflection

zzu
0' Image Seperation
- Vertical - Size, Position, J"7~ / EXPOSURE 2
Frequency adjustmants AS Figure 8.18-7
- Horizontal Frequency, Position
Adjustments
© 0 0
220VAC
Test F i l m Imase-
U l 17
U108 X5 Connector Cable
• U109X6 Connector
Figure 8 . 1 8 - 1 0 Figure 8.1

NOTE: REFER TO SECHMATICS IN SERVICE MANUAL BEFORE STARTING MODIFICATION:
Modification of the two frame documentation monitor for use with the "IMS2000 DIGITAL" image system.
WARNNING USE CAUTION W H E N W O R K I N G O N THIS A S S E M B L Y A S H I G H V O L T A G E IS P R E S E N T WHEN 7. After ad)'-5tr".e"i turn off power and remove power cord form power source. Then reinstall the C R T assembly back in the housing reversing s e ; .
POWER IS O N A N D M A Y C A U S E S E R I O U S INJURY
8. Replace frost rover and load film in the film cassette. Insert cassette in documentation camera slot and remove slide to prepare film for exposurt ? s s s H a d copy button to expose
1. Turn off power to monitor cart and disconnect power supply cord form power source. Remove the C R T assembly from the Documentation housing film. Processe film and determine image position and adjust Aperture position as necessary untill images on the film have equal seperation and a L p z e a of images are straight with
and place on a non-conductive support in front of the housing. N O T E : Remove four Allen bolts (item 19) located in the four corners of the edge of film. N O T E : You must make exposures between adjustments to verify image position on the film media. See Figure 8.18 - 11
support bracket to remove C R T assembly. See Figure 8 . 1 8 - 7
9. Adjustmen: si the image quality, i.e.. Contrast and Brightness are to be completed before system is return to use. Keep images for reference an; eg prangs of contrast and brightness
2. Remove V Deflection board and replace C42 capacitor with a 1.8 mf capacitor mounted on the rear of the board. See Figure 8 . 1 8 - 7 above. in the service jc-g for future use.
3. Remove 100 SI resistor from the input video B N C connector of the V M 1721 Pre-Amp assembly and install a 2.2uf capacitor to suppress 10. Change position of jumper from positive image to negative image setting for best image quality. See detail of schematic in service manual
60 Hz hum. See Figure 8 . 1 8 - 7
REVISIONS TOLERANCE UNLESS ITEM 2/FRAME SIDE l OF I
OTHERWISE
4. install CI 1 lOOpf capacitor from R22 to Groung plane on the VM172I circuit board for frequency response. See Figure 8.18 - 10 SPECIFIED
%IMS
APPROVALS : A T E
F I L E NAME
DESCRIPTION D A T E APPROVED
2 FRAME CAMERA MOD
5. Remove Present aperture plate and install new aperture plate and center the aperture plate. fc Produce i o n Release S/23/55 B,.W. DRAWN RICHARD W. = 55
DESIGN RICHARD W. - . • ••• PART NO.
6. Use service software 1MS2OO0 image test display #6 and set image size on the C R T to 45mm + 1.5mm for the inside circle and 83.00mm +
CHECKED
1.5mm for outside circle. See example of image Figure 8.18 - 11. Use adjustment potentiometers on V deflection board for Vertical size and position.
Now adjust the the horizontal size with L6, and horizontal linearity L7 located on the Line Deflection board. If you can not achive the correct size AUTH
SCALE DWG NO. REV
with L6, try to adjust the anode voltage power using P L See Figure 8 . 1 8 - 9 NOTE: BE CAREFUL WHEN ADUSTING 16, L7 AND PI THESE SIZE
Sect. 8.18 Fig 7 - 11 B 82395-1A 1
CONTROL THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY AND MAY CAUSE DAMAGE IF CARE IS NOT EXERCISED. FINISH:
N/A
LMS20)0 Service Manual DO mt S C A L E DRWAING
Page Rev 1 - 7

Exposcop 7000 Service Manual PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Exposcop 7000 Service Manual PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

PREFACE

The IMS2760 System Manual is divided into the following Sections:

1.0 Introduction: This section provides information to assemblers.

5.0 DHHS Adjusting Instructions with Recording of Data: T h i s section describes

7.0 Identification of Major Image Processor Components for the IMS2760:

Exposcop Plus IMS2760 Preface 08/23/95

How to Use This Manual

Testing conditions, precautions and prerequisites listed must be considered.

Exposcop 7000 Section 1 03/21/96

INFORMATION F O RUSER AND ASSEMBLERS

If a mechanical or electrical problem is encountered by the operator during the operational

Exposcop 7000 Section 1 03/21/96

Service L o g When any service is performed on the system.

When a calibration is performed on the system.

F D A F o r m 2579 Report of When a system is installed, or when any

X-ray Tube Housing and High-Voltage

One copy to International Medical Systems, Inc.

F D A Equipment Locator Card When system installation is completed. This

In-Hospital Check-out When system is installed.

Exposcop 7000 Section 1 03/21/96

Testing conditions, precautions and prerequisites listed must be considered.

Exposcop 7000 Section 1 04/05/96

INFORMATION FOR USER A N D ASSEMBLERS

This maintenance manual contains procedures by w h i c h a properly trained and qualified

If a mechanical or electrical problem is encountered by the operator d u r i n g the operational

Exposcop 7000 Section 1 04/05/96

Service L o g When any service is performed on the system.

W h e n a calibration is performed on the system.

F D A F o r m 2579 Report of W h e n a system is installed, or w h e n any

X-ray Tube H o u s i n g and High-Voltage

One copy to International M e d i c a l Systems, Inc.

F D A Equipment Locator Card W h e n system installation is completed. This

I n - H o s p i t a l Check-out W h e n system is installed.

Exposcop 7000 Section 1 04/05/96

THE SAFETY OF B O T H PATIENT A N D OPERATOR HAS B E E N A MAJOR CONSIDERATION

X - R A Y S A N D G A M M A - R A Y S A R E DANGEROUS TO B O T H OPERATOR A N D OTHERS IN

O N L Y AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL SHOULD OPERATE OR DIRECT THE OPERATION OF

STATE A N D L O C A L REGULATIONS A L S O M A Y A P P L Y T H A T M A Y DIFFER SLIGHTLY

E X P O S C O P 7000 Section 2.0 03/21/96

DIAGNOSTIC SURGICAL C - A R M SYSTEMS.

O N L Y PROPERLY TRAINED A N D QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL SHOULD B E

DO NOT R E M O V E ACCESS COVERS F R O M THE GENERATOR, CONTROL UNIT, OR M A I N

E X P O S C O P 7000 Section 2.0 03/21/96

The E X P O S C O P 7000 C - A R M X - R a y system presents no hazards unusual for mobile C - A r m

International Medical Systems, Inc. assumes no responsibility or liability for after

E X P O S C O P 7000 Section 2.0 03/21/96

1. X-ray Tube / Housing Hazards

The operation of X-ray tubes may involve the following hazards:

a. High voltage: Normal operating voltages can be deadly.

2 . Mechanical Movement Hazards

3. Flammable Gas Hazard

E X P O S C O P 7000 Section 2.0 03/21/96

Under no circumstances should any of the safety interlocks in the system be

Hazardous voltage areas:

2. Power transformers — 220Vac and 120Vac.

3. Image power supply control assemblies — 220Vac— 120Vac.

4. Generator invertor control up to 300Vdc at 20Khz

E X P O S C O P 7000 Section 2.0 03/21/96

E X P O S C O P 7000 Section 2.0 03/21/96

1. Turn system off

3. Contact a qualified trained service engineer immediately.

EQUIPMENT OR ELECTRICAL FIRE

2. Evacuate everyone from the area.